Ts 13852104v150100p

ETSI TS 138 521-4 V15.1.
0 (2019-07)
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
5G;
NR;
User Equipment (UE) conformance specification;
Radio transmission and reception;
Part 4: Performance
(3GPP TS 38.521-4 version 15.1.0 Release 15)
3GPP TS 38.521-4 version 15.1.0 Release 15 1 ETSI TS 138 521-4 V15.1.0 (2019-07)
Reference
RTS/TSGR-0538521-4vf10
Keywords
5G
ETSI
650 Route des Lucioles

F-06921 Sophia Antipolis Cedex - FRANCE
Tel.: +33 4 92 94 42 00 Fax: +33 4 93 65 47 16
Siret N° 348 623 562 00017 - NAF 742 C

Association à but non lucratif enregistrée à la
Sous-Préfecture de Grasse (06) N° 7803/88
Important notice
The present document can be downloaded from:

http://www.etsi.org/standards-search
The present document may be made available in electronic versions and/or in print. The content of any electronic and/or
print versions of the present document shall not be modified without the prior written authorization of ETSI. In case of any
existing or perceived difference in contents between such versions and/or in print, the prevailing version of an ETSI
deliverable is the one made publicly available in PDF format at www.etsi.org/deliver.
Users of the present document should be aware that the document may be subject to revision or change of status.
Information on the current status of this and other ETSI documents is available at
https://portal.etsi.org/TB/ETSIDeliverableStatus.aspx
If you find errors in the present document, please send your comment to one of the following services:
https://portal.etsi.org/People/CommiteeSupportStaff.aspx
Copyright Notification
No part may be reproduced or utilized in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying
and microfilm except as authorized by written permission of ETSI.
The content of the PDF version shall not be modified without the written authorization of ETSI.
The copyright and the foregoing restriction extend to reproduction in all media.
© ETSI 2019.
All rights reserved.
DECT™, PLUGTESTS™, UMTS™ and the ETSI logo are trademarks of ETSI registered for the benefit of its Members.
3GPP™ and LTE™ are trademarks of ETSI registered for the benefit of its Members and
of the 3GPP Organizational Partners.
oneM2M™ logo is a trademark of ETSI registered for the benefit of its Members and
of the oneM2M Partners.
GSM® and the GSM logo are trademarks registered and owned by the GSM Association.
ETSI
Intellectual Property Rights

Essential patents
IPRs essential or potentially essential to normative deliverables may have been declared to ETSI. The information
pertaining to these essential IPRs, if any, is publicly available for ETSI members and non-members, and can be found
in ETSI SR 000 314: "Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs); Essential, or potentially Essential, IPRs notified to ETSI in
respect of ETSI standards", which is available from the ETSI Secretariat. Latest updates are available on the ETSI Web
server (https://ipr.etsi.org/).
Pursuant to the ETSI IPR Policy, no investigation, including IPR searches, has been carried out by ETSI. No guarantee
can be given as to the existence of other IPRs not referenced in ETSI SR 000 314 (or the updates on the ETSI Web
server) which are, or may be, or may become, essential to the present document.
Trademarks
The present document may include trademarks and/or tradenames which are asserted and/or registered by their owners.
ETSI claims no ownership of these except for any which are indicated as being the property of ETSI, and conveys no
right to use or reproduce any trademark and/or tradename. Mention of those trademarks in the present document does
not constitute an endorsement by ETSI of products, services or organizations associated with those trademarks.
Legal Notice
This Technical Specification (TS) has been produced by ETSI 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP).
The present document may refer to technical specifications or reports using their 3GPP identities. These shall be
interpreted as being references to the corresponding ETSI deliverables.
The cross reference between 3GPP and ETSI identities can be found under http://webapp.etsi.org/key/queryform.asp.
Modal verbs terminology

In the present document "shall", "shall not", "should", "should not", "may", "need not", "will", "will not", "can" and
"cannot" are to be interpreted as described in clause 3.2 of the ETSI Drafting Rules (Verbal forms for the expression of
provisions).
"must" and "must not" are NOT allowed in ETSI deliverables except when used in direct citation.
ETSI
Contents
Intellectual Property Rights ................................................................................................................................2
Legal Notice .......................................................................................................................................................2
Modal verbs terminology....................................................................................................................................2
Foreword...........................................................................................................................................................10
1 Scope ......................................................................................................................................................11
2 References ..............................................................................................................................................11
3 Definition of terms, symbols and abbreviations .....................................................................................12
3.1 Terms................................................................................................................................................................ 12
3.2 Symbols ............................................................................................................................................................ 12
3.3 Abbreviations ................................................................................................................................................... 12
4 General ...................................................................................................................................................14
4.1 Relationship between minimum requirements and test requirements .............................................................. 14
4.2 Applicability of minimum requirements .......................................................................................................... 14
4.3 Specification suffix information ....................................................................................................................... 14
4.4 Conducted requirements ................................................................................................................................... 14
4.4.1 Reference point ........................................................................................................................................... 15
4.4.2 SNR definition ............................................................................................................................................ 15
4.4.3 Noc.............................................................................................................................................................. 15
4.4.4 Es ................................................................................................................................................................ 15
4.5 Radiated requirements ...................................................................................................................................... 15
4.5.1 Reference point ........................................................................................................................................... 16
4.5.2 SNR definition ............................................................................................................................................ 16
4.5.3 Noc.............................................................................................................................................................. 16
4.5.3.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................... 16
4.5.3.2 Noc for NR operating bands in FR2 ...................................................................................................... 17
4.5.3.3 Derivation of Noc values for NR operating bands in FR2 .................................................................... 17
4.5.4 Angle of arrival ........................................................................................................................................... 17
4.6 Test coverage across 5G NR architecture options ............................................................................................ 18
5 Demodulation performance requirements (Conducted requirements) ...................................................18
5.1 General ............................................................................................................................................................. 18
5.1.1 Applicability of requirements ..................................................................................................................... 18
5.1.1.1 General .................................................................................................................................................. 18
5.1.1.2 Applicability of requirements for different number of RX antenna ports ............................................. 19
5.1.1.3 Applicability of requirements for optional UE capabilities................................................................... 19
5.2 PDSCH demodulation requirements ................................................................................................................ 19
5.2.1 1RX requirements (Void) ........................................................................................................................... 22
5.2.2 2RX requirements ....................................................................................................................................... 22
5.2.2.1 FDD....................................................................................................................................................... 22
5.2.2.1.1 2Rx FDD FR1 PDSCH mapping Type A performance ................................................................... 22
5.2.2.1.1_1 2Rx FDD FR1 PDSCH mapping Type A performance - 2x2 MIMO with baseline receiver
for both SA and NSA ................................................................................................................. 24
5.2.2.1.1_2 2Rx FDD FR1 PDSCH mapping Type A performance - 2x2 MIMO with enhanced
receiver type X for both SA and NSA ....................................................................................... 26
5.2.2.1.2 2Rx FDD FR1 PDSCH mapping Type A and CSI-RS overlapped with PDSCH performance ...... 27
5.2.2.1.2_1 2Rx FDD FR1 PDSCH mapping Type A and CSI-RS overlapped with PDSCH
performance - 2x2 MIMO with baseline receiver for both SA and NSA .................................. 28
5.2.2.1.4 2Rx FDD FR1 PDSCH Mapping Type A and LTE-NR coexistence performance ......................... 30
5.2.2.1.4.0 Minimum conformance requirements ........................................................................................ 30
5.2.2.1.4_1 2Rx FDD FR1 PDSCH Mapping Type A and LTE-NR coexistence performance - 4x2
MIMO with baseline receiver for both SA and NSA ................................................................. 31
5.2.2.2 TDD ...................................................................................................................................................... 34
5.2.2.2.1 2Rx TDD FR1 PDSCH mapping Type A performance................................................................... 34
ETSI
5.2.2.2.1_1 2Rx TDD FR1 PDSCH mapping Type A performance - 2x2 MIMO with baseline
receiver for both SA and NSA ................................................................................................... 36
5.2.2.2.1_2 2Rx TDD FR1 PDSCH mapping Type A performance - 2x2 MIMO with enhanced
5.2.2.2.2 2Rx TDD FR1 PDSCH mapping Type A and CSI-RS overlapped with PDSCH performance ...... 40
5.2.2.2.2_1 2Rx TDD FR1 PDSCH mapping Type A and CSI-RS overlapped with PDSCH
performance - 2x2 MIMO with baseline receiver for both SA and NSA .................................. 40
5.2.3 4RX requirements ....................................................................................................................................... 44
5.2.3.1 FDD....................................................................................................................................................... 44
5.2.3.1.1 4Rx FDD FR1 PDSCH mapping Type A performance ................................................................... 44
5.2.3.1.1_3 FFS ............................................................................................................................................. 49
5.2.3.1.4 4Rx FDD FR1 PDSCH Mapping Type A and LTE-NR coexistence performance ......................... 50
MIMO with baseline receiver for both SA and NSA ................................................................. 51
5.2.3.2 TDD ...................................................................................................................................................... 52
5.2.3.2.1 4Rx TDD FR1 PDSCH mapping Type A performance................................................................... 52
5.3 PDCCH demodulation requirements ................................................................................................................ 59
5.3.1 1RX requirements ....................................................................................................................................... 61
5.3.2 2RX requirements ....................................................................................................................................... 61
5.3.2.1 FDD....................................................................................................................................................... 61
5.3.2.1.1 2Rx FDD FR1 PDCCH 1 Tx antenna performance for both SA and NSA ..................................... 61
5.3.2.2 TDD ...................................................................................................................................................... 67
5.3.2.2.1 2Rx TDD FR1 PDCCH 1 Tx antenna performance for both SA and NSA ..................................... 67
5.3.3 4RX requirements ....................................................................................................................................... 73
5.3.3.1 FDD....................................................................................................................................................... 73
5.3.3.2 TDD ...................................................................................................................................................... 80
5.4 PBCH demodulation requirements ................................................................................................................... 87
5.5 Sustained downlink data rate provided by lower layers ................................................................................... 87
5.5.1 FR1 Sustained downlink data rate performance for single carrier .............................................................. 87
6 CSI reporting requirements (Conducted requirements) .........................................................................97
6.1 General ............................................................................................................................................................. 97
6.1.1 Applicability of requirements ..................................................................................................................... 97
6.1.2 Common test parameters ............................................................................................................................ 97
6.2 Reporting of Channel Quality Indicator (CQI)............................................................................................... 100
6.2.1 1RX requirements (Void) ......................................................................................................................... 100
6.2.2 2RX requirements ..................................................................................................................................... 100
6.2.2.1 FDD..................................................................................................................................................... 100
6.2.2.1.1 CQI reporting definition under AWGN conditions ....................................................................... 100
6.2.2.1.1.1 2Rx FDD FR1 periodic CQI reporting under AWGN conditions for both SA and NSA ........ 100
6.2.2.1.2 CQI reporting under fading conditions .......................................................................................... 105
6.2.2.1.2.1 2Rx FDD FR1 periodic wideband CQI reporting under fading conditions for both SA and
NSA ......................................................................................................................................... 105
ETSI
6.2.2.1.2.2 2Rx FDD FR1 periodic subband CQI reporting under fading conditions for both SA and
NSA ......................................................................................................................................... 113
6.2.2.2 TDD .................................................................................................................................................... 120
6.2.2.2.1 CQI Reporting definition under AWGN conditions ...................................................................... 120
6.2.2.2.1.1 2Rx TDD FR1 periodic CQI reporting under AWGN conditions for both SA and NSA ........ 120
6.2.2.2.2 Wideband CQI reporting under fading conditions ........................................................................ 124
6.2.2.2.2.1 2Rx TDD FR1 periodic wideband CQI reporting under fading conditions for both SA and
NSA ......................................................................................................................................... 124
6.2.2.2.2.2 2Rx TDD FR1 periodic subband CQI reporting under fading conditions for both SA and
NSA ......................................................................................................................................... 129
6.2.3 4RX requirements ..................................................................................................................................... 134
6.2.3.1 FDD..................................................................................................................................................... 134
6.2.3.2 TDD .................................................................................................................................................... 134
6.3 Reporting of Precoding Matrix Indicator (PMI)............................................................................................. 134
6.3.2 2RX requirements ..................................................................................................................................... 134
6.3.2.1 FDD..................................................................................................................................................... 134
6.3.2.1.1 2Rx FDD FR1 Single PMI with 4Tx Type I ................................................................................. 134
6.3.2.1.1_1 2Rx FDD FR1 Single PMI with 4Tx Type I – SinglePanel codebook for both SA and
NSA ......................................................................................................................................... 134
6.3.2.1.2 2Rx FDD FR1 Single PMI with 8Tx Type I – SinglePanel codebook for both SA and NSA ....... 138
6.3.2.2 TDD .................................................................................................................................................... 142
6.3.2.2.1 2Rx TDD FR1 Single PMI with 4Tx Type1 - SinglePanel codebook for both SA and NSA ....... 142
6.3.3 4RX requirements ..................................................................................................................................... 144
6.3.3.1 FDD..................................................................................................................................................... 144
6.3.3.1.1 Single PMI with 4TX TypeI-SinglePanel Codebook– SinglePanel codebook for both SA and
NSA ............................................................................................................................................... 144
6.3.3.1.2 Single PMI with 8TX TypeI-SinglePanel Codebook– SinglePanel codebook for both SA and
NSA ............................................................................................................................................... 149
6.3.3.2 TDD .................................................................................................................................................... 154
6.4 Reporting of Rank Indicator (RI) ................................................................................................................... 164
6.4.2 2RX requirements ..................................................................................................................................... 164
6.4.2.1 FDD..................................................................................................................................................... 164
6.4.2.2 TDD .................................................................................................................................................... 164
6.4.2.2.1 2Rx TDD FR1 RI reporting for both SA and NSA ....................................................................... 164
6.4.3 4RX requirements ..................................................................................................................................... 168
6.4.3.1 FDD..................................................................................................................................................... 168
6.4.3.2 TDD .................................................................................................................................................... 168
6.4.3.2_1 4Rx TDD FR1 RI reporting for both SA and NSA ....................................................................... 168
7 Demodulation performance requirements (Radiated requirements) ....................................................173
7.1 General ........................................................................................................................................................... 173
7.1.1 Applicability of requirements ................................................................................................................... 173
7.1.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 173
7.1.1.2 Applicability of requirements for different number of RX antenna ports ........................................... 173
7.1.1.3 Applicability of requirements for optional UE capabilities................................................................. 174
7.2 PDSCH demodulation requirements .............................................................................................................. 174
7.2.2 2RX requirements ..................................................................................................................................... 179
7.2.2.1 FDD (Void) ......................................................................................................................................... 179
7.2.2.2 TDD .................................................................................................................................................... 179
7.2.2.2.1 2Rx TDD FR2 PDSCH mapping Type A performance................................................................. 179
receiver for SA and NSA ......................................................................................................... 181
7.2.2.2.1_2 2Rx TDD FR2 PDSCH mapping Type A performance - 2x2 MIMO with enhanced type
X receiver for SA and NSA ..................................................................................................... 183
7.3 PDCCH demodulation requirements .............................................................................................................. 184
7.3.1 1RX requirements ..................................................................................................................................... 187
7.3.2 2RX requirements ..................................................................................................................................... 187
ETSI
7.3.2.1 FDD..................................................................................................................................................... 187

7.3.2.2 TDD .................................................................................................................................................... 187
7.3.2.2.1 2Rx TDD FR2 PDCCH 1 Tx antenna performance for both SA and NSA ................................... 187
7.3.2.2.2 2Rx TDD FR2 PDCCH 2 Tx antenna performance for both SA and NSA ................................... 189
7.4 PBCH demodulation requirements ................................................................................................................. 192
7.5 Sustained downlink data rate provided by lower layers ................................................................................. 192
8 CSI reporting requirements (Radiated requirements)...........................................................................192
8.1 General ........................................................................................................................................................... 192
8.1.2 Common test parameters .......................................................................................................................... 192
8.2 Reporting of Channel Quality Indicator (CQI)............................................................................................... 195
8.2.1 1RX requirements ..................................................................................................................................... 195
8.2.2 2RX requirements ..................................................................................................................................... 195
8.2.2.1 FDD..................................................................................................................................................... 195
8.2.2.2 TDD .................................................................................................................................................... 195
8.3 Reporting of Precoding Matrix Indicator (PMI)............................................................................................. 195
8.3.2 2RX requirements ..................................................................................................................................... 195
8.3.2.1 FDD..................................................................................................................................................... 195
8.3.2.2 TDD .................................................................................................................................................... 195
8.4 Reporting of Rank Indicator (RI) ................................................................................................................... 195
8.4.1 1RX requirements ..................................................................................................................................... 195
8.4.2 2RX requirements ..................................................................................................................................... 195
8.4.2.1 FDD..................................................................................................................................................... 195
8.4.2.2 TDD .................................................................................................................................................... 195
9 Demodulation performance requirements for interworking .................................................................195
9.1 General ........................................................................................................................................................... 195
9.2 Void ................................................................................................................................................................ 196
9.2A PDSCH Demodulation for CA ....................................................................................................................... 196
9.2A.1 NR CA between FR1 and FR2.................................................................................................................. 196
9.2B PDSCH Demodulation for DC ....................................................................................................................... 196
9.2B.1 EN-DC ...................................................................................................................................................... 196
9.2B.1.1 EN-DC within FR1 ............................................................................................................................. 196
9.2B.1.2 EN-DC including FR2 NR carrier only............................................................................................... 196
9.2B.1.3 EN-DC including FR1 and FR2 NR carriers....................................................................................... 196
9.2B.2 NR DC between FR1 and FR2.................................................................................................................. 197
9.3 Void ................................................................................................................................................................ 197
9.3A PDCCH Demodulation for CA ....................................................................................................................... 197
9.3A.1 NR CA between FR1 and FR2.................................................................................................................. 197
9.3B PDCCH Demodulation for DC ....................................................................................................................... 197
9.3B.1 EN-DC ...................................................................................................................................................... 197
9.3B.1.1 EN-DC within FR1 ............................................................................................................................. 197
9.3B.1.2 EN-DC including FR2 NR carrier only............................................................................................... 197
9.3B.2 NR DC between FR1 and FR2.................................................................................................................. 197
9.4 Void ................................................................................................................................................................ 197
9.4A SDR test for CA ............................................................................................................................................. 197
9.4B SDR test for DC ............................................................................................................................................. 198
9.4B.1 EN-DC ...................................................................................................................................................... 198
9.4B.1.1 Sustained downlink data rate performance for EN-DC within FR1 .................................................... 198
10 CSI reporting requirements for interworking .......................................................................................208
10.1 General ........................................................................................................................................................... 208
10.2 Void ................................................................................................................................................................ 209
10.2A Reporting of Channel Quality Indicator (CQI) for CA................................................................................... 209
10.2B Reporting of Channel Quality Indicator (CQI) for DC................................................................................... 209
10.2B.1 EN-DC ...................................................................................................................................................... 209
10.2B.1.1 EN-DC within FR1 ............................................................................................................................. 209
10.2B.1.2 EN-DC including FR2 NR carrier ....................................................................................................... 209
ETSI

10.2B.2 NR DC between FR1 and FR2 ............................................................................................................ 209
10.3A Reporting of Precoding Matrix Indicator (PMI) for CA................................................................................. 209
10.3B Reporting of Precoding Matrix Indicator (PMI) for DC................................................................................. 209
10.3B.1 EN-DC ...................................................................................................................................................... 209
10.3B.1.1 EN-DC within FR1 ............................................................................................................................. 209
10.4A Reporting of Rank Indicator (RI) for CA ....................................................................................................... 210
10.4B Reporting of Rank Indicator (RI) for DC ....................................................................................................... 210
10.4B.1 EN-DC ...................................................................................................................................................... 210
10.4B.1.1 EN-DC within FR1 ............................................................................................................................. 210
Annex A (normative): Measurement channels ................................................................................211

A.1 General .................................................................................................................................................211
A.1.1 Throughput definition..................................................................................................................................... 211
A.1.2 TDD UL-DL patterns for FR1 ........................................................................................................................ 211
A.1.3 TDD UL-DL patterns for FR2 ........................................................................................................................ 213
A.2 UL Reference measurement channels ..................................................................................................215
A.2.1 General ........................................................................................................................................................... 215
A.2.2 Reference measurement channels for FDD .................................................................................................... 216
A.2.2.1 RMC for Sustained downlink data rate ..................................................................................................... 216
A.2.2.1.1 CP-OFDM 64QAM ............................................................................................................................. 216
A.2.3 Reference measurement channels for TDD .................................................................................................... 218
A.2.3.1 RMC for Sustained downlink data rate ..................................................................................................... 218
A.2.3.1.1 CP-OFDM 16QAM ............................................................................................................................. 218
A.3 DL reference measurement channels ...................................................................................................219
A.3.1 General ........................................................................................................................................................... 219
A.3.2 Reference measurement channels for PDSCH performance requirements .................................................... 219
A.3.2.1 FDD .......................................................................................................................................................... 220
A.3.2.1.1 Reference measurement channels for SCS 15 kHz FR1 ..................................................................... 220
A.3.2.2 TDD .......................................................................................................................................................... 227
A.3.2.2.1 Reference measurement channels for SCS 15 kHz FR1 (Void) .......................................................... 227
A.3.2.2.5 Reference measurement channels for SCS 120 kHz FR2 ................................................................... 236
A.3.2_1 Reference measurement channels for Sustained downlink data rate performance requirements ................... 244
A.3.2_1.1 FDD .......................................................................................................................................................... 244
A.3.2_1.1.1 Reference measurement channels for SCS 15 kHz FR1 ..................................................................... 244
A.3.2_1.2 TDD .......................................................................................................................................................... 246
A.3.2_1.2.1 Reference measurement channels for SCS 30 kHz FR1 ..................................................................... 246
A.3.3 Reference measurement channels for PDCCH performance requirements .................................................... 249
A.3.3.1 FDD .......................................................................................................................................................... 249
A.3.3.2 TDD .......................................................................................................................................................... 250
A.3.3.2.5 Reference measurement channels for SCS 120 kHz FR2 ................................................................... 251
A.4 CSI reference measurement channels...................................................................................................252
A.5 OFDMA Channel Noise Generator (OCNG) .......................................................................................253
ETSI
A.5.1 OCNG Patterns for FDD ................................................................................................................................ 253

A.5.1.1 OCNG FDD pattern 1: Generic OCNG FDD Pattern for all unused REs................................................. 253
A.5.2 OCNG Patterns for TDD ................................................................................................................................ 254
A.5.2.1 OCNG TDD pattern 1: Generic OCNG TDD Pattern for all unused REs ................................................ 254
Annex B (normative): Propagation conditions ...............................................................................255

B.1 Static propagation condition .................................................................................................................255
B.1.1 UE Receiver with 2Rx .................................................................................................................................... 255
B.1.2 UE Receiver with 4Rx .................................................................................................................................... 255
B.2 Multi-path fading propagation conditions ............................................................................................256
B.2.1 Delay profiles ................................................................................................................................................. 256
B.2.1.1 Delay profiles for FR1 .............................................................................................................................. 257
B.2.1.2 Delay profiles for FR2 .............................................................................................................................. 258
B.2.2 Combinations of channel model parameters .................................................................................................. 259
B.2.3 MIMO Channel Correlation Matrices ............................................................................................................ 260
B.2.3.1 MIMO Correlation Matrices using Uniform Linear Array (ULA) ........................................................... 260
B.2.3.1.1 Definition of MIMO Correlation Matrices .......................................................................................... 260
B.2.3.1.2 MIMO Correlation Matrices at High, Medium and Low Level .......................................................... 262
B.2.3.2 MIMO Correlation Matrices using Cross Polarized Antennas (X-pol) .................................................... 265
B.2.3.2.1 Definition of MIMO Correlation Matrices using cross polarized antennas ........................................ 266
B.2.3.2.2 MIMO Correlation Matrices using cross polarized antennas .............................................................. 267
B.2.3.2.3 Beam steering approach ...................................................................................................................... 269
B.2.4 Two-tap propagation conditions for CQI tests ............................................................................................... 270
B.3 High Speed Train Scenario...................................................................................................................270
B.4 Beamforming Model ............................................................................................................................270
B.4.1 Generic beamforming model .......................................................................................................................... 270
Annex C (normative): Downlink physical channels ........................................................................272

C.0 Downlink signal levels .........................................................................................................................272
C.0.1 FR1 Downlink Signal Levels (Conducted) .................................................................................................... 272
C.0.2 FR2 Downlink Signal Levels (Radiated)........................................................................................................ 272
C.1 Setup .....................................................................................................................................................273
C.1.1 FR1 Setup ....................................................................................................................................................... 273
C.1.2 FR2 Setup ....................................................................................................................................................... 275
C.2 Connection ...........................................................................................................................................277
C.2.1 FR1 Measurement of Performance Characteristics ........................................................................................ 277
C.2.2 FR2 Measurement of Performance Characteristics ........................................................................................ 277
Annex D (normative): E-UTRA link setup config for NSA testing................................................278

D.0 General .................................................................................................................................................278
D.1 E-UTRA test parameters ......................................................................................................................278
D.2 E-UTRA configuration .........................................................................................................................280
D.3 E-UTRA link common physical channel setup ....................................................................................281
D.4 E-UTRA power level............................................................................................................................281
D.4.1 E-UTRA power level (conducted).................................................................................................................. 281
D.4.2 E-UTRA power level (radiated) ..................................................................................................................... 281
Annex E (normative): Environmental conditions ...........................................................................282

Annex F (normative): Measurement uncertainties and test tolerances ........................................283
F.1 Measurement uncertainties and test tolerances for FR1 .......................................................................283
F.1.1 Acceptable uncertainty of test system (normative) ........................................................................................ 283
F.1.1.1 Measurement of test environments ........................................................................................................... 283
F.1.1.2 Measurement of Demod Performance requirements ................................................................................. 283
ETSI
F.1.1.3 Measurement of Channel State Information reporting.............................................................................. 288

F.1.2 Interpretation of measurement results (normative)......................................................................................... 289
F.1.3 Test Tolerance and Derivation of Test Requirements (informative) .............................................................. 289
F.1.3.1 Measurement of test environments ........................................................................................................... 290
F.1.3.2 Measurement of Demod Performance requirements ................................................................................. 290
F.1.3.3 Measurement of Channel State Information reporting.............................................................................. 293
Annex G (normative): Statistical Testing .........................................................................................294

G.1 Statistical testing of Performance Requirements with throughput .......................................................294
G.1.1 General ........................................................................................................................................................... 294
G.1.2 Mapping throughput to error ratio .................................................................................................................. 294
G.1.3 Design of the test ............................................................................................................................................ 295
G.1.4 Pass Fail limit ................................................................................................................................................. 295
G.1.5 Minimum Test time ........................................................................................................................................ 295
G.2 Theory to derive the numbers for statistical testing (informative) .......................................................306
G.2.1 Error Ratio (ER) ............................................................................................................................................. 306
G.2.2 Test Design ..................................................................................................................................................... 306
G.2.3 Confidence level ............................................................................................................................................. 306
G.2.4 Introduction: Supplier Risk versus Customer Risk ........................................................................................ 306
G.2.5 Supplier Risk versus Customer Risk .............................................................................................................. 307
G.2.6 Introduction: Standard test versus early decision concept .............................................................................. 307
G.2.7 Standard test versus early decision concept ................................................................................................... 308
G.2.8 Selectivity ....................................................................................................................................................... 308
G.2.9 Design of the test ............................................................................................................................................ 309
G.2.10 Simulation to derive the pass fail limits ......................................................................................................... 310
Annex H (informative): Test Procedure for FR2 Demod Testing ....................................................312

Annex I (informative): Change history .............................................................................................317
History ............................................................................................................................................................321
ETSI
Foreword
This Technical Specification has been produced by the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP).
The contents of the present document are subject to continuing work within the TSG and may change following formal
TSG approval. Should the TSG modify the contents of the present document, it will be re-released by the TSG with an
identifying change of release date and an increase in version number as follows:
Version x.y.z
where:
x the first digit:
1 presented to TSG for information;
2 presented to TSG for approval;
3 or greater indicates TSG approved document under change control.
Y the second digit is incremented for all changes of substance, i.e. technical enhancements, corrections,
updates, etc.
z the third digit is incremented when editorial only changes have been incorporated in the document.
The present document is part 4 of a multi-part Technical Specification (TS) covering the New Radio (NR) User
Equipment (UE) conformance specification, which is divided in the following parts:
FFS.
ETSI
1 Scope
The present document specifies the measurement procedures for the conformance test of the user equipment (UE) that
contain performance requirements as part of 5G-NR.
The requirements are listed in different clauses only if the corresponding parameters deviate. More generally, tests are
only applicable to those mobiles that are intended to support the appropriate functionality. To indicate the circumstances
in which tests apply, this is noted in the "definition and applicability" part of the test.
For example only Release 15 and later UE declared to support 5G-NR shall be tested for this functionality. In the event
that for some tests different conditions apply for different releases, this is indicated within the text of the test itself.
2 References
The following documents contain provisions which, through reference in this text, constitute provisions of the present
document.
- References are either specific (identified by date of publication, edition number, version number, etc.) or
non-specific.
- For a specific reference, subsequent revisions do not apply.
- For a non-specific reference, the latest version applies. In the case of a reference to a 3GPP document (including
a GSM document), a non-specific reference implicitly refers to the latest version of that document in the same
Release as the present document.
[1] 3GPP TR 21.905: "Vocabulary for 3GPP Specifications".
[2] 3GPP TS 38.101-1: "NR; User Equipment (UE) radio transmission and reception; Part 1: Range 1
Standalone".
Standalone"
and Range 2 Interworking operation with other radios".
[5] 3GPP TS 38.101-4: "NR; User Equipment (UE) radio transmission and reception; Part 4:
Performance requirements".
[6] 3GPP TS 38.508-1: “5GS; User Equipment (UE) conformance specification; Part 1: Common test
environment“
[7] 3GPP TS 38.521-1: ”NR; User Equipment (UE) conformance specification; Radio transmission
and reception; Part 1: Range 1 Standalone”
[8] 3GPP TS 38.521-2: ” NR; User Equipment (UE) conformance specification; Radio transmission
and reception; Part 2: Range 2 Standalone”
[9] 3GPP TS 38.211: "NR; Physical channels and modulation".
[10] 3GPP TS 38.212: "NR; Multiplexing and channel coding".
[11] 3GPP TS 38.213: "NR; Physical layer procedures for control".
[12] 3GPP TS 38.214: "NR; Physical layer procedures for data".
[13] 3GPP TS 37.340: "Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and NR; Multi-
connectivity", Stage 2.
[14] 3GPP TS 38.306: "NR; User Equipment (UE) radio access capabilities".
[15] 3GPP TR 38.901: "Study on channel model for frequencies from 0.5 to 100 GHz".
ETSI
[16] 3GPP TS 36.521-1: "E-UTRA; User Equipment (UE) conformance specification; Radio
transmission and reception; Part1: conformance testing"
3 Definition of terms, symbols and abbreviations
3.1 Terms
For the purposes of the present document, the terms given in TR 21.905 [1] and the following apply. A term defined in
the present document takes precedence over the definition of the same term, if any, in TR 21.905 [1].
aggregated channel bandwidth: The RF bandwidth in which a UE transmits and receives multiple contiguously
aggregated carriers.
carrier aggregation: Aggregation of two or more component carriers in order to support wider transmission
bandwidths.
carrier aggregation band: A set of one or more operating bands across which multiple carriers are aggregated with a
specific set of technical requirements.
carrier aggregation bandwidth class: A class defined by the aggregated transmission bandwidth configuration and
maximum number of component carriers supported by a UE.
carrier aggregation configuration: A combination of CA operating band(s) and CA bandwidth class(es) supported by
a UE.
DL BWP: DL bandwidth part as defined in TS 38.213 [11].
EN-DC: E-UTRA-NR Dual Connectivity as defined in TS 37.340 [13, Section 4.1.2].
FR1: Frequency range 1 as defined in TS 38.101-3 [4, Section 5.1].
FR2: Frequency range 2 as defined in TS 38.101-3 [4, Section 5.1].
PDSCH mapping type A or B: A type of PDSCH allocation sent in the RRC message which defines the time domain
allocation of PDSCH DMRS symbols. PDSCH mapping type A is slot based assignment with fixed starting OFDM
symbol with variable length. PDSCH mapping type B is non-slot based assignment used for configuring min-slots.
SSB: SS/PBCH block as defined in TS 38.211 [9, Section 7.8.3].
3.2 Symbols
For the purposes of the present document, the following symbols apply:
μ Subcarrier spacing configuration as defined in TS 38.211 [9, Section 4.2]

N oc The power spectral density of a white noise source with average power per RE normalized to the
subcarrier spacing as defined in Section 4.4.3 for conducted requirements and Section 4.5.3 for
radiated requirements
3.3 Abbreviations
For the purposes of the present document, the abbreviations given in TR 21.905 [1] and the following apply. An
abbreviation defined in the present document takes precedence over the definition of the same abbreviation, if any, in
TR 21.905 [1].
CA Carrier Aggregation
CC Component Carrier
CCE Control Channel Element
CORESET Control Resource Set
CP Cyclic Prefix
CSI Channel-State Information
ETSI
CSI-IM CSI Interference Measurement

CSI-RS CSI Reference Signal
CW Codeword
CQI Channel Quality Indicator
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
CRI CSI-RS Resource Indicator
DC Dual Connectivity
DCI Downlink Control Information
DL Downlink
DMRS Demodulation Reference Signal
EPRE Energy Per Resource Element
EN-DC E-UTRA-NR Dual Connectivity
FR Frequency Range
FRC Fixed Reference Channel
HARQ Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request
LI Layer Indicator
MAC Medium Access Control
MCS Modulation and Coding Scheme
MIB Master Information Block
NR New Radio
NSA Non-Standalone Operation Mode
OCNG OFDMA Channel Noise Generator
OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing
OFDMA Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access
PBCH Physical Broadcast Channel
Pcell Primary Cell
PDCCH Physical Downlink Control Channel
PDSCH Physical Downlink Shared Channel
PMI Precoding Matrix Indicator
PRB Physical Resource Block
PRG Physical resource block group
PSS Primary Synchronization Signal
PTRS Phase Tracking Reference Signal
PUCCH Physical Uplink Control Channel
PUSCH Physical Uplink Shared Channel
QCL Quasi Co-location
RB Resource Block
RBG Resource Block Group
RE Resource Element
REG Resource Element Group
RI Rank Indicator
RRC Radio Resource Control
SA Standalone operation mode
SCS Subcarrier Spacing
SINR Signal-to-Interference-and-Noise Ratio
SNR Signal-to-Noise Ratio
SS Synchronization Signal
SSB Synchronization Signal Block
SSS Secondary Synchronization Signal
TCI Transmission Configuration Indicator
TDM Time division multiplexing
TTI Transmission Time Interval
UL Uplink
VRB Virtual Resource Block
ETSI
4 General
4.1 Relationship between minimum requirements and test

requirements
TS 38.101-4 is a Single-RAT and interwork specification for NR UE, covering minimum performance requirements of
both conducted and radiated requirements. Conformance is demonstrated by fulfilling the test requirements specified in
the conformance specification 3GPP TS 38.521-4.
The Minimum Requirements given in TS 38.101-4 makes no allowance for measurement uncertainty. The test
specification the present document defines test tolerances. These test tolerances are individually calculated for each test.
The test tolerances are used to relax the minimum requirements in the present document to create test requirements.
The measurement results returned by the test system are compared - without any modification - against the test
requirements as defined by the shared risk principle.
The shared risk principle is defined in Recommendation ITU-R M.1545 [X].
The applicability of each requirement is described under each subclauses in [5.1, 6.1, 7.1 and 8.1] of TS 38.101-4.
4.2 Applicability of minimum requirements

The conducted minimum requirements specified in the present document shall be met in all applicable scenarios for
FR1. The radiated minimum requirements specified in the present document shall be met in all applicable scenarios for
FR2. The interwork minimum requirement specified in the present document shall be met in all applicable scenarios for
NR interworking operation.
All minimum performance requirements defined in Sections 5-8 are applicable to both SA and NSA unless otherwise
explicitly stated in Section 9 and 10.
All minimum performance requirements defined in Sections 5-10 are applicable to all UE power classes unless
otherwise stated.
For radiated minimum requirements specified in the specification, if maximum achievable SNR in the TE chamber for
certain test conditions is less than the defined SNR requirement for those tests, those tests will not be tested.
4.3 Specification suffix information

Unless stated otherwise the following suffixes are used for indicating at 2nd level subclause, shown in table 4.3-1.
Table 4.3-1: Definition of suffixes

Clause suffix Variant
None Single Carrier
A Carrier Aggregation (CA)
B Dual-Connectivity (DC)
C Supplement Uplink (SUL)
A terminal which supports the above features needs to meet the requirement defined in the additional subclause (suffix
A, B, C) in clauses 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10.
4.4 Conducted requirements

4.4.0 Introduction
The requirements are defined for the following modes:
ETSI
- Mode 1: Conditions with external noise source
- Wanted signal with power level Es is transmitted.
- External white noise source with power spectral density Noc is used.
- Es and Noc levels are selected to achieve target SNR as described in Clause 4.4.2.
- Mode 2: Noise free conditions
- No external noise transmitted.
4.4.1 Reference point

The reference point for SNR, Es and Noc of DL signal is the UE antenna connector or connectors.
4.4.2 SNR definition

For Mode 1 conditions conducted UE demodulation and CSI requirements, the SNR is defined as:
ேೃ೉
(௝ )
෍ ‫ܧ‬௦
ܴܵܰ =
௝ୀଵ
ேೃ೉
(௝ )
෍ ܰ௢௖
௝ୀଵ
where- NRX denotes the number of receiver antenna connectors and the superscript receiver antenna connector j.
- The above SNR definition assumes that the REs are not precoded, and does not account for any gain which can
be associated to the precoding operation.
- Unless otherwise stated, the SNR refers to the SSS wanted signal.
- The downlink SSS transmit power is defined as the linear average over the power contributions in [W] of all
resource elements that carry the SSS within the operating system bandwidth.
- The power ratio of other wanted signals to the SSS is defined in clause C.3.1..
4.4.3 Noc
Unless otherwise stated, the spectral density of Noc is [-142dBm/Hz].
4.4.4 Es
Editor’s note: Minimum Es values and derivation procedure are TBD
4.5 Radiated requirements

4.5.0 Introduction
The requirements are defined for the following modes:
- Mode 1: conditions with external noise source
- External white noise source with power spectral density Noc is used.
- Es and Noc levels are selected to achieve target SNR as described in Clause 4.5.2.
ETSI
- Mode 2: Noise free conditions
- No external noise transmitted.
4.5.1 Reference point

The reference point for SNR, Es and Noc of DL signal from the UE perspective is the input of UE antenna array.
Reference point for test

parameters control
Array
d
na
FR be
TE sa
B
UE
Figure 4.5.1-1: Reference point for radiated Demodulation and CSI requirements
4.5.2 SNR definition

For Mode 1 conditions UE demodulation and CSI requirements, the Minimum performance requirement in clause 7, 8,
9 and 10 are defined relative to the baseband SNR level SNRBB. The SNR at the reference point is defined as
SNR = SNRBB + ∆BB
where ∆BB is specified in clause 4.5.3.
The reference point SNR is defined as:

ேೃ೉
(௝ )
෍ ‫ܧ‬௦
ܴܵܰ =
௝ୀଵ
ேೃ೉
(௝ )
෍ ܰ௢௖
௝ୀଵ
- NRX denotes the number of receiver reference points, and the super script receiver reference point j.
- The above SNR definition assumes that the REs are not precoded, and does not account for any gain which can
be associated to the precoding operation.
- Unless otherwise stated, the SNR refers to the SSS wanted signal.
- The downlink SSS transmit power is defined as the linear average over the power contributions in [W] of all
resource elements that carry the SSS within the operating system bandwidth.
- The power ratio of other wanted signals to the SSS is defined in clause C.3.1.
4.5.3 Noc
4.5.3.1 Introduction
For mode 1 conditions radiated testing of demodulation and CSI requirements it is not feasible in practice to use signal
levels high enough to make the noise contribution of the UE negligible. Demodulation requirements are therefore
specified with the applied noise higher than the UE peak EIS level in TS 38.101-2 [3] by a defined amount, so that the
impact of UE noise floor is limited to no greater than a value ∆BB at the specified Noc level. As UEs have EIS levels
that are dependent on operating band and power class, Noc level is dependent on operating band and power class.
ETSI
4.5.3.2 Noc for NR operating bands in FR2

Values for Noc according to operating band and power class for single carrier requirements are specified in Table
4.5.3.2-1 for ∆BB =1dB.
Table 4.5.3.2-1: Noc power level for different UE power classes and frequency bands
Operating band UE Power class
1 2 3 4
n257 -166.8 -163.8 -157.6 -166.3
n258 -166.8 -163.8 -157.6 -166.3
n260 -163.8 -155.0 -164.3
n261 -166.8 -163.8 -157.6 -166.3
Note 1: Noc levels are specified in dBm/Hz
For PC3 multi-band devices, the Noc power level (NocMB) shall increase by multi-band relaxation defined in TS
38.101-2 [3] Table 6.2.1.3-4.
NocMB = NocSB + ΣMBP
- NocSB is the Noc defined in Table 4.5.3.2-1
- ΣMBP values are specified in TS 38.101-2 [3].
4.5.3.3 Derivation of Noc values for NR operating bands in FR2

The Noc values in Table 4.5.3.2-1 are based on REFSENS for the operating band and on the UE Power class, and
taking a baseline of UE Power class 3 in Band n260.
Noc = REFSENSPC3, n260, 50MHz -10Log10(SCSREFSENS x PRBREFSENS x 12) – SNRREFSENS + ∆thermal
where:
- REFSENSPC3, n260, 50MHz is the REFSENS value in dBm specified for Power Class 3 UE in Band n260 for 50MHz
Channel bandwidth in TS 38.101-2 [3] Table 7.3.2.3-1.
- SCSREFSENS is a subcarrier spacing associated with NRB for 50MHz in TS 38.101-2 [3] Table 5.3.2-1, chosen as
120kHz.
- PRBREFSENS is NRB associated with subcarrier spacing 120 kHz for 50MHz in TS 38.101-2 [3] Table 5.3.2-1 and
is 32.
- 12 is the number of subcarriers in a PRB
- SNRREFSSENS = -1 dB is the SNR used for simulation of R EFSENS.
- ∆thermal is the amount of dB that the wanted noise is set above UE thermal noise, giving a rise in total noise of
∆BB. ∆thermal = 6dB, giving a rise in total noise of 1dB.
The calculated Noc value for the baseline of UE Power class 3 in Band n260 in Group Y is rounded to -155 dBm/Hz.
The following methodology to define the Noc level for UE power class X (PC_X) and operating band Y (Band_Y) is
used for the single carrier case and single band devices:
Noc(PC_X, Band_Y) = -155 dBm/Hz + REFSENSPC_X, Band_Y, 50MHz – REFSENSPC3, n260, 50MHz where REFSENS
values are specified in TS 38.101-2 [3].
4.5.4 Angle of arrival

Unless otherwise stated, the downlink signal and noise are aligned to arrive in the UE Rx beam peak direction as
defined in TS 38.101-2 [3].
ETSI
4.6 Test coverage across 5G NR architecture options

The test cases in the present document cover both Standalone (FR1, FR2) as well as Non-Standalone FR1 and FR2 (E-
UTRA and 5G NR interworking) testing. Below shall be the understanding with respect to coverage across 5G NR
architecture options:
1) Unless otherwise stated within the test case, it shall be understood that test requirements are agnostic of the NSA
architecture option configured within the test. The test coverage across NSA options shall be considered fulfilled
by execution of the NSA test case using one NSA option. Subsequently the test results can be leveraged to other
NSA options.
2) Only one SA or NSA architecture option type is identified and utilized in the definition of each test case within
this test specification. NSA test cases are configured using Connectivity EN-DC i.e. NSA Option 3 and
Standalone (SA) test cases are configured using Connectivity NR i.e. SA Option 2, which shall be the default
architecture options used for NSA and SA test execution respectively.
3) If a UE does not support NSA Option 3, any other supported NSA option can be configured to execute the test.
This is accomplished by appropriately picking the generic procedure parameter from Table 4.5.1-2. The leverage
rule detailed in (1) would apply.
Table 4.6-1: Generic procedure parameter summary for SA

Generic Procedure Parameter Description 5G NR SA Architecture
to use in Initial Conditions Option supported by UE
Connectivity NR NG-RAN NR Radio SA Option 2
Access
E-UTRA NG-RAN E-UTRA Radio SA Option 5
Access
Editor's Note: Any additional test config details needed for SA Option 5 is FFS
Table 4.6-2: Generic procedure parameter summary for NSA

Generic Procedure Parameter Description 5G NR NSA
to use in Initial Conditions Architecture Option
supported by UE
Connectivity NSA
EN-DC E-UTRA-NR Dual NSA Option 3
Connectivity
NGEN-DC NG-RAN E-UTRA-NR NSA Option 4
Dual Connectivity
NE-DC NR-E-UTRA Dual NSA Option 7
Connectivity
Editor's Note: Any additional test config details needed for NSA Options 4 and 7 are FFS
5 Demodulation performance requirements (Conducted

requirements)
5.1 General
5.1.1 Applicability of requirements
5.1.1.1 General
The minimum performance requirements are applicable to all FR1 operating bands defined in TS 38.101-1 [2].
ETSI
The minimum performance requirements in Clause 5 are mandatary for UE supporting NR operation, except test cases
listed in Clause 5.1.1.3.
5.1.1.2 Applicability of requirements for different number of RX antenna ports

The number of RX antenna ports for different RF operating bands is up to UE declaration.
The UE shall support 2 or 4 RX antenna ports for different RF operating bands. The operating bands, where 4 RX
antenna ports shall be the baseline, are defined in clause 7.2 of TS 38.101-1 [3]. The UE requirements applicability for
UEs with different number of RX antenna ports is defined in Table 5.1.1.2-1.
Table 5.1.1.2-1: Requirements applicability

Supported RX Test type Test list
antenna ports
UE supports only PDSCH All tests in Clause 5.2.2
2RX PDCCH All tests in Clause 5.3.2
PBCH All tests in Clause 5.4.2
UE supports only PDSCH All tests in Clause 5.2.3
4RX or both 2RX PDCCH All tests in Clause 5.3.3
and 4RX PBCH All tests in Clause 5.4.2 or 5.4.3Note 1
Note1: Requirements for PBCH with 4Rx is up to UE declaration
5.1.1.3 Applicability of requirements for optional UE capabilities

For UE which supports optional UE capabilities the additional performance requirements from Table 5.1.1.2-1 should
be applied.
Table 5.1.1.2-1: Requirements applicability for optional UE capabilities
UE feature/capability Test type Test list Applicability notes

[Enhanced Type X receiver] FR1 FDD PDSCH 5.2.2.1.1 Minimum
requirements for PDSCH
Mapping Type A (Test 3-1)
5.2.3.1.1 Minimum
FR1 TDD PDSCH 5.2.2.2.1 Minimum
5.2.3.2.1 Minimum
[Support alternative additional FR1 FDD PDSCH 5.2.2.1.4 Minimum
DMRS position for co-existence requirements for PDSCH
with LTE CRS] Mapping Type A and LTE-
NR coexistence (Test 1-2)
5.2.3.1.4 Minimum
Mapping Type A and LTE-
NR coexistence (Test 1-2)
5.2 PDSCH demodulation requirements

The parameters specified in Table 5.2-1 are valid for all PDSCH tests unless otherwise stated.
ETSI
Table 5.2-1: Common test parameters
ETSI
Parameter Unit Value

PDSCH transmission scheme Transmission scheme 1
EPRE ratio of PTRS to PDSCH dB N/A
Offset between Point A and the lowest
Actual carrier RBs 0
usable subcarrier on this carrier (Note 2)
configuration
Subcarrier spacing kHz 15 or 30
Cyclic prefix Normal
RB offset RBs 0
Maximum transmission bandwidth
DL BWP
configuration as specified in TS
configuration #1
Number of contiguous PRB PRBs 38.101-1 [6, Section 5.3.2] for tested
channel bandwidth and subcarrier
spacing
Physical Cell ID 0
SSB position in burst First SSB in Slot #0
Common serving
SSB periodicity ms 20
cell parameters
First DMRS position for Type A PDSCH
2
mapping
Slots for PDCCH monitoring Each slot
Symbols with PDCCH Symbols 0, 1
Table 5.2-2 for tested channel
Number of PRBs in CORESET
bandwidth and subcarrier spacing
PDCCH
Number of PDCCH candidates and
configuration 1/AL8
aggregation levels
CCE-to-REG mapping type Non-interleaved
DCI format 1_1
TCI state TCI state #1
Cross carrier scheduling Not configured
First subcarrier index in the PRB used for
k0=0 for CSI-RS resource 1,2,3,4
CSI-RS
First OFDM symbol in the PRB used for l0 = 6 for CSI-RS resource 1 and 3
CSI-RS l0 = 10 for CSI-RS resource 2 and 4
Number of CSI-RS ports (X) 1 for CSI-RS resource 1,2,3,4
CDM Type ‘No CDM’ for CSI-RS resource 1,2,3,4
Density (ρ) 3 for CSI-RS resource 1,2,3,4
15 kHz SCS: 20 for CSI-RS resource
1,2,3,4
CSI-RS periodicity Slots
CSI-RS for tracking 1,2,3,4
15 kHz SCS:
10 for CSI-RS resource 1 and 2
CSI-RS offset Slots
30 kHz SCS:
Start PRB 0
Frequency Occupation
Number of PRB = BWP size
QCL info TCI state #0
k0 = 0
CSI-RS
First OFDM symbol in the PRB used for
l0 = 12
CSI-RS
Number of CSI-RS ports (X) Same as number of transmit antenna
CDM Type ‘FD-CDM2’
NZP CSI-RS for
Density (ρ) 1
CSI acquisition
15 kHz SCS: 20
30 kHz SCS: 40
CSI-RS offset Slots 0
Start PRB 0
k0 = 4
CSI-RS
ZP CSI-RS for CSI
First OFDM symbol in the PRB used for
acquisition l0 = 12
CSI-RS
Number of CSI-RS ports (X) 4
ETSI

Density (ρ) 1
15 kHz SCS: 20
30 kHz SCS: 40
CSI-RS offset Slots 0
Start PRB 0
{1000} for Rank 1 tests
{1000, 1001} for Rank 2 tests
Antenna ports indexes
PDSCH DMRS {1000-1002} for Rank 3 tests
configuration {1000-1003} for Rank 4 tests
Number of PDSCH DMRS CDM group(s) 1 for Rank 1 and Rank 2 tests
without data 2 for Rank 3 and Rank 4 tests
Type 1 QCL SSB index SSB #0
information QCL Type Type C
TCI state #0
Type 2 QCL SSB index N/A
information QCL Type N/A
CSI-RS resource 1 from ‘CSI-RS for
Type 1 QCL CSI-RS resource
tracking’ configuration
information
TCI state #1 QCL Type Type A
Type 2 QCL CSI-RS resource N/A
PTRS configuration PTRS is not configured
Maximum number of code block groups for ACK/NACK feedback 1
Maximum number of HARQ transmission 4
HARQ ACK/NACK bundling Multiplexed
Redundancy version coding sequence {0,2,3,1}
SP Type I, Random per slot with PRB
Precoding configuration
bundling granularity
Symbols for all unused REs OCNG Annex A.5
Note 1: UE assumes that the TCI state for the PDSCH is identical to the TCI state applied for the PDCCH
transmission.
Note 2: Point A coincides with minimum guard band as specified in Table 5.3.3-1 from TS 38.101-1 [6] for tested
channel bandwidth and subcarrier spacing.
Table 5.2-2: Number of PRBs in CORESET
SCS 100
5MHz 10MHz 15MHz 20 MHz 25 MHz 30 MHz 40 MHz 50MHz 60 MHz 80 MHz
(kHz) MHz
15 24 48 78 102 132 156 216 270 N/A N/A N/A
30 6 24 36 48 60 78 102 132 162 216 270
The normative reference for this requirement is TS 38.101-4 [5] clause 5.2
5.2.1 1RX requirements (Void)
5.2.2 2RX requirements
5.2.2.1 FDD
5.2.2.1.1 2Rx FDD FR1 PDSCH mapping Type A performance
5.2.2.1.1.0 Minimum conformance requirements
The performance requirements are specified in Table 5.2.2.1.1.0-3 and Table 5.2.2.1.1.0-4, with the test parameters
defined in table 5.2.2.1.1.0-2 and the downlink physical channel setup according to Annex C.3.1.
The test purposes are specified in Table 5.2.2.1.1.0-1.
ETSI
Table 5.2.2.1.1.0-1: Tests purpose

Purpose Test index
Verify the PDSCH mapping Type A normal performance 1-1, 1-2, 1-3, 2-1, 2-2
under 2 receive antenna conditions and with different
channel models, MCSs and number of MIMO layers
Verify the PDSCH mapping Type A HARQ soft combining 1-4
performance under 2 receive antenna conditions.
Verify the PDSCH mapping Type A enhanced 3-1
performance requirement Type X under 2 receive antenna
conditions and with 2 MIMO layers.
Table 5.2.2.1.1.0-2: Test Parameters for Testing

Duplex mode FDD
Active DL BWP index 1
Mapping type Type A
k0 0
Starting symbol (S) 2
Length (L) 12
PDSCH aggregation factor 1
PDSCH PRB bundling type Static
configuration 4 for Test 1-1
PRB bundling size
2 for other tests
Resource allocation type Type 0
VRB-to-PRB mapping type Non-interleaved
VRB-to-PRB mapping interleaver bundle
N/A
size
DMRS Type Type 1
PDSCH DMRS 2 for Test 1-1
Number of additional DMRS
configuration 1 for other tests
Length Single symbol
8 for Tests 1-4
Number of HARQ Processes
4 for other tests
K1 value
2
(PDSCH-to-HARQ-timing-indicator)
Table 5.2.2.1.1.0-3: Minimum performance for Rank 1
Bandwidth Reference value

(MHz) / Modulation Correlation matrix
Test Propagation Fraction of
Reference channel Subcarrier format and and antenna SNR
num. condition maximum
spacing code rate configuration (dB)
throughput (%)
(kHz)
1-1 R.PDSCH.1-1.1 FDD 10 / 15 QPSK, 0.30 TDLB100-400 2x2, ULA Low 70 0.8
1-2 R.PDSCH.1-1.2 FDD 10 / 15 QPSK, 0.30 TDLC300-100 2x2, ULA Low 70 0.3
256QAM,
1-3 R.PDSCH.1-4.1 FDD 10 / 15 TDLA30-10 2x2, ULA Low 70 24.6
0.82
1-4 R.PDSCH.1-2.1 FDD 10 / 15 16QAM, 0.48 TDLC300-100 2x2, ULA Low 30 1.1

Reference channel Subcarrier format and and antenna
num. condition maximum SNR (dB)
spacing code rate configuration
throughput (%)
(kHz)
64QAM,
2-1 R.PDSCH.1-3.1 FDD 10 / 15 TDLA30-10 2x2, ULA Low 70 19.4
0.51
20 / 30 64QAM,
2-2 R.PDSCH.2-1.1 FDD TDLA30-10 2x2, ULA Low 70 19.7
0.51
ETSI
Table 5.2.2.1.1.0-5: Minimum performance for Rank 2 and Enhanced Type X Receiver

Correlation
(MHz) / Modulation Fraction of
Test Reference Propagation matrix and
Subcarrier format and maximum SNR
num. channel condition antenna
spacing code rate throughput (dB)
configuration
(kHz) (%)
R.PDSCH.1-2.2 16QAM, 2x2, ULA
3-1 10 / 15 TDLA30-10 70 17.6
FDD 0.48 Medium
The normative reference for this requirement is TS 38.101-4 [5], clause 5.2.2.1.1.
5.2.2.1.1_1 2Rx FDD FR1 PDSCH mapping Type A performance - 2x2 MIMO with baseline
receiver for both SA and NSA
Editor's note: This test case is incomplete. The following aspects are either missing or TBD
5.2.2.1.1_1.1 Test purpose
To verify the PDSCH mapping Type A normal performance under 2 receive antenna conditions and with different
channel models, MCSs and number of MIMO layers for a specified downlink Reference Measurement Channel (RMC)
to achieve a certain throughput and as well verify the HARQ soft combining with default baseline receiver
configuration, for Rank 1 and Rank 2 scenarios.
5.2.2.1.1_1.2 Test applicability
This test applies to all types of NR UE release 15 and forward.
This test also applies to all types of EUTRA UE release 15 and forward supporting EN-DC.
5.2.2.1.1_1.3 Test description
5.2.2.1.1_1.3.1 Initial conditions
Initial conditions are a set of test configurations the UE needs to be tested in and the steps for the SS to take with the UE
to reach the correct measurement state.
The initial test configurations consist of environmental conditions, test frequencies, test channel bandwidths and sub-
carrier spacing based on NR operating bands specified in Table 5.3.5-1 and Table 5.3.6-1 of 38.521-1 [7].
Configurations of PDSCH and PDCCH before measurement are specified in Annex C.
Test Environment: Normal, as defined in TS 38.508-1 [6] clause 4.1.
Frequencies to be tested: Mid Range, as defined in TS 38.508-1 [6] clause 4.3.1.1.
For EN-DC within FR1 operation, setup the LTE link according to Annex D:
1. Connect the SS, the faders and AWGN noise source to the UE antenna connectors as shown in TS 38.508-1 [6]
Annex A, in Figure A.3.1.7.1 for TE diagram and clause A.3.2.2 for UE diagram.
2. The parameter settings for the cell are set up according to Table 5.2-1, Table 5.2.2.1.1.0-2 and Table 5.2.2.1.0-3
and as appropriate.
3. Downlink signals for NR cell are initially set up according to Annexes C.0, C.1, C.2, C.3.1 and uplink signals
according to Annexes G.0, G.1, G.2, G.3.1.
4. Propagation conditions are set according to Annex B.0.
5. Ensure the UE is in state RRC_CONNECTED with generic procedure parameters Connectivity NR for SA with
Connected without Release On, Test Mode On or (EN-DC, DC bearer MCG and SCG, Connected without release
On) for NSA according to TS 38.508-1 [6] clause 4.5. Message content are defined in clause 5.2.2.1.1_1.3.3.
ETSI
5.2.2.1.1_1.3.2 Test procedure
1. SS transmits PDSCH via PDCCH DCI format 1_1 for C_RNTI to transmit the DL RMC according to Tables
5.2.2.1.1_1.3-1. The SS sends downlink MAC padding bits on the DL RMC.
2. SS sends uplink scheduling information for each UL HARQ process via PDCCH DCI format [0_1] for C_RNTI
to schedule the UL RMC according to Table 5.2.2.1.1_1.3-1. Since the UL has no payload and no loopback data
to send the UE sends uplink MAC padding bits on the UL RMC.
3. Set the parameters of the bandwidth, MCS, reference channel, the propagation condition, the correlation matrix
and the SNR according to Tables 5.2.2.1.1_1.3-1, 5.2.2.1.1_1.3-2 and 5.2.2.1.1_1.3-3 as appropriate.
4. Measure the average throughput for a duration sufficient to achieve statistical significance according to Annex G
clause G.1.5. Count the number of NACKs, ACKs and statDTXs on the UL during each subtest and decide pass
or fail according to Table G.1.5-1 in Annex G clause G.1.5.
5. Repeat steps from 1 to 4 for each subtest in Table 5.2.2.1.1_1.3-1 as appropriate.
5.2.2.1.1_1.3.3 Message contents
Message contents are according to TS 38.508-1 [6] clause 4.6.1.
5.2.2.1.1_1.3.3_1 Message exceptions for SA
Table 5.2.2.1.1_1.3.3_1-1: PDSCH-Config
Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [6], Table 4.6.3-100

Information Element Value/remark Comment Condition
PDSCH-Config ::= SEQUENCE {
prb-BundlingType CHOICE {
staticBundling SEQUENCE {
bundleSize n4, n2 n4 for test 1-1
n2 for other tests
}
}
}
Table 5.2.2.1.1_1.3.3_1-2: DMRS-DownlinkConfig

DMRS-DownlinkConfig ::= SEQUENCE {
dmrs-AdditionalPosition pos1 For all tests
except test 1-1
pos2 For test 1-1
}
Table 5.2.2.1.1_1.3.3_1-3: PDSCH-ServingCellConfig

PDSCH-ServingCellConfig ::= SEQUENCE {
nrofHARQ-ProcessesForPDSCH n8, n4 n8 for Test 1-4
n4 for other tests
}
5.2.2.1.1_1.3.3_2 Message exceptions for NSA
Same as 5.2.2.1.1_1.3.3_1
ETSI
5.2.2.1.1_1.4 Test requirement
Table 5.2.2.1.1_1.3-2 defines the primary level settings.
The fraction of maximum throughput percentage for the downlink reference measurement channels specified in Annex
A TBD for each throughput test shall meet or exceed the specified value in Table 5.2.2.1.1_1.4-1 and Table
5.2.2.1.1_1.4-1 for the specified SNR including test tolerances for all throughput tests.
Table 5.2.2.1.1_1.4-1: Minimum performance for Rank 1
Reference value
Correlation matrix
Test Modulation Propagation Fraction of
Reference channel and antenna
num. format condition maximum SNR (dB)
configuration
throughput (%)
1-1 R.PDSCH.1-1.1 FDD QPSK, 0.30 TDLB100-400 2x2, ULA Low 70 0.1
1-2 R.PDSCH.1-1.2 FDD QPSK, 0.30 TDLC300-100 2x2, ULA Low 70 0.11
256AM,
1-3 R.PDSCH.1-4.1 FDD TDLA30-10 2x2, ULA Low 70 25.6
0.82
16QAM,
1-4 R.PDSCH.1-2.1 FDD TDLC300-100 2x2, ULA Low 30 2
0.48
Table 5.2.2.1.1_1.4-2: Test Requirements for Rank 2

Reference value
Modulation Correlation matrix
Reference channel format and and antenna SNR
code rate configuration (dB)
throughput (%)
2-1 R.PDSCH.1-3.1 FDD 64QAM, 0.51 TDLA30-10 2x2, ULA Low 70 20.4
2-2 R.PDSCH.2-1.1 FDD 64QAM, 0.51 TDLA30-10 2x2, ULA Low 70 20.7
receiver type X for both SA and NSA
Editor's note: Same editor's note as in clause 5.2.2.1.1_1
to achieve a certain throughput and as well verify the HARQ soft combining with enhanced type X receiver
configuration, for Rank 2 scenarios.
This test applies to all types of NR UE release 15 and forward supporting NR enhanced receiver type X.
This test also applies to all types of EUTRA UE release 15 and forward supporting EN-DC and NR enhanced receiver
type X.
Same test description as in clause 5.2.2.1.1_1.3.
Same initial conditions as in clause 5.2.2.1.1_1.3.1.
Same test procedure as in clause 5.2.2.1.1_1.3.2.
ETSI
Same message contents as in clause 5.2.2.1.1_1.3.3.
Same message exceptions for SA as in clause 5.2.2.1.1_1.3.3_1.
Same message exceptions for NSA as in clause 5.2.2.1.1_1.3.3_2.
5.2.2.1.1_2.3.4 Test requirement
Same test requirement as in clause 5.2.2.1.1_1.3.4.
Table 5.2.2.1.1_2.3.4-1: Test Requirements for Rank 2

Reference channel Subcarrier format and and antenna SNR
spacing code rate configuration (dB)
throughput (%)
(kHz)
3-1 R.PDSCH.1-2.2 FDD 10 / 15 16QAM, 0.48 TDLA30-10 2x2, ULA Medium 70 18.6
5.2.2.1.2 2Rx FDD FR1 PDSCH mapping Type A and CSI-RS overlapped with PDSCH
performance
The performance requirements are specified in Table 5.2.2.1.2.0-3, with the addition of test parameters in table
5.2.2.1.2.0-2 and the downlink physical channel setup according to Annex C.3.1.

Purpose Test index
[Verify the PDSCH mapping Type A normal performance 1-1
under 2 receive antenna conditions and CSI-RS
overlapped with PDSCH]
ETSI
Table 5.2.2.1.2.0-2: Test parameters

Duplex mode FDD
Mapping type Type A
k0 0
Length (L) 12
PDSCH
PRB bundling type Static
configuration
PRB bundling size 2
N/A
size
DMRS Type Type 1
PDSCH DMRS
Number of additional DMRS 1
configuration
Length 1
OFDM symbols in the PRB used for CSI-
NZP CSI-RS for l0 = 13
RS
CSI acquisition
CSI-RS periodicity 5
Subcarrier index in the PRB used for CSI-
(k0, k1, k2, k3)=(2, 4, 6, 8)
ZP CSI-RS for CSI RS
acquisition Number of CSI-RS ports (X) 8
Number of HARQ Processes 4
K1 value
2

Modulation Correlation matrix
Test (MHz) / Propagation
Reference channel format and and antenna Fraction of
num. Subcarrier condition SNR
code rate configuration maximum
spacing (kHz) (dB)
throughput (%)
1-1 R.PDSCH.1-5.1 FDD 10 / 15 16QAM, 0.48 TDLC300-100 2x2, ULA Low 70 14. 8
The normative reference for this requirement is TS 38.101-4 [5] clause 5.2.2.1.2.
5.2.2.1.2_1 2Rx FDD FR1 PDSCH mapping Type A and CSI-RS overlapped with PDSCH
performance - 2x2 MIMO with baseline receiver for both SA and NSA
Verify the PDSCH mapping Type A normal performance under 2 receive antenna conditions and CSI-RS overlapped
with PDSCH
ETSI
Frequencies to be tested: Mid Range, as defined in TS 38.508-1 [6] clause 4.3.1.
For EN-DC within FR1 operation, setup the LTE link according to Annex D
Annex A, in Figure A.3.1.6.2 for TE diagram and section A.3.2 for UE diagram.
as appropriate.
3. Downlink signals for NR cell are initially set up according to Annex C.0, C.1, C.2, C.3.1 and uplink signals
according to Annex G.0, G.1, G.2, G.3.1.
4. Propagation conditions are set according to Annex B.
Connected without release On, Test Mode On or (EN-DC, DC bearer MCG and SCG, Connected without release
On), for NSA according to TS 38.508-1 [6] clause 4.5. Message content are defined in clause 5.2.2.1.2_1.3.3.
1. SS transmits PDSCH via PDCCH DCI format [1_1] for C_RNTI to transmit the DL RMC according to Table
5.2.2.1.2.0-3. The SS sends downlink MAC padding bits on the DL RMC.
to schedule the UL RMC according to Table 5.2.2.1.2.0-3. Since the UL has no payload and no loopback data to
send the UE sends uplink MAC padding bits on the UL RMC.
and the SNR according to Tables 5.2.2.1.2.0-2 and 5.2.2.1.2.0-3 as appropriate.
4. Measure the average throughput for a duration sufficient to achieve statistical significance according to Annex
G.1.5. Count the number of NACKs, ACKs and statDTXs on the UL during each subtest and decide pass or fail
according to Annex G.1.4.
Same as for test number 1-2 in 5.2.2.1.1_1.3.3_1 with following exceptions:
Table 5.2.2.1.2_1.3.3_1-1: NZP CSI-RS-ResourceMapping for CSI Acquisition

CSI-RS-ResourceMapping ::= SEQUENCE {
frequencyDomainAllocation CHOICE {
row1 0001 k0=0
}
firstOFDMSymbolInTimeDomain 13 l0 = 13
}
ETSI
Table 5.2.2.1.2_1.3.3_1-2: CSI-ResourcePeriodicityAndOffset for CSI Acquisition

CSI-ResourcePeriodicityAndOffset ::= CHOICE {
slots5 0 Periodicity 5 slots
and offset 0
}
Table 5.2.2.1.2_1.3.3_1-3: ZP CSI-RS-ResourceMapping for CSI Acquisition
Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [6], clause 4.6.3-45

row1 0010 k0=2
row1 0100 k1=4

row1 0110 k2=6
row1 0100 k3=8
}
nrofPorts P8 Eight Ports
cdm-Type fd-CDM2
density CHOICE {
one NULL
}
freqBand CSI-
FrequencyOccupation
}
Same as 5.2.2.1.2_1.3.3_1
Table 5.2.2.1.2.0-2 defines the primary level settings.
A for each throughput test shall meet or exceed the specified value in Table 5.2.2.1.2_1.4-1 for the specified SNR
including test tolerances for all throughput tests.
Table 5.2.2.1.2_1.4-1: Test Requirements for Rank 2

Bandwidth
Correlation Reference value
(MHz) / Modulation
Test Propagation matrix and
Reference channel Subcarrier format and Fraction of
num. condition antenna SNR
spacing code rate maximum
configuration (dB)
(kHz) throughput (%)
R.PDSCH.1-5.1
1-1 10 / 15 16QAM, 0.48 TDLC300-100 2x2, ULA Low 70 14.8+0.9
FDD
5.2.2.1.4 2Rx FDD FR1 PDSCH Mapping Type A and LTE-NR coexistence performance
The performance requirements are specified in Table 5.2.2.1.4-3, with the addition of test parameters in Table 5.2.2.1.4-
2 and the downlink physical channel setup according to Annex C.3.1.
ETSI
The test purposes are specified in Table 5.2.2.1.4-1.

Purpose Test index
Verify the PDSCH mapping Type A normal performance 1-1, 1-2
under 2 receive antenna conditions with CRS rate
matching configured

Duplex mode FDD
Mapping type Type A
k0 0
9 for Test 1-1
Length (L)
11 for Test 1-2
PDSCH
configuration
PRB bundling size 2
RBG size Config2
N/A
size
DMRS Type Type 1
PDSCH DMRS Number of additional DMRS 1
configuration Maximum number of OFDM symbols for
1
DL front loaded DMRS
Same as NR carrier centre subcarrier
LTE carrier centre subcarrier location
location
CRS for rate
LTE carrier BW MHz 10
matching (Note 1)
Number of antenna ports 4
v-shift 0
The number of slots between PDSCH and corresponding HARQ-
2
ACK information
Note 1: No MBSFN is configured on LTE carrier

Correlation
configuration
(kHz) (%)
R.PDSCH.1-7.1
1-1 10 / 15 QPSK, 0.30 TDLA30-10 4x2, ULA Low 70 -1.0
FDD
R.PDSCH.1-7.2
1-2 10 / 15 QPSK, 0.30 TDLA30-10 4x2, ULA Low 70 -1.0
FDD
MIMO with baseline receiver for both SA and NSA
- TE diagram(4x2) is TBD
ETSI
To verify the Verify the PDSCH mapping Type A normal performance under 2 receive antenna conditions with CRS
rate matching configured.
Annex A, in Figure TBD for TE diagram and section A.3.2.3 for UE diagram.
2. The parameter settings for the cell are set up according to Table 5.2-1, Table 5.2.2.1.4.0-2 and Table 5.2.2.1.4.0-
3 as appropriate.
On), for NSA according to TS 38.508-1 [6] clause 4.5. Message content are defined in clause 5.2.2.1.4_1.3.3.
1. SS transmits PDSCH via PDCCH DCI format 1_1 for C_RNTI to transmit the DL RMC according to Table
2. SS sends uplink scheduling information for each UL HARQ process via PDCCH DCI format 0_1 for C_RNTI to
schedule the UL RMC according to Table 5.2.2.1.4.0-3. Since the UL has no payload and no loopback data to
and the SNR according to Tables 5.2.2.1.4.0-2 and 5.2.2.1.4.0-3 as appropriate.
ETSI
As defined in clause 5.4.2 of TS 38.508-1 [6] with the following exceptions:
Table 5.2.2.1.4_1.3.3_1.1: PDSCH-TimeDomainResourceAllocationList

PDSCH-TimeDomainResourceAllocationList::= 1 entry FR1
SEQUENCE(SIZE(1..maxNrofDL-Allocations)) OF {
PDSCH-TimeDomainResourceAllocation[1]
SEQUENCE {
k0 0
mappingType typeA
startSymbolAndLength 94 Start
symbol(S)=3,
Length(L)=9 for
Test 1-1
66 Start
symbol(S)=3,
Length(L)=11 for
Test 1-2
}
}
Table 5.2.2.1.4_1.3.3_1.5: SearchSpace
Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [6], Table 4.6.3-162 using condition USS, FR1_10MHz, Long_DCI
SearchSpace ::= SEQUENCE {
searchSpaceId SearchSpaceId with USS
condition USS
controlResourceSetId ControlResourceSetId
monitoringSlotPeriodicityAndOffset CHOICE {
sl1 NULL
}
duration Not present 1 slot per default
monitoringSymbolsWithinSlot 00100000000000
nrofCandidates SEQUENCE {
aggregationLevel1 n0
aggregationLevel2 n2 FR1_5MHz
OR
FR1_10MHz
OR
FR1_10MHz
OR
FR1_10MHz
}
searchSpaceType CHOICE { USS
ue-Specific SEQUENCE {
dci-Formats formats0-1-And-1-1 Long_DCI
}
}
}
ETSI
Table 5.2.2.1.4_1.3.3_1.6: ServingCellConfigCommon

ServingCellConfigCommon ::= SEQUENCE {
lte-CRS-ToMatchAround RateMatchPatternLTE-
CRS
}
Table 5.2.2.1.4_1.3.3_1.7: RateMatchPatternLTE-CRS

RateMatchPatternLTE-CRS ::= SEQUENCE {
carrierFreqDL Same as NR carrier
centre subcarrier location
carrierBandwidthDL n50 10MHz
mbsfn-SubframeConfigList Not present
nrofCRS-Ports n4
v-Shift n0
}
Same as 5.2.2.1.4_1.3.3_1.
A for each throughput test shall meet or exceed the specified value in Table 5.2.2.1.4_1.3.4-1 for the specified SNR
Table 5.2.2.1.4_1.3.4-1: Test requirement for Rank 1

Correlation
configuration
(kHz) (%)
R.PDSCH.1-7.1
1-1 10 / 15 QPSK, 0.30 TDLA30-10 4x2, ULA Low 70 0.0
FDD
R.PDSCH.1-7.2
1-2 10 / 15 QPSK, 0.30 TDLA30-10 4x2, ULA Low 70 0.0
FDD
5.2.2.2 TDD
5.2.2.2.1 2Rx TDD FR1 PDSCH mapping Type A performance
The performance requirements are specified in Table 5.2.2.2.1.0-3 and Table 5.2.2.2.1.0-4, with the addition of test
parameters in Table 5.2.2.2.1.0-2 and the downlink physical channel setup according to Annex C.3.1.
ETSI

Purpose Test index
Verify the PDSCH mapping Type A normal performance 1-1, 1-2, 1-3, 1-5, 1-6, 2-2
Verify the PDSCH mapping Type A enhanced performance 3-1
requirement Type X under 2 receive antenna conditions and
with 2 MIMO layers.

Duplex mode TDD
PDCCH 48 for Test 2-3
Number of PRBs in CORESET PRBs
Mapping type Type A
k0 0
Length (L) Specific to each Reference channel
PDSCH
configuration
4 for Tests 1-1
PRB bundling size
2 for other tests

VRB-to-PRB mapping interleaver bundle size N/A
DMRS Type Type 1
Length 1
16 for Test 1-4
8 for other tests
K1 value
Specific to each UL-DL pattern

Correlation
(MHz) / Modulation TDD UL- Fraction of
Subcarrier format and DL maximum SNR
spacing code rate pattern throughput (dB)
configuration
(kHz) (%)
R.PDSCH.2- QPSK, 0.30 FR1.30- TDLB100-
1-1 40 / 30 2x2, ULA Low 70 -1.1
1.1 TDD 1.1 400
R.PDSCH.2- QPSK, 0.30 TDLC300-
1-2 40 / 30 FR1.30-1 2x2, ULA Low 70 0.2
1.2 TDD 100
R.PDSCH.2- 256QAM,
1-3 40 / 30 FR1.30-1 TDLA30-10 2x2, ULA Low 70 25.3
4.1 TDD 0.82
R.PDSCH.2- 16QAM, TDLC300-
1-4 40 / 30 FR1.30-1 2x2, ULA Low 30 1.6
2.1 TDD 0.48 100
R.PDSCH.2- QPSK, 0.3
1-5 40 / 30 FR1.30-2 TDLA30-10 2x2, ULA Low 70 -0.8
5.1 TDD
1-6 40 / 30 FR1.30-3 TDLA30-10 2x2, ULA Low 70 -0.9
6.1 TDD
ETSI

Correlation
(MHz) / Modulation TDD Fraction of
Subcarrier format and UL-DL maximum SNR
configuration
(kHz) (%)
R.PDSCH.2- 64QAM, FR1.30-
2-1 40 / 30 TDLA30-10 2x2, ULA Low 70 19.8
3.1 TDD 0.51 1
2-2 20 / 30 TDLA30-10 2x2, ULA Low 70 19.8
9.1 TDD 0.51 1A

Correlation
configuration
(kHz) (%)
R.PDSCH.2- 16QAM, 2x2, ULA
3-1 40 / 30 FR1.30-1 TDLA30-10 70 18.0
2.2 TDD 0.48 Medium
The normative reference for this requirement is TS 38.101-4 [5] clause 5.2.2.2.1.0.
5.2.2.2.1_1.1 Test Purpose
Verify the PDSCH mapping Type A normal performance under 2 receive antenna conditions and with different channel
models, MCSs and number of MIMO layers
5.2.2.2.1_1.2 Test Applicability
5.2.2.2.1_1.3 Test Description
5.2.2.2.1_1.3.1 Initial Conditions
carrier spacing based on NR operating bands specified in Table 5.3.5-1 of TS 38.521-1.
2. The parameter settings for the NR cell are set up according to Table 5.2-1 and Table 5.2.2.2.1.0-2 and as
appropriate.
ETSI
3. Downlink signals for the NR cell are initially set up according to Annexes C.0, C.1, C.2, C.3.1, and uplink
signals according to Annexes G.0, G.1, G.2, G.3.1.
4. Propagation conditions for the NR cell are set according to Annex B.0.
On) for NSA according to TS 38.508-1 [6] clause 4.5. Message content are defined in clause 5.2.2.2.1_1.4.3.
5.2.2.2.1_1.3.2 Test Procedure
5.2.2.2.1_1.4-1 and Table 5.2.2.2.1_1.4-2. The SS sends downlink MAC padding bits on the DL RMC.
to schedule the UL RMC according to Table 5.2.2.2.1_1.3-3 and Table 5.2.2.2.1_1.3-4. Since the UL has no
payload and no loopback data to send the UE sends uplink MAC padding bits on the UL RMC.
and the SNR according to Tables 5.2.2.2.1.0-2, 5.2.2.2.1_1.4-1 and 5.2.2.2.1_1.4.4-2 as appropriate.
or fail according to Tables G.1.5-2 in Annex G clause G.1.5.
5. Repeat steps from 1 to 4 for each subtest in Table 5.2.2.2.1_1.4.4-1 and Table 5.2.2.2.1_1.4-2 as appropriate.
5.2.2.2.1_1.3.3 Message Contents
Message contents are according to TS 38.508-1 [6] subclause 4.6.1.
Table 5.2.2.2.1_1.3.3_1-1: Void
Table 5.2.2.2.1_1.3.3_1-2: PDSCH-TimeDomainResourceAllocationList
Derivation Path: TS 38.331 [6], clause 6.3.2

PDSCH-TimeDomainResourceAllocationList::= 2 entries FR1
SEQUENCE {
k0 0
mappingType typeA
startSymbolAndLength 53 Start
symbol(S)=2,
Length(L)=12
}
PDSCH-TimeDomainResourceAllocation2
SEQUENCE {
k0 0
mappingType typeA
startSymbolAndLength 44 S=2, L=4
}
}
ETSI

dmrs-DownlinkForPDSCH-MappingTypeA CHOICE {
setup DMRS-DownlinkConfig
}
mcs-Table qam256 256qam table for
test 1-3
Not present 64qam table for all
tests except test
1-3
bundleSize n4, n2 n4 for test 1-1
n2 for other tests
}
}
}

dmrs-AdditionalPosition pos1 For all tests
except test 1-1
pos2 For test 1-1
}

nrofHARQ-ProcessesForPDSCH n16, n8 n16 for Test 1-4,
[2-1]
n8 for other tests
}
Same as 5.2.2.2.1_1.3.3_15.2.2.2.1_1.4 Test Requirements
A.3.2.2 for each throughput test shall meet or exceed the specified value in Table 5.2.2.2.1_1.4-1 and 1 and Table
5.2.2.2.1_1.4-2 for the specified SNR including test tolerances for all throughput tests
ETSI
Table 5.2.2.2.1_1.4-1: Test requirement for Rank 1

Correlation
configuration
(kHz) (%)
R.PDSCH.2- QPSK, 0.30 FR1.30- TDLB100-
1-1 40 / 30 2x2, ULA Low 70 -0.2
1.1 TDD 1.1 400
R.PDSCH.2- QPSK, 0.30 TDLC300-
1-2 40 / 30 FR1.30-1 2x2, ULA Low 70 1.1
1.2 TDD 100
R.PDSCH.2- 256QAM,
1-3 40 / 30 FR1.30-1 TDLA30-10 2x2, ULA Low 70 26.3
4.1 TDD 0.82
R.PDSCH.2- 16QAM, TDLC300-
1-4 40 / 30 FR1.30-1 2x2, ULA Low 30 2.5
2.1 TDD 0.48 100
1-5 40 / 30 FR1.30-2 TDLA30-10 2x2, ULA Low 70 0.2
5.1 TDD
1-6 40 / 30 FR1.30-3 TDLA30-10 2x2, ULA Low 70 0.1
6.1 TDD

Correlation
(MHz) / Modulation TDD Fraction of
Subcarrier format and UL-DL maximum SNR
configuration
(kHz) (%)
2-1 40 / 30 TDLA30-10 2x2, ULA Low 70 20.8
3.1 TDD 0.51 1
2-2 20 / 30 TDLA30-10 2x2, ULA Low 70 20.8
9.1 TDD 0.51 1A
Verify the PDSCH mapping Type A normal performance under 2 receive antenna conditions and with different channel
models, MCSs and number of MIMO layers
type X.
Same test description as in clause 5.2.2.2.1_1.4 with the following exception:
- Table 5.2.2.2.1_2.4-1 instead of 5.2.2.2.1_1.4-1
5.2.2.2.1_2.4 Test Requirements
A.3.2.2 for each throughput test shall meet or exceed the specified value in Table 5.2.2.2.1.4.4-1 for the specified SNR
ETSI
Table 5.2.2.2.1_2.4-1: Test requirement for Rank 2 and Enhanced Type X Receiver

Correlation
configuration
(kHz) (%)
R.PDSCH.2- 16QAM, 2x2, ULA
3-1 40 / 30 FR1.30-1 TDLA30-10 70 19.0
2.2 TDD 0.48 Medium
5.2.2.2.2 2Rx TDD FR1 PDSCH mapping Type A and CSI-RS overlapped with PDSCH
performance
5.2.2.2.2_1 2Rx TDD FR1 PDSCH mapping Type A and CSI-RS overlapped with PDSCH
performance - 2x2 MIMO with baseline receiver for both SA and NSA
Verify the PDSCH mapping Type A normal performance under 2 receive antenna conditions and CSI-RS overlapped
with PDSCH
5.2.2.2.2_1.3 Minimum conformance requirements
The performance requirements are specified in Table 5.2.2.2.2_1.3-3, with the addition of test parameters in table
5.2.2.2.2_1.3-2 and the downlink physical channel setup according to Annex C.3.1.
The test purposes are specified in Table 5.2.2.2.2_1.3-1.
Table 5.2.2.2.2_1.3-1: Tests purpose

Purpose Test index
Verify the PDSCH mapping Type A normal performance 1-1
under 2 receive antenna conditions and CSI-RS
overlapped with PDSCH
Table 5.2.2.2.2_1.3-2: Test parameters

Duplex mode TDD
Mapping type Type A
k0 0
PDSCH
configuration
PRB bundling size 2
N/A
size
DMRS Type Type 1
PDSCH DMRS
configuration
Length 1
ETSI

NZP CSI-RS for l0 = 13
RS
CSI acquisition
Subcarrier index in the PRB used for CSI-
(k0, k1, k2, k3)=(2, 4, 6, 8)
ZP CSI-RS for CSI RS
acquisition Number of CSI-RS ports (X) 8
K1 value
Table 5.2.2.2.2_1.3-3: Minimum performance for Rank 2
Reference value
Bandwidth Correlation
Modulation
Test Reference (MHz) / TDD UL-DL Propagation matrix and Fraction of
format and
num. channel Subcarrier pattern condition antenna maximum SNR
code rate
spacing (kHz) configuration throughput (dB)
(%)
R.PDSCH.2-
1-1 40 / 30 16QAM, 0.48 FR1.30-1 TDLC300-100 2x2, ULA Low 70 14.8
7.1 TDD
The normative reference for this requirement is TS 38.101-4 [2] clause 5.2.2.1.2
carrier spacing based on NR operating bands specified in Table 5.3.5-1 of 38.521-1.
Test Environment: Normal, as defined in TS 38.508-1 [6] clause 5.1.2.1 and 5.1.2.2.
Annex A, in Figure A.3.1.7.1 for TE diagram and section A.3.2.2 for UE diagram.
2. The parameter settings for the NR cell are set up according to Table 5.2-1 and Table 5.2.2.2.2_1.3-2 and as
appropriate.
3. Downlink signals for the NR cell are initially set up according to Annex C.0, C.1, C.2, C.3.1, and uplink signals
Connected without release On, Test Mode On or EN-DC, DC bearer MCG and SCG, Connected without release
On for NSA according to TS 38.508-1 [6] clause 4.5. Message content are defined in clause 5.2.2.2.2_1.4.3.
5.2.2.2.2_1.1-3. The SS sends downlink MAC padding bits on the DL RMC.
ETSI
to schedule the UL RMC according to 5.2.2.2.2_1.1-3. Since the UL has no payload and no loopback data to
and the SNR according to Tables 5.2.2.2.2_1.3-2, 5.2.2.2.2_1.3-3 and 5.2-1 as appropriate.
or fail according to Tables G.1.5-2 in Annex G clause G.1.5.
Message contents are according to TS 38.508-1 [6] subclause 4.6.1
Table 5.2.2.2.2_1.4.3_1-1: PDSCH-TimeDomainResourceAllocationList

PDSCH-TimeDomainResourceAllocationList::= 1 entry FR1
SEQUENCE {
startSymbolAndLength 44 Start For Slot i, if
symbol(S)=2, mod(i, 10) =
Length(L)=4 7 for i from
{0,…,39}
53 Start For Slot i, if
symbol(S)=2, mod(i, 10) =
Length(L)=12 {0,1,2,3,4,5,}
) for i from
{1,…,39}
}
}

resourceAllocation resourceAllocationType0
bundleSize n2 PRB Bundling
size of 2
}
}
}

nrofHARQ-ProcessesForPDSCH n8 8 HARQ’s
}
ETSI
Table 5.2.2.2.2_1.4.3_1-4: PDCCH-ControlResourceSet

ControlResourceSet ::= SEQUENCE {
frequencyDomainResources 11111111 11111111 CORESET to use
10000000 00000000 the least
00000000 00000 significant 102
RBs of the BWP
tci-StatesPDCCH-ToAddList {
0 TCI State #0
1 TCI State #1
}
}
Table 5.2.2.2.2_1.4.3_1-5: CSI-FrequencyOccupation for TRS

CSI-FrequencyOccupation ::= SEQUENCE {
nrofRBs 106 40 MHz TRS
}
Table 5.2.2.2.2_1.4.3_1-6: NZP CSI-RS-ResourceMapping for CSI Acquisition

row1 0001 k0=0
}
}
Table 5.2.2.2.2_1.4.3_1-7: CSI-ResourcePeriodicityAndOffset for CSI Acquisition

CSI-ResourcePeriodicityAndOffset ::= CHOICE {
Slots5 0 Periodicity 5 slots
and offset 0
}
Table 5.2.2.2.2_1.4.3_1-8: ZP CSI-RS-ResourceMapping for CSI Acquisition

row1 0010 k0=2
row1 0100 k1=4
row1 0110 k2=6
row1 0100 k3=8
}
nrofPorts P8 Eight Ports
}
Same as 5.2.2.2.2_1.4.3_2
ETSI
A TBD for each throughput test shall meet or exceed the specified value in Table 5.2.2.2.2_1.3-3 for the specified SNR
including test tolerances for all throughput tests
Reference value
Correlation
Modulation
Test Reference TDD UL-DL Propagation matrix and Fraction of
format and
num. channel pattern condition antenna maximum SNR
code rate
configuration throughput (dB)
(%)
R.PDSCH.2-
1-1 16QAM, 0.48 FR1.30-1 TDLC300-100 2x2, ULA Low 70 15.7
7.1 TDD
5.2.3.1 FDD
5.2.3.1.1 4Rx FDD FR1 PDSCH mapping Type A performance
The performance requirements are specified in Table 5.2.3.1.1.0-3, Table 5.2.3.1.1.0-4, Table 5.2.3.1.1.0-5, Table
5.2.3.1.1.0-6 and Table 5.2.3.1.1.0-7, with the addition of test parameters in Table 5.2.3.1.1.0-2 and the downlink
physical channel setup according to Annex C.3.1.
Purpose Test index

Verify the PDSCH mapping Type A normal performance 1-1, 1-2, 1-3, 2-1, 2-2, 3-1, 4-1
with 3 MIMO layers.

Duplex mode FDD
Mapping type Type A
k0 0
Length (L) 12
PDSCH
configuration PRB bundling type Static
4 for Test 1-1
PRB bundling size WB for Test 3-1
2 for other tests
ETSI

DMRS Type Type 1
Length 1
8 for Test 1-4
4 for other tests
K1 value
2

Correlation
(MHz) / Modulation
Test Reference Propagation matrix and Fraction of
Subcarrier format and
num. channel condition antenna maximum SNR
spacing code rate
(kHz)
(%)
R.PDSCH.1-
1-1 10 / 15 QPSK, 0.30 TDLB100-400 2x4, ULA Low 70 -3.5
1.1 FDD
R.PDSCH.1-
1-2 10 / 15 QPSK, 0.30 TDLC300-100 2x4, ULA Low 70 -2.9
1.2 FDD
R.PDSCH.1-
1-3 10 / 15 256QAM, 0.82 TDLA30-10 2x4, ULA Low 70 21.0
4.1 FDD
R.PDSCH.1-
1-4 10 / 15 16QAM, 0.48 TDLC300-100 2x4, ULA Low 30 -1.5
2.1 FDD

Correlation
(MHz) / Modulation
spacing code rate
(kHz)
(%)
R.PDSCH.1-
2-1 10 / 15 64QAM, 0.51 TDLA30-10 2x4, ULA Low 70 13.5
3.1 FDD
R.PDSCH.2-
2-2 20 / 30 64QAM, 0.51 TDLA30-10 2x4, ULA Low 70 13.7
1.1 FDD

Correlation
(MHz) / Modulation
spacing code rate
(kHz)
(%)
R.PDSCH.1-
3-1 10 / 15 16QAM, 0.48 TDLA30-10 4x4, ULA Low 70 11.0
2.3 FDD

Correlation
(MHz) / Modulation
spacing code rate
(kHz)
(%)
R.PDSCH.1-
4-1 10 / 15 16QAM, 0.48 TDLA30-10 4x4, ULA Low 70 15.6
2.4 FDD
ETSI

Correlation
(MHz) / Modulation
spacing code rate
(kHz)
(%)
R.PDSCH.1- 4x4, ULA
5-1 10 / 15 16QAM, 0.48 TDLA30-10 70 22.3
2.3 FDD Medium A
This test applies to all types of NR UE release 15 and forward supporting 4 Rx antenna ports.
This test also applies to all types of EUTRA UE release 15 and forward supporting EN-DC and 4 Rx antenna ports.
For EN-DC within FR1 operation, setup the LTE link according to Annex D.
2. The parameter settings for the cell are set up according to Tables 5.2-1 and 5.2.3.1.1.0-2 and as appropriate.
5. Ensure the UE is in state RRC_CONNECTED with generic procedure parameters Connectivity NR for SA or
(EN-DC, DC bearer MCG and SCG, Connected without release On) for NSA according to TS 38.508-1 [6]
clause 4.5. Message content are defined in clause 5.2.3.1.1_1.3.3.
ETSI
to schedule the UL RMC according to Table 5.2.3.1.1.0-2. Since the UL has no payload and no loopback data to
and the SNR according to Tables 5.2.3.1.1_1.4-1 and 5.2.3.1.1_1.4-2 as appropriate.
5. Repeat steps from 1 to 4 for each subtest in Table 5.2.3.1.1.0-1 as appropriate.
Message contents are according to TS 38.508-1 [6] clause 4.6.1 and 5.4.2.
Table 5.2.3.1.1_1.3.3_1-1: BWP

BWP ::= SEQUENCE {
locationAndBandwidth 13750 For Test 2-2
(20MHz BW, SCS
30kHz)
14025 For other tests
(10MHz BW, SCS
15kHz)
}

bundleSize n4 n4 for test 1-1
wideband wideband for test
3-1
Not present n2 for other tests
}
}
}

dmrs-AdditionalPosition pos1 pos1 for all tests
except test 1-1
Not present pos2 for test 1-1
}
ETSI

nrofHARQ-ProcessesForPDSCH Not present n8 for test 1-4
n4 n4 for other tests
}
Same as 5.2.3.1.1_1.3.3_1
Table 5.2.3.1.1.0-3 and Table 5.2.3.1.1.0-4 define the primary level settings.
A.3.2.1 for each throughput test shall meet or exceed the specified value in Table 5.2.3.1.1_1.4-1 and Table
Table 5.2.3.1.1_1.4-1: Test Requirement for Rank 1

Correlation
(MHz) / Modulation
spacing code rate
(kHz)
(%)
R.PDSCH.1-
1-1 10 / 15 QPSK, 0.30 TDLB100-400 2x4, ULA Low 70 -2.6
1.1 FDD
R.PDSCH.1-
1-2 10 / 15 QPSK, 0.30 TDLC300-100 2x4, ULA Low 70 -2.0
1.2 FDD
R.PDSCH.1-
1-3 10 / 15 256QAM, 0.82 TDLA30-10 2x4, ULA Low 70 22.0
4.1 FDD
R.PDSCH.1-
1-4 10 / 15 16QAM, 0.48 TDLC300-100 2x4, ULA Low 30 -0.6
2.1 FDD

Correlation
(MHz) / Modulation
spacing code rate
(kHz)
(%)
R.PDSCH.1-
2-1 10 / 15 64QAM, 0.51 TDLA30-10 2x4, ULA Low 70 14.5
3.1 FDD
R.PDSCH.2-
2-2 20 / 30 64QAM, 0.51 TDLA30-10 2x4, ULA Low 70 14.7
1.1 FDD
ETSI
- Table 5.2.3.1.1_2.4-1 instead of 5.2.3.1.1_1.4-1
- Table 5.2.3.1.1_2.4-2 instead of 5.2.3.1.1_1.4-2
- Figure A.3.1.7.5 instead of A.3.1.7.4
Table 5.2.3.1.1.0-5 and Table 5.2.3.1.1.0-6 define the primary level settings.
A.3.2.1 for each throughput test shall meet or exceed the specified value in Table 5.2.3.1.1_2.4-1 and Table

Correlation
(MHz) / Modulation
spacing code rate
(kHz)
(%)
R.PDSCH.1-
3-1 10 / 15 16QAM, 0.48 TDLA30-10 4x4, ULA Low 70 12.0
2.3 FDD

Correlation
(MHz) / Modulation
spacing code rate
(kHz)
(%)
R.PDSCH.1-
4-1 10 / 15 16QAM, 0.48 TDLA30-10 4x4, ULA Low 70 16.6
2.4 FDD
5.2.3.1.1_3 FFS
To verify the PDSCH mapping Type A enhanced performance under 4 receive antenna conditions for a specified
downlink Reference Measurement Channel (RMC) to achieve a certain throughput and as well verify the HARQ soft
combining with default enhanced receiver type X configuration, for Rank 3 scenario.
This test applies to all types of NR UE release 15 and forward supporting 4 Rx antenna ports and NR enhanced receiver
type X.
ETSI
This test also applies to all types of EUTRA UE release 15 and forward supporting EN-DC, 4 Rx antenna ports and NR
enhanced receiver type X.
- Figure A.3.1.7.4 instead of A.3.1.7.5
Step 3 of Test procedure as in clause 5.2.3.1.1_1.3.2 is replaced by:
and the SNR according to Table 5.2.3.1.1_4.4-1 as appropriate.
A.3.2.1 for each throughput test shall meet or exceed the specified value in Table 5.2.3.1.1_4.4-1 for the specified SNR
Table 5.2.3.1.1_4.4-1: Test Requirement for Rank 3 and Enhanced Type X Receiver

Correlation
(MHz) / Modulation
spacing code rate
(kHz)
(%)
R.PDSCH.1- 4x4, ULA
5-1 10 / 15 16QAM, 0.48 TDLA30-10 70 23.3
2.3 FDD Medium A
5.2.3.1.4 4Rx FDD FR1 PDSCH Mapping Type A and LTE-NR coexistence performance
The performance requirements are specified in Table 5.2.3.1.4-3, with the addition of test parameters in Table
5.2.3.1.4.0-2 and the downlink physical channel setup according to Annex C.3.1.

Purpose Test index
Verify the PDSCH mapping Type A normal performance 1-1, 1-2
under 4 receive antenna conditions with CRS rate
matching configured
ETSI

Duplex mode FDD
Mapping type Type A
k0 0
9 for Test 1-1
Length (L)
11 for Test 1-2
PDSCH
configuration
PRB bundling size 2
RBG size Config2
N/A
size
DMRS Type Type 1
PDSCH DMRS Number of additional DMRS 1
configuration Maximum number of OFDM symbols for
1
DL front loaded DMRS
Same as NR carrier centre subcarrier
LTE carrier centre subcarrier location
location
CRS for rate
LTE carrier BW MHz 10
matching (Note 1)
Number of antenna ports 4
v-shift 0
The number of slots between PDSCH and corresponding HARQ-
2
ACK information
Note 1: No MBSFN is configured on LTE carrier

Bandwidth
Reference value
(MHz) / Correlation
Modulation
Test Reference Subcarrier Propagation matrix and Fraction of
format and
num. channel spacing condition antenna maximum SNR
code rate
(kHz) configuration throughput (dB)
(%)
R.PDSCH.1-7.1 10 / 15
1-1 QPSK, 0.30 TDLA30-10 4x4, ULA Low 70 -4.0
FDD
R.PDSCH.1-7.2 10 / 15
FDD
MIMO with baseline receiver for both SA and NSA
Same as 5.2.2.1.4_1.1.
This test also applies to all types of EUTRA UE release 15 and forward supporting EN-DC supporting 4 Rx antenna
ports.
ETSI
Same as 5.2.2.1.4_1.3.1 with the following exceptions:
- Use Figure A.3.1.7.4 for TE diagram
- Use Figure A.3.2.5 for UE diagram
- Instead of 5.2.2.1.4.x  refer 5.2.2.3.4.x

Same as 5.2.2.3.4_1.3.2 with the following exceptions:
- Instead of 5.2.2.1.4.x  refer 5.2.2.3.4.x

Same as 5.2.2.1.4_1.3.3.
A for each throughput test shall meet or exceed the specified value in Table 5.2.3.1.4_1.3.4-1 for the specified SNR
Table 5.2.3.1.4_1.3.4-1: Test requirement for Rank 1

Bandwidth
Reference value
(MHz) / Correlation
Modulation
Test Reference Subcarrier Propagation matrix and Fraction of
format and
num. channel spacing condition antenna maximum SNR
code rate
(kHz) configuration throughput (dB)
(%)
R.PDSCH.1-7.1 10 / 15
FDD
R.PDSCH.1-7.1 10 / 15
FDD
5.2.3.2 TDD
5.2.3.2.1.0 Minimum conformance requirements for PDSCH Mapping Type A
The performance requirements are specified in Table 5.2.3.2.1.0-3, Table 5.2.3.2.1.0-4, Table 5.2.3.2.1.0-5 and Table
5.2.3.2.1.0-6, with the test parameters defined in Table 5.2.3.2.1.0-2 and the downlink physical channel setup according
to Annex C.3.1.
ETSI

Purpose Test index
[Verify the PDSCH mapping Type A normal performance [1-1, 1-2, 1-3, 1-5, 1-6, 2-1, 2-2, 3-1, 4-1]
under4 receive antenna conditions and with different
channel models, MCSs and number of MIMO layers]
[Verify the PDSCH mapping Type A HARQ soft combining [1-4]
performance under 4 receive antenna conditions.]
[Verify the PDSCH mapping Type A enhanced performance [3-2]
with 3 MIMO layers.]
Table 5.2.3.2.1.0-2: Test Parameters for Testing

20 for Test 2-2
Channel bandwidth MHz
40 for other tests
Duplex mode TDD
First PRB 0
DL BWP 51 for Test 2-2
Number of contiguous PRB PRBs
configuration #1 106 for other tests
Subcarrier spacing kHz 30
PDCCH 48 for Test 2-2
Number of PRBs in CORESET PRBs
Mapping type Type A
k0 0
PDSCH
configuration
4 for Test 1-1
PRB bundling size
2 for other tests
DMRS Type Type 1
PDSCH DMRS 2 for Tests 1-1
Length 1
16 for Test 1-4, [2-1]
8 for other tests
K1 value
ETSI

Reference value
Correlation
Modulation Fraction of
Test Reference TDD UL-DL Propagation matrix and
format and maximum SNR
num. channel pattern condition antenna
code rate throughput (dB)
configuration
(%)
1-1 FR1.30-1 TDLB100-400 2x4, ULA Low 70 [-3.9]
1.1 TDD
1-2 FR1.30-1 TDLC300-100 2x4, ULA Low 70 [-2.7]
1.2 TDD
R.PDSCH.2- 256QAM, 0.82
1-3 FR1.30-1 TDLA30-10 2x4, ULA Low 70 [TBD]
4.1 TDD
R.PDSCH.2- 16QAM, 0.48
1-4 FR1.30-1 TDLC300-100 2x4, ULA Low 30 [-1.1]
2.1 TDD
[R.PDSCH.2- QPSK, 0.3
1-5 FR1.30-2 TDLA30-10 2x4, ULA Low 70 [-3.9]
5.1 TDD]
[R.PDSCH.2- QPSK, 0.30
1-6 FR1.30-3 TDLA30-10 2x4, ULA Low 70 [-3.9]
6.1 TDD]

Reference value
Correlation
configuration
(%)
R.PDSCH.2-
2-1 64QAM, 0.51 FR1.30-1 TDLA30-10 2x4, ULA Low 70 TBD
3.1 TDD
R.PDSCH.2-
2-2 64QAM, 0.51 FR1.30-1 TDLA30-10 2x4, ULA Low 70 [13.8]
3.2 TDD
Reference value
Correlation
configuration
(%)
R.PDSCH.2-
2.3 TDD
R.PDSCH.2- 4x4, ULA
3-2 16QAM, 0.48 FR1.30-1 TDLA30-10 70 [22.9]
2.3 TDD Medium A

Reference value
Correlation
configuration
(%)
R.PDSCH.2-
2.4 TDD
- Following are pending RAN4 core spec update
ETSI
-SNR is in [ ]
-Annex for measurement uncertainty and test tolerance is TBD
-Annex for DL and UL signal setup is TBD
- PDSCH and PDCCH configuration before measurement is TBD
- LTE link setup details is TBD
- Propagation condition description in Annex is TBD
- Annex for statistical tput calculation is TBD
- Test tolerance analysis is missing
- Message contents are TBD
- TCI State/QCL Info is TBD
- Connection diagram is TBD
-All TBD's coming from core requirement in 38.101-4 pertaining to this test case needs to be defined
[To verify the PDSCH mapping Type A normal performance under 4 receive antenna conditions and with different
configuration, for Rank 1, Rank 2, Rank 3 & Rank 4 scenarios.]
carrier spacing based on NR operating bands specified in Table 5.3.5-1 and Table 5.3.6-1 of 38.521-1 [TBD].
Test Environment: Normal, as defined in TS 38.508-1 [TBD] clause TBD.
Frequencies to be tested: Mid Range, as defined in TS 38.508-1 [TBD] clause TBD.
1. Connect the SS, the faders and AWGN noise source to the UE antenna connectors as shown in TS 38.508-1
[TBD] Annex A, in Figure TBD for TE diagram and clause TBD for UE diagram.
2. The parameter settings for the cell are set up according to Table 5.2-1 and Table 5.2.3.2.1.0-2 and as appropriate.
ETSI
(EN-DC, DC bearer MCG and SCG, Connected without release On) for NSA according to TS 38.508-1 [TBD]
clause 4.5. Message content are defined in clause 5.2.3.2.1_1.4.3.
5.2.3.2.1.0-3, Table 5.2.3.2.1.0-4, Table 5.2.3.2.1.0-5 and Table 5.2.3.2.1.0-6. The SS sends downlink MAC
padding bits on the DL RMC.
to schedule the UL RMC according to Table 5.2.3.2.1.0-3, Table 5.2.3.2.1.0-4, Table 5.2.3.2.1.0-5 and Table
5.2.3.2.1.0-6. Since the UL has no payload and no loopback data to send the UE sends uplink MAC padding bits
on the UL RMC.
and the SNR according to Tables 5.2.3.2.1.0-1, 5.2.3.2.1.0-2 and as appropriate.
TBD clause TBD. Count the number of NACKs, ACKs and statDTXs on the UL during each subtest and decide
pass or fail according to Tables TBD in Annex TBD clause TBD.
Message contents are according to TS 38.508-1 [TBD] clause 4.6.1.
Table 5.2.3.2.1_1.3.3_1: message exceptions for SA
FFS
Table 5.2.3.2.1_1.3.3_2: message exceptions for NSA
FFS
A TBD for each throughput test shall meet or exceed the specified value in Table 5.2.3.2.1_1.3.4-1, Table
5.2.3.2.1_1.3.4-2, Table 5.2.3.2.1_1.3.4-3 and Table 5.2.3.2.1_1.3.4-4 for the specified SNR including test tolerances
for all throughput tests.
ETSI

Reference value
Correlation
configuration
(%)
R.PDSCH.2- QPSK, 0.30 [-3.9]
1-1 FR1.30-1 TDLB100-400 2x4, ULA Low 70
1.1 TDD + TT
R.PDSCH.2- QPSK, 0.30 [-2.7]
1-2 FR1.30-1 TDLC300-100 2x4, ULA Low 70
1.2 TDD + TT
R.PDSCH.2- 256QAM, 0.82 [TBD]
1-3 FR1.30-1 TDLA30-10 2x4, ULA Low 70
4.1 TDD + TT
R.PDSCH.2- 16QAM, 0.48 [-1.1]
1-4 FR1.30-1 TDLC300-100 2x4, ULA Low 30
2.1 TDD + TT
[R.PDSCH.2- QPSK, 0.3 [-3.9]
1-5 FR1.30-2 TDLA30-10 2x4, ULA Low 70
5.1 TDD] + TT
[R.PDSCH.2- QPSK, 0.30 [-3.9]
1-6 FR1.30-3 TDLA30-10 2x4, ULA Low 70
6.1 TDD] + TT

Reference value
Correlation
configuration
(%)
R.PDSCH.2- [TBD]
2-1 64QAM, 0.51 FR1.30-1 TDLA30-10 2x4, ULA Low 70
3.1 TDD + TT
R.PDSCH.2- [13.8]
3.2 TDD + TT
Same test purpose as in clause 5.2.3.2.1_1.1.
Same test applicability as in clause 5.2.3.2.1_1.2.
ETSI
FFS
FFS
Same test requirement as in 5.2.3.2.1_1.3.4

Reference value
Correlation
configuration
(%)
R.PDSCH.2- [11.4]
2.3 TDD + TT

Reference value
Correlation
configuration
(%)
R.PDSCH.2- [16.1]
2.4 TDD + TT
5.2.3.2.1_3 FFS
Same test purpose as in clause 5.2.3.2.1_1.1.
Same test applicability as in clause 5.2.3.2.1_1.2.
ETSI
FFS
FFS
Same test requirement as in clause 5.2.3.2.1_1.3.4.

Reference value
Correlation
configuration
(%)
R.PDSCH.2- 4x4, ULA [22.9]
3-2 16QAM, 0.48 FR1.30-1 TDLA30-10 70
2.3 TDD Medium A + TT
5.3 PDCCH demodulation requirements

The receiver characteristics of the PDCCH are determined by the probability of miss-detection of the Downlink
Scheduling Grant (Pm-dsg).
The parameters specified in Table 5.3-1 are valid for all PDCCH tests unless otherwise stated.
ETSI
Table 5.3-1: Common test Parameters

DL BWP
configuration Cyclic prefix Normal
#1
Common Physical Cell ID 0
serving cell SSB position in burst 1
parameters SSB periodicity ms 20
PDCCH
Number of PDCCH candidates 1
configuration
First subcarrier index in the PRB
0
used for CSI-RS (k0)
CSI-RS resource 1:
4
CSI-RS resource 2:
First OFDM symbol in the PRB 8
used for CSI-RS (l0) CSI-RS resource 3:
4
CSI-RS resource 4:
8
CDM Type No CDM
Density (ρ) 3
15 kHz SCS: 20
CSI-RS for 30 kHz SCS: 40
tracking 15 kHz SCS:
10 for CSI-RS
resource 1 and 2
11 for CSI-RS
resource 3 and 4
CSI-RS offset Slots
30 kHz SCS:
20 for CSI-RS
resource 1 and 2
21 for CSI-RS
resource 3 and 4
Start PRB 0
Frequency Occupation Number of PRB =
BWP size
Type 1 SSB index SSB #0
QCL
informatio QCL Type Type C
n
TCI state #0
QCL
informatio QCL Type Type D
n
CSI-RS resource 1
Type 1
from ‘CSI-RS for
QCL CSI-RS resource
tracking’
informatio
configuration
n
QCL Type Type A
TCI state #1
CSI-RS resource 1
Type 2
from ‘CSI-RS for
QCL CSI-RS resource
tracking’
informatio
configuration
n
QCL Type Type D
SP Type I, Random
per slot with REG
Precoding configuration bundling granularity
for number of Tx
larger than 1
Symbols for all unused Res OCNG in Annex A.5
ETSI
The normative reference for this requirement is TS 38.101-4 [2] clause 5.3.

(Void)
5.3.2.1 FDD
The parameters specified in Table 5.3.2.1-1 are valid for all FDD tests unless otherwise stated.
Table 5.3.2.1-1: Test Parameters

Parameter Unit 1 Tx Antenna 2 Tx Antenna
CCE to REG mapping type nonInterleaved
REG bundle size 6
Shift index 0
5.3.2.1.1 2Rx FDD FR1 PDCCH 1 Tx antenna performance for both SA and NSA
5.3.2.1.1.1 Test Purpose
This test verifies the demodulation performance of PDCCH for a single-antenna port with a given SNR for which the
average probability of miss-detection of the Downlink Scheduling Grant (Pm-dsg), shall be below the specified value in
Table 5.3.2.1.1.3-1. The downlink physical setup is in accordance with Annex C.3.1.
5.3.2.1.1.2 Test applicability
For the parameters specified in Table 5.3.2.1-1, the average probability of a missed downlink scheduling grant (Pm-dsg)
shall be below the specified value in Table 5.3.2.1.1.3-1. The downlink physical setup is in accordance with Annex
C.3.1.
Table 5.3.2.1.1.3-1: Minimum performance for 1 Tx PDCCH with 15 kHz SCS

Antenna Reference value
CORE
Test COR Aggreg configur
Bandwi SET Propagation
numb ESE ation Reference Channel ation and Pm-dsg SNR
dth durati Condition
er T RB level correlati (%) (dB)
on
on Matrix
1 10 MHz 24 2 2 R.PDCCH.1-2.1 FDD TDLA30-10 1x2 Low 1 8.0
2 10 MHz 24 2 2 R.PDCCH.1-2.3 FDD TDLC300-100 1x2 Low 1 8.1
5 10 MHz 48 2 16 R.PDCCH.1-2.6 FDD TDLA30-10 1x2 Low 1 -2.1
ETSI
5.3.2.1.1.4 Test description
5.3.2.1.1.4.1 Initial conditions
Configurations of PDCCH before measurement are specified in Annex C.
Annex A in Figure A.3.1.7.2 for TE diagram and clause A.3.2.2 for UE diagram.
2. The parameter settings for the cell are set up according to Table 5.3-1 and Table 5.3.2.1.1-1 and as appropriate.
Connected without Release On, Test Mode On or (EN-DC, DC bearer MCG and SCG, Connected without
Release On) for NSA according to TS 38.508-1 [6] clause 4.5. Message content are defined in clause
5.2.2.1.1.4.3.
5.3.2.1.1.4.2 Test procedure
1. SS transmits PDCCH with DCI format 1_1 for C_RNTI to transmit the DL RMC according to Table 5.3.2.1.1-1.
The details of PDCCH are specified in Table 5.3.1, Table 5.3.2.1-1, Table 5.3.2.1.1.3-1 respectively. The SS
sends downlink MAC padding bits on the DL RMC.
2. Set the parameters of the propagation condition, antenna configuration, the correlation matrix and the SNR
according to Table 5.3.2.1.1-1 as appropriate.
3. Measure the Pm-dsg for a duration sufficient to achieve statistical significance according to Annex G clause
G.1.5. Count the number of NACKs, ACKs and statDTXs on the UL PUCCH during each subtest interval. Pm-
dsg is the ratio (statDTX)/(NACK+ACK+statDTX). If Pm-dsg is less than the value specified in table 5.3.2.1.1-
1, pass the UE. Otherwise fail the UE.
4. Repeat steps from 1 to 3 for each subtest in Table 5.3.2.1.1-1 as appropriate.
5.3.2.1.1.4.3 Message contents
ETSI
5.3.2.1.1.4.3.1 Message exceptions for SA
Table 5.3.2.1.1.4.3.1-1: PDCCH-ControlResourceSet

00000000 00000000 the least
00000000 00000 significant 48 RBs
of the BWP
Test 3, 4, 5
11110000 00000000 CORESET to use
00000000 00000000 the least
of the BWP
Test 1, 2
Duration 2 SearchSpace
duration of 2
symbols
Test 1, 2, 3, 5
1 SearchSpace
duration of 1
symbol
Test 4
0 TCI State #0
1 TCI State #1
}
}
Table 5.3.2.1.1.4.3.1-7: PDCCH Search Space

searchSpaceId 1 SearchSpaceId USS
with condition
USS
controlResourceSetId 0 ControlResourceS
etId
sl1 NULL
}
monitoringSymbolsWithinSlot 11000000000000 Symbols 0 and 1
aggregationLevel2 n1 AL2 Test 1, Test
2
4
aggregationLevel16 n1 AL16 Test 5
}
searchSpaceType CHOICE {
common SEQUENCE { CSS, SISS
ue-Specific SEQUENCE { USS
dci-Formats formats0-1-And-1-1 DCI Format 1_1 Long_DCI
}
}
}
ETSI
5.3.2.1.1.4.3.2 Message exceptions for NSA
Same as 5.3.2.1.1.4.3.1
5.3.2.1.1.4.4 Test requirement
Table 5.3.2.1.1.4.4-1 defines the primary level settings.
For the parameters specified in Table 5.3-1 the average probability of a missed downlink scheduling grant (Pm-dsg)
shall be below the specified value in Table 5.3.2.1.1.4.4-1.
Table 5.3.2.1.1.4.4-1: Test Requirement for 1Tx PDCCH with 15 kHz SCS

CORE
Test COR Aggreg configur
Bandwi SET Propagation
numb ESE ation Reference Channel ation and Pm-dsg SNR
dth durati Condition
er T RB level correlati (%) (dB)
on
on Matrix
2 10 MHz 24 2 2 R.PDCCH.1-2.3 FDD TDLC300-100 1x2 Low 1 8.9
5 10MHz 48 2 16 R.PDCCH.1-2.6 FDD TDLA30-10 1x2 Low 1 -1.5
This test verifies the demodulation performance of PDCCH for a two-antenna port with a given SNR for which the
C.3.1.
Table 5.3.2.1.2.3-1: Minimum performance for 2 Tx PDCCH with 15 kHz SCS

CORESE configurati
Test Bandwi CORES Aggregatio Reference Propagation
T on and Pm-dsg SNR
number dth ET RB n level Channel Condition
duration correlation (%) (dB)
Matrix
1 10 MHz 24 2 4 R.PDCCH. TDLC300-100 2x2 Low 1 2.0
1-2.2 FDD
2 10 MHz 48 2 8 R.PDCCH. TDLC300-100 2x2 Low 1 [-1. 5]
1-2.5 FDD
3 10 MHz 48 1 8 R.PDCCH.1 TDLA30-10 2x2 Low 1 [-0.3]
-1.3 FDD
ETSI
2. The parameter settings for the cell are set up according to Table 5.3-1, Table 5.3.2.1-1 and Table 5.3.2.1.2.3-1
and as appropriate.
5.2.2.1.1.4.3.
1. SS transmits PDCCH with DCI format [1_1] for C_RNTI to transmit the DL RMC according to Table 5.3.2.1.1-
1. The details of PDCCH are specified in Table [ ] respectively. The SS sends downlink MAC padding bits on
the DL RMC.
according to Table 5.3.2.1.2.3-1 as appropriate.
dsg is the ratio (statDTX)/(NACK+ACK+statDTX). If Pm-dsg is less than the value specified in table 5.3.2.1.1-
1, pass the UE. Otherwise fail the UE.
ETSI

00000000 00000000 the least
of the BWP
Test 2, 3
11110000 00000000 CORESET to use
00000000 00000000 the least
of the BWP
Test 1
duration of 2
symbols
Test 1, 2
1 SearchSpace
duration of 1
symbol
Test 3
0 TCI State #0
1 TCI State #1
}
}

aggregationLevel8 n1 AL8 Test 2, 3
}
}
}
}
Same as 5.3.2.1.2.4.3.1
shall be below the specified value in Table 5.3.2.1.2.4.4-1.
ETSI
Table 5.3.2.1.2.4.4-1: Test Requirements for 2 Tx PDCCH with 15 kHz SCS

CORESE configurati
Test Bandwi CORES Aggregatio Reference Propagation
T on and Pm-dsg SNR
number dth ET RB n level Channel Condition
duration correlation (%) (dB)
Matrix
1 10 MHz 24 2 4 R.PDCCH. TDLC300-100 2x2 Low 1 2.9
1-2.2 FDD
2 10 MHz 48 2 8 R.PDCCH. TDLC300-100 2x2 Low 1 -0.6
1-2.5 FDD
3 10 MHz 48 1 8 R.PDCCH.1 TDLA30-10 2x2 Low 1 0.7
-1.3 FDD
5.3.2.2 TDD
The parameters specified in Table 5.3.2.2-1 are valid for all TDD tests unless otherwise stated.

TDD UL-DL pattern FR1.30-1
CCE to REG mapping type interleaved
Interleaver size 3
REG bundle size 2 6
Shift Index 0
5.3.2.2.1 2Rx TDD FR1 PDCCH 1 Tx antenna performance for both SA and NSA
Editor’s note: This test case is incomplete. The following aspects are either missing or TBD
- SNR in min requirements table is within square brackets.
C.3.1.
ETSI
Table 5.3.2.2.1.3-1: Minimum performance for PDCCH with 30 kHz SCS

CORES
Test CORE configurat
Bandw ET Aggregati Reference Propagation
numbe SET ion and Pm-dsg SNR
idth duratio on level Channel Condition
r RB correlatio (%) (dB)
n
n Matrix
1 40 MHz 102 1 2 R.PDCCH. TDLA30-10 1x2 Low 1 [6.7]
2-1.1 TDD
2 40 MHz 102 1 4 R.PDCCH. TDLC300- 1x2 Low 1
[2.7]
2-1.2 TDD 100
R.PDCCH. TDLC300-
3 40 MHz 48 2 16 1x2 Low 1 [-4. 4]
2-2.1 TDD 100
The normative reference for this requirement is TS 38.101-4 [5] clause 5.3.2.2.
1. Connect the SS, the faders and AWGN noise sources to the UE antenna connectors as shown in TS 38.508-1 [6]
2. The parameter settings for the cell are set up according to Table 5.3-1, Table 5.3.2.2-1 and Table 5.3.2.2.1.3-1 as
appropriate.
5.3.2.2.1.4.3.
1. SS transmits PDCCH with DCI format 1_1 for C_RNTI to transmit the DL RMC according to Table 5.3.2.2.1.3-
1. The details of PDCCH are specified in Table 5.3-1, Table 5.3.2.2-1 and Table 5.3.2.2.1.3-1 respectively. The
SS sends downlink MAC padding bits on the DL RMC.
dsg is the ratio (statDTX)/(NACK+ACK+statDTX). If Pm-dsg is less than the value specified in table
5.3.2.2.1.5-1, pass the UE. Otherwise fail the UE.
ETSI

00000000 00000000 the least
of the BWP
Test 3, 4, 5
11110000 00000000 CORESET to use
00000000 00000000 the least
of the BWP
Test 1, 2
duration of 2
symbols
Test 1, 2, 3, 5
1 SearchSpace
duration of 1
symbol
Test 4
cce-REG-MappingType CHOICE {
Interleaved SEQUENCE { Null
reg-BundleSize n2 1 Tx
interleaverSize n3 TDD
}
precoderGranularity sameAsREG-bundle
0 TCI State #0
1 TCI State #1
}
}
}
ETSI

searchSpaceId 0 SearchSpaceId CSS
with condition
CSS
etId
sl1 NULL
}
}
}
}
}
}
Same as 5.3.2.2.1.4.3.1.5.3.2.2.1.5 Test requirement
shall be below the specified value in Table 5.3.2.2.1.5-1.
Table 5.3.2.2.1.5-1: Test Requirement for 1Tx PDCCH with 30 kHz SCS
Prop Reference value
Antenna
agati
Test CORE CORESE configurat
Bandw Aggregati Reference on
numbe SET T ion and Pm-dsg SNR
idth on level Channel Con
r RB duration correlatio (%) (dB)
ditio
n Matrix
n
1 40 MHz 102 1 2 R.PDCCH. 2-1.1 TDL 1x2 Low 1 [6.7]+
TDD A30- 0.9
10
2 40 MHz 102 1 4 TDL 1x2 Low 1
R.PDCCH. 2-1.2 [2.7]+
C300
TDD 0.9
- 100
TDL [-
R.PDCCH. 2-2.1
3 40 MHz 48 2 16 C300 1x2 Low 1 4.4]+
TDD
- 100 0.9
ETSI
This test verifies the demodulation performance of PDCCH for a two-antenna port with a given SNR for which the
C.3.1.

CORES
n
n Matrix
1 40 MHz [90] 1 8 R.PDCCH. TDLC300- 2x2 Low 1 [-1.5]
2-1.3 TDD 100
Frequencies to be tested: Mid Range, as defined in TS 38.508-1 [6] clause TBD.
appropriate.
5.3.2.2.2.4.3.
ETSI

00000000 00000000 the least
of the BWP
Test 3, 4, 5
11110000 00000000 CORESET to use
00000000 00000000 the least
of the BWP
Test 1, 2
duration of 2
symbols
Test 1, 2, 3, 5
1 SearchSpace
duration of 1
symbol
Test 4
}
0 TCI State #0
1 TCI State #1
}
}
}
ETSI

with condition
CSS
etId
sl1 NULL
}
}
}
}
}
}
Same as 5.3.2.2.2.4.3.1.
5.3.2.2.2.5 Test requirement
CORES
n
n Matrix
1 40 MHz [90] 1 8 R.PDCCH. TDLC300- 2x2 Low 1 [-
2-1.3 TDD 100 1.5]+
1.0
5.3.3.1 FDD
The parameters specified in Table 5.3.3.1-1 are valid for all FDD tests unless otherwise stated.

CCE to REG mapping type nonInterleaved
REG bundle size 6
Shift index 0
ETSI
C.3.1.

CORES
n
n Matrix
1-2.1 FDD
2 10 MHz 24 2 2 R.PDCCH. TDLC300- 1x4 Low 1 [2.5]
1-2.3 FDD 100
1-2.4 FDD
4 10 MHz 48 1 4 R.PDCCH. TDLA30-10 1x4 Low 1 [-0.7]
1-1.1 FDD
ETSI
appropriate.
5.3.3.1.1.4.3.
ETSI

00000000 00000000 the least
of the BWP
Test 3, 4, 5
11110000 00000000 CORESET to use
00000000 00000000 the least
of the BWP
Test 1, 2
duration of 2
symbols
Test 1, 2, 3, 5
1 SearchSpace
duration of 1
symbol
Test 4
0 TCI State #0
1 TCI State #1
}
}

with condition
CSS
etId
sl1 NULL
}
2
4
}
}
}
}
}
ETSI
Same as 5.3.3.1.1.4.3.1.

CORES
n
n Matrix
1 10 MHz 24 2 2 R.PDCCH. TDLA30-10 1x4 Low 1 [2.3]+
1-2.1 FDD 0.9
2 10 MHz 24 2 2 R.PDCCH. TDLC300- 1x4 Low 1 [2.5]+
1-2.3 FDD 100 0.9
3 10 MHz 48 2 4 R.PDCCH. TDLA30-10 1x4 Low 1 [0.0]+
1-2.4 FDD 0.9
4 10 MHz 48 1 4 R.PDCCH. TDLA30-10 1x4 Low 1 [-
1-1.1 FDD 0.7]+
0.9
C.3.1.
ETSI

CORES
n
n Matrix
1 10 MHz 24 2 4 R.PDCCH. TDLC300- 2x4 Low 1 TBD
1-2.2 FDD 100
2 10 MHz 48 2 8 R.PDCCH. TDLC300- 2x4 Low 1 [-4.8]
1-2.5 FDD 100
3 10 MHz 48 1 4 R.PDCCH. TDLA30-10 2x4 Low 1 TBD
1-1.3 FDD
appropriate.
5.3.3.1.2.4.3.
[G.1.x]. Count the number of NACKs, ACKs and statDTXs on the UL PUCCH during each subtest interval. Pm-
ETSI

00000000 00000000 the least
of the BWP
Test 3, 4, 5
11110000 00000000 CORESET to use
00000000 00000000 the least
of the BWP
Test 1, 2
duration of 2
symbols
Test 1, 2, 3, 5
1 SearchSpace
duration of 1
symbol
Test 4
0 TCI State #0
1 TCI State #1
}
}
ETSI

with condition
CSS
etId
sl1 NULL
}
3
}
}
}
}
}
Same as 5.3.3.1.2.4.3.1.
CORES
n
n Matrix
1 10 MHz 24 2 4 R.PDCCH. TDLC300- 2x4 Low 1 TBD+
1-2.2 FDD 100 1.0
2 10 MHz 48 2 8 R.PDCCH. TDLC300- 2x4 Low 1 [-
1-2.5 FDD 100 4.8]+
1.0
3 10 MHz 48 1 4 R.PDCCH. TDLA30-10 2x4 Low 1 TBD+
1-1.3 FDD 1.0
5.3.3.2 TDD
The parameters specified in Table 5.3.3.2-1 are valid for all TDD tests unless otherwise stated.
ETSI
Table 5.3.3.2-1: Common Test Parameters

CCE to REG mapping type interleaved
Interleaver size 3
REG bundle size 2 6
Shift Index 0
- SNR in minimum requirements table is TBD
C.3.1.

CORES
n
n Matrix
R.PDCCH.
1 40 MHz 102 1 2 TDLA30-10 1x4 Low 1 TBD
2-1.1 TDD
R.PDCCH. TDLC300-
2 40 MHz 102 1 4 1x4 Low 1 TBD
2-1.2 TDD 100
R.PDCCH. 1x4
3 40 MHz 48 2 16 TDLA30-10 1 [-4.1]
2-2.1 TDD Medium A
ETSI
appropriate.
5.3.3.2.1.4.3.
ETSI

00000000 00000000 the least
of the BWP
Test 3, 4, 5
11110000 00000000 CORESET to use
00000000 00000000 the least
of the BWP
Test 1, 2
duration of 2
symbols
Test 1, 2, 3, 5
1 SearchSpace
duration of 1
symbol
Test 4
}
0 TCI State #0
1 TCI State #1
}
}
}
ETSI

with condition
CSS
etId
sl1 NULL
}
}
}
}
}
}
Same as 5.3.3.2.1.4.3.1.
CORES
n
n Matrix
R.PDCCH. TBD+
1 40 MHz 102 1 2 TDLA30-10 1x4 Low 1
2-1.1 TDD 0.9
R.PDCCH. TDLC300- TBD+
2 40 MHz 102 1 4 1x4 Low 1
2-1.2 TDD 100 0.9
[-
R.PDCCH. 1x4
3 40 MHz 48 2 16 TDLA30-10 1 4.1]+
2-2.1 TDD Medium A
0.9
- RMC and SNR in min requirements table is TBD
ETSI
C.3.1.

CORES
n
n Matrix
1 40 MHz 90 1 8 TBD TDLC300- 2x4 Low 1 [-4.6]
100
appropriate.
5.3.3.2.2.4.3.
ETSI
1. The details of PDCCH are specified in Table 5.3-1, Table 5.3.3.2-1 and Table 5.3.3.2.2.3-1. The SS sends
downlink MAC padding bits on the DL RMC.

00000000 00000000 the least
of the BWP
Test 3, 4, 5
11110000 00000000 CORESET to use
00000000 00000000 the least
of the BWP
Test 1, 2
duration of 2
symbols
Test 1, 2, 3, 5
1 SearchSpace
duration of 1
symbol
Test 4
}
0 TCI State #0
1 TCI State #1
}
}
}
ETSI

with condition
CSS
etId
sl1 NULL
}
}
}
}
}
}
FFS
CORES
n
n Matrix
1 40 MHz 90 1 8 TBD TDLC300- 2x4 Low 1 [-
100 4.6]+
1.0
5.4 PBCH demodulation requirements

RAN4 will specify the PBCH performance requirements and has recommended that these requirements do not need to
be tested.
5.5 Sustained downlink data rate provided by lower layers

5.5.1 FR1 Sustained downlink data rate performance for single carrier
- Test Procedure to calculate PDCP SDU success rate is FFS
ETSI
5.5.1.1 Test Purpose
The purpose of the test is to verify that the Layer 1 and Layer 2 correctly process in a sustained manner the received
packets corresponding to the maximum data rate indicated by UE capabilities. The sustained downlink data rate shall be
verified in terms of the success rate of delivered PDCP SDU(s) by Layer 2. The test case below specifies the RF
conditions and the required success rate of delivered TB by Layer 1 to meet the sustained data rate requirement
5.5.1.2 Test Applicability
5.5.1.3 Minimum conformance requirements
The requirements in this clause are applicable to the FR1 single carrier case.
The TB success rate shall be higher than 85% when PDSCH is scheduled with MCS defined for the channel bandwidth
with the downlink physical channel setup according to Annex C.3.1.
The TB success rate is defined as 100%*NDL_correct_rx / (NDL_newtx + NDL_retx), where NDL_newtx is the number of newly
transmitted DL transport blocks, NDL_retx is the number of retransmitted DL transport blocks, and NDL_correct_rx is the
number of correctly received DL transport blocks.
The common test parameters are specified in Table 5.5.1.3-1. The parameters specified in Table 5.5.1.3-2 are applicable
for tests on FDD bands and parameters specified in Table 5.5.1.3-3 are applicable for tests on TDD bands.
Unless otherwise stated, no user data is scheduled on slot #0, 10 and 11 within 20 ms for SCS 15 kHz.
Unless otherwise stated, no user data is scheduled on slot #0, 20 and 21 within 20 ms for SCS 30 kHz.
ETSI
Table 5.5.1.3-1: Common test parameters for FDD and TDD bands
ETSI

Channel bandwidth MHz Channel bandwidth from selected band
Physical Cell ID 0
Common serving
cell parameters
2
mapping
configuration
RB offset RBs 0
DL BWP Number of contiguous PRB 38.101-1 [6, Section 5.3.2] for tested
configuration #1 channel bandwidth and subcarrier
spacing
Symbols with PDCCH Symbols #0
Number of PRBs in CORESET Table 5.5A-4
PDCCH 1/AL 1 for 30 kHz / 5 MHz

configuration Number of PDCCH candidates and 1/AL4 for 15 kHz / 5 MHz, 30 kHz / 10
aggregation levels MHz and 30 kHz / 15 MHz
1/AL 8 for other combinations
DCI format 1_1
TCI State TCI state #1
Mapping type Type A
k0 0
PDSCH
PRB bundling size WB
configuration
N/A
size
DMRS Type Type 1
Length 1
PDSCH DMRS {1000} for 1 Layer CCs
configuration Antenna ports indexes {1000, 1001} for 2 Layers CCs
{1000 – 1003} for 4 Layers CCs
Number of PDSCH DMRS CDM group(s) 1 for 1 layer and 2 layers CCs
without data 2 for 4 Layers CCs
Subcarrier indexes in the PRB used for
k0 = 3 for CSI-RS resource 1,2,3,4
CSI-RS
OFDM symbols in the PRB used for CSI- l0 = 6 for CSI-RS resource 1 and 3
RS l0 = 10 for CSI-RS resource 2 and 4
CSI-RS for tracking CDM Type ‘No CDM’ for CSI-RS resource 1,2,3,4
1,2,3,4
1,2,3,4
ETSI
15 kHz SCS:
CSI-RS offset Slots
30 kHz SCS:
Start PRB 0
k0 = 4
CSI-RS
l0 = 12
RS
NZP CSI-RS for
Density (ρ) 1
CSI acquisition
15 kHz SCS: 20
CSI-RS periodicity
30 kHz SCS: 40
CSI-RS offset 0
Start PRB 0
k0 = 0
CSI-RS
l0 = 12
RS
ZP CSI-RS for CSI CDM Type ‘FD-CDM2’
acquisition Density (ρ) 1
15 kHz SCS: 20
CSI-RS periodicity
30 kHz SCS: 40
CSI-RS offset 0
Start PRB 0
TCI state #0
information
QCL Type Type A
TCI state #1
TCI state #0
information
information
Symbols for all unused Res OCNG Annex A.5
Static propagation condition
Propagation condition
No external noise sources are applied
1 layer CCs 1x2 or 1x4
Antenna
2 layers CCs 2x2 or 2x4
configuration
4 layers CCs 4x4
transmission
channel bandwidth and subcarrier spacing
ETSI
Table 5.5.1.3-2: Additional test parameters for FDD band

Duplex mode FDD
PDSCH Starting symbol (S) 1
configuration Length (L) 13
K1 value 2
Table 5.5.1.3-3: Additional test parameters for TDD band

Duplex mode TDD
K1 value Specific to each UL-DL pattern
15 kHz SCS: FR1.15-1
TDD UL-DL pattern
Note 1: PDSCH is scheduled only on full DL slots
Table 5.5.1.3-4: Number of PRBs in CORESET
SCS 100
(kHz) MHz
15 24 48 78 102 132 156 216 270 N/A N/A N/A
30 6 24 36 48 60 78 102 132 162 216 270
ETSI
Table 5.5.1.3-5: MCS indexes for indicated UE capabilities

Maximum number of Maximum Scaling MCS
PDSCH MIMO layers modulation format factor
1 8 1 26
1 8 0.8 21
1 8 0.75 20
1 8 0.4 11
1 6 1 27
1 6 0.8 23
1 6 0.75 22
1 6 0.4 14
1 4 1 16
1 4 0.8 16
1 4 0.75 16
1 4 0.4 10
1 2 1 9
1 2 0.8 9
1 2 0.75 9
1 2 0.4 4
2 8 1 26
2 8 0.8 21
2 8 0.75 20
2 8 0.4 11
2 6 1 27
2 6 0.8 23
2 6 0.75 22
2 6 0.4 14
2 4 1 16
2 4 0.8 16
2 4 0.75 16
2 4 0.4 10
2 2 1 9
2 2 0.8 9
2 2 0.75 9
2 2 0.4 4
4 8 1 26
4 8 0.8 23
4 8 0.75 22
4 8 0.4 12
4 6 1 27
4 6 0.8 24
4 6 0.75 23
4 6 0.4 14
4 4 1 16
4 4 0.8 16
4 4 0.75 16
4 4 0.4 11
4 2 1 9
4 2 0.8 9
4 2 0.75 9
4 2 0.4 5
5.5.1.3.1 Procedure for test parameter selection
Below test parameter selection procedure is from 38.101-4 [5] by replacing CA configuration with operating band, and
bandwidth instead of bandwidth combination.
The test parameters are determined by the following procedure:
- Select one operating band among all supported operating bands and set of per band UE capabilities among all
supported UE capabilities that provides the largest data rate [TS 38.306 [14, Section 4.1.2]].
ETSI
- Set of per band UE capabilities includes channel bandwidth, subcarrier spacing, number of PDSCH MIMO layers,
modulation format and scaling factor [TS 38.306 [14, Section 4.1.2]].
- When there are multiple sets of bandwidths and UE capabilities (channel bandwidth, subcarrier spacing, number of
MIMO layer, modulation format, scaling factor) with same largest data rate, select one among sets with the smallest
channel bandwidth.
- For each operating band, use Table 5.5.1.3-5 to determine MCS based on test parameters and indicated UE
capabilities
Pasting relevant portion of max data rate equation from TS 38.306 [14] section 4.1
For NR, the approximate data rate for a given number of aggregated carriers in a band or band combination is computed
as follows.
BW ( j ), μ
⋅12
( )
J
 ( j)

N PRB
data rate (in Mbps) = 10 − 6 ⋅ v
 Layers
⋅ Q m( j ) ⋅ f ( j)
⋅ R max ⋅ μ
⋅ 1 − OH ( j )
j =1  Ts 
wherein
J is the number of aggregated component carriers in a band or band combination
Rmax = 948/1024
For the j-th CC,
v (Layers
j)
is the maximum number of supported layers given by higher layer parameter maxNumberMIMO-
LayersPDSCH for downlink and maximum of higher layer parameters maxNumberMIMO-LayersCB-PUSCH
and maxNumberMIMO-LayersNonCB-PUSCH for uplink.
Qm( j ) is the maximum supported modulation order given by higher layer parameter
supportedModulationOrderDL for downlink and higher layer parameter supportedModulationOrderUL for
uplink.
f ( j ) is the scaling factor given by higher layer parameter scalingFactor and can take the values 1, 0.8, 0.75,
and 0.4.
μ is the numerology (as defined in TS 38.211 [6])
10 −3
μ
Ts is the average OFDM symbol duration in a subframe for numerology μ , i.e. T sμ =
14 ⋅ 2 μ . Note that
normal cyclic prefix is assumed.
BW ( j ), μ ( j)
N PRB μ
is the maximum RB allocation in bandwidth BW with numerology , as defined in 5.3 TS
( j)
38.101-1 [2] and 5.3 TS 38.101-2 [3], where BW is the UE supported maximum bandwidth in the given
band or band combination.
OH ( j ) is the overhead and takes the following values
0.14, for frequency range FR1 for DL
0.08, for frequency range FR1 for UL
NOTE: Only one of the UL or SUL carriers (the one with the higher data rate) is counted for a cell operating
SUL.
The approximate maximum data rate can be computed as the maximum of the approximate data rates computed using
the above formula for each of the supported band or band combinations.
ETSI
The normative reference for this requirement is TS 38.101-4 [5], clause 5.5.1.
5.5.1.4 Test description
5.5.1.4.1 Initial conditions
carrier spacing based on NR operating bands specified in Table 5.3.5-1 of TS 38.521-1.
1. Connect the SS to the UE antenna connectors as shown in TS 38.508-1 [6] Annex A, in Figure A.3.1.7.1 for TE
diagram (without fader and AWGN) and clause A.3.2.2 for UE diagram.
2. The parameter settings for the NR cell are initially set up according to Table 5.5.1.3-1 as appropriate.
5. Ensure the UE is in state RRC_CONNECTED with generic procedure parameters Connectivity NR with
Connected without release On, according to TS 38.508-1 [6] clause 4.5.4. Message content are defined in clause
5.5.1.4.3.
6. SS shall transmit UECapabilityEnquiry message.
7. The UE shall transmit UECapabilityInformation message.
8. Using the UE capabilities advertised in the UE-CapabilityRAT-Container of the type UE-NR-Capability, and the
procedure outlined in 5.5.1.3.1 determine one set of parameters that would provide the largest data rate.
9. Setup up the NR cell using these parameters for the test.
10. Configure the TBsize, DL RMC, UL RMC, PDCP size from Annex A.3.2_1 and Annex A.2.2 for UL as
appropriate.
5.5.1.4.2 Test procedure
FFS
5.5.1.4.3 Message contents
Message contents are according to TS 38.508-1 [6] clause 5.4.2 with the following exceptions
Table 5.5.1.4.3-1: PDCCH-ControlResourceSet

frequencyDomainResources CORESET value
according to Table
5.5.1.3-4 as applicable
}
}
ETSI
Table 5.5.1.4.3-2: PDCCH Search Space

monitoringSymbolsWithinSlot 10000000000000 Symbols 0
aggregationLevel1 n1 5MHz 30kHz
aggregationLevel4 n1 5MHz 15kHz,
10MHz 30kHz,
15MHz 30kHz
aggregationLevel8 n1 AL8 For all other
BW/SCS cases
}
}
Table 5.5.1.4.3-3: CSI-RS-ResourceMapping for TRS

row1 0001 k0=0 for CSI-RS TRS
resource 1,2,3,4
}
}
Table 5.5.1.4.3-4: NZP CSI-RS-ResourceMapping for CSI Acquisition

NZP-CSI-RS-Resource ::= SEQUENCE {
row1 0100 k0=4
}
}
}
Table 5.5.1.4.3-5: ZP CSI-RS-ResourceMapping for CSI Acquisition

ZP-CSI-RS-Resource ::= SEQUENCE {
row1 0001 k0=0
}
}
}
ETSI
Table 5.5.1.4.3-6: PDSCH-Config

bundleSize wideband Wideband PRB
Bundling
}
}
}
5.5.1.5 Test requirement
The PDCP SDU success rate of greater than 85% shall be sustained during at least 300 frames.
6 CSI reporting requirements (Conducted

requirements)
6.1 General
This section includes conducted requirements for the reporting of channel state information (CSI).
6.1.2 Common test parameters

Parameters specified in Table 6.1.2-1 are applied for all test cases in this section unless otherwise stated.
ETSI
Table 6.1.2-1: Test parameters for CSI test cases
ETSI

PDSCH transmission scheme Transmission
scheme 1
EPRE ratio of PTRS to PDSCH dB
serving cell SSB position in burst First SSB in Slot #0
Symbols with PDCCH 0,1
PDCCH Number of PDCCH candidates
1/[8]
configuration and aggregation levels
DCI format 1_1
Mapping type Type A
k0 0
Length (L) 12
PDSCH
configuration
PRB bundling size 2
Resource allocation type 0
VRB-to-PRB mapping interleaver
N/A
bundle size
DMRS Type Type 1
Single-symbol DM-
Length
RS
{1000} for Rank1
{1000,1001} for
PDSCH DMRS
Rank2
configuration
DMRS ports indexes {1000,1001,1002} for
Rank3
{1000,1001,1002,100
3} for Rank4
Number of PDSCH DMRS CDM
2
group(s) without data
PTRS Frequency density (KPT-RS) N/A
configuration Time density (LPT-RS) N/A
[0]
First OFDM symbol in the PRB
[4]
used for CSI-RS (l0)
CDM Type No CDM
Density (ρ) 3
15 kHz SCS: 20
CSI-RS periodicity slot
30 kHz SCS: 40
15 kHz SCS:
10 for CSI-RS
CSI-RS for resource 1 and 2
tracking 11 for CSI-RS
resource 3 and 4
CSI-RS offset slot
30 kHz SCS:
20 for CSI-RS
resource 1 and 2
21 for CSI-RS
resource 3 and 4
Start PRB 0
BWP size
ETSI
Start PRB 0
NZP CSI-RS for Frequency Occupation Number of PRB =
CSI acquisition BWP size
Start PRB 0
ZP CSI-RS for
CSI acquisition
BWP size
TCI state #0
CSI-RS resource 1
from ‘CSI-RS for
tracking’
information
TCI state #1 configuration
QCL Type Type A
4 For FDD
8 for TDD
2 for FDD
K1 value
Defined in Annex
A.1.2 for TDD
OCNG as specified in
Symbols for unused Res
A.5
Note 1: PDSCH is not scheduled on slots containing CSI-RS or slots which are not full
DL.
Note 2: UE assumes that the TCI state for the PDSCH is identical to the TCI state applied
for the PDCCH transmission.
6.2 Reporting of Channel Quality Indicator (CQI)

6.2.2.1 FDD
6.2.2.1.1 CQI reporting definition under AWGN conditions

The reporting accuracy of the channel quality indicator (CQI) under frequency non-selective conditions is determined
by the reporting variance and the BLER performance using the transport format indicated by the reported CQI median.
The purpose is to verify that the reported CQI values are in accordance with the CQI definition given in TS 38.214 [12].
To account for sensitivity of the input SNR the reporting definition is considered to be verified if the reporting accuracy
is met for at least one of two SNR levels separated by an offset of 1 dB
6.2.2.1.1.1 2Rx FDD FR1 periodic CQI reporting under AWGN conditions for both SA and NSA
6.2.2.1.1.1.1 Test Purpose
The purpose of this test is to verify the variance of the wideband CQI reports is within the limits defined and a PDSCH
BLER of 10% falls between the transport format based median CQI-1 and median CQI or the transport format based
median CQI and median CQI +1.
6.2.2.1.1.1.2 Test Applicability
ETSI
6.2.2.1.1.1.3 Minimum requirement for periodic CQI reporting
For the parameters specified in Table 6.2.2.1.1.1.3-1, and using the downlink physical channels specified in Annex
C.3.1, the minimum requirements are specified by the following:
a) The reported CQI value according to the reference channel shall be in the range of ±1 of the reported median
more than 90% of the time.
b) If the PDSCH BLER using the transport format indicated by median CQI is less than or equal to 0.1, then the
BLER using the transport format indicated by the (median CQI+1) shall be greater than 0.1. If the PDSCH
BLER using the transport format indicated by the median CQI is greater than 0.1, then the BLER using transport
format indicated by (median CQI-1) shall be less than or equal to 0.1.
ETSI
Table 6.2.2.1.1.1.3-1: CQI reporting definition test

Parameter Unit Test 1 Test 2
Bandwidth MHz 10
Duplex Mode FDD
SNR dB 8 9 14 15
Propagation channel AWGN
2×2 with static channel specified in
Antenna configuration
Annex B.1
As specified in Section Annex
Beamforming Model
B.4.1
CSI-RS resource Type Periodic
CDM Type FD-CDM2
Density (ρ) 1
ZP CSI-RS First subcarrier index in the PRB
Row 5,4
configuration used for CSI-RS (k0)
First OFDM symbol in the PRB used
9
for CSI-RS (l0)
CSI-RS
slot 5/1
periodicity and offset
CDM Type FD-CDM2
Density (ρ) 1
NZP CSI-RS for First subcarrier index in the PRB
Row 3,(6,-)
CSI acquisition used for CSI-RS (k0, k1 )
13
for CSI-RS (l0)
NZP CSI-RS-timeConfig
slot 5/1
CSI-IM CSI-IM RE pattern 0
configuration CSI-IM Resource Mapping
(4, 9)
(kCSI-IM,lCSI-IM)
CSI-IM timeConfig
slot 5/1
ReportConfigType Periodic
CQI-table Table 2
reportQuantity cri-RI-PMI-CQI
timeRestrictionForChannelMeasurements Not configured
timeRestrictionForInterferenceMeasurements Not configured
cqi-FormatIndicator Wideband
pmi-FormatIndicator Wideband
Sub-band Size RB 8
CSI-reportingBand 1111111
CSI-Report periodicity and offset slot 5/1
aperiodicTriggeringOffset Not configured
Codebook Codebook Type typeI-SinglePanel
configuration Codebook Mode 1
(CodebookConfig-
Not configured
N1,CodebookConfig-N2)
CodebookSubsetRestriction 010000
RI Restriction N/A
Physical channel for CSI report PUCCH
CQI/RI/PMI delay ms 8
As specified in Table A.4-2, TBS.2-
Measurement channel
2
ETSI
6.2.2.1.1.1.4 Test Description
6.2.2.1.1.1.4.1 Initial Conditions
Annex A, in Figure A.3.1.7 for TE diagram and section A.3.2.3 for UE diagram.
2. The parameter settings for the NR cell are set up according to Table 6.1.2-1 and 6.2.2.1.1.1.3-1 as appropriate.
3. Downlink signals for the NR cell are initially set up according to Annex C.0, C.1, C.2, C.3.1 , and uplink signals
On) for NSA according to TS 38.508-1 [6] clause 4.5. Message content are defined in clause 6.2.2.1.1.1.4.3.
6.2.2.1.1.1.4.2 Test Procedure
1. Set the parameters of bandwidth, SCS, reference Channel, the propagation condition, antenna configuration and
the SNR according to Table 6.2.2.2.1.1.3-1.
2. The SS shall transmit PDSCH via PDCCH DCI format [1_1] for C_RNTI to transmit the DL RMC according to
CQI value 8 and keep it regardless of the wideband CQI value sent by the UE. The SS sends downlink MAC
padding bits on the DL RMC. Continue transmission of the PDSCH until 2000 wideband CQI reports have been
gathered. In this process the SS collects wideband CQI reports every 5 ms and also cases where UE transmits
nothing in its CQI timing are also counted as wideband CQI reports.
3. Set up a relative frequency distribution for the reported wideband CQI-values, Calculate the median value
(wideband Median CQI is the wideband CQI that is at or crosses 50% distribution from the lower wideband CQI
side). This CQI-value is declared as wideband Median CQI value.
4. If Median CQI is not equal to 1 or 15 and [1800] or more of the wideband CQI values are in the range (Median
CQI - 1) ≤ Median CQI ≤ ( Median CQI + 1) then continue with step 5, otherwise go to step 8.
the wideband median-CQI value and shall not react to the UE’s wideband CQI reports. The SS sends downlink
MAC padding bits on the DL RMC. For any PDSCH transmitted by the SS, record the associated ACK, NACK
and statDTX responses. The responses are then filtered as follows: for the sequence of responses for each HARQ
process, discard all the statDTX responses. Continue to gather data until the number of filtered ACK+NACK
responses reaches 1000.
For the filtered ACK and NACK responses if the ratio (NACK / ACK + NACK) ≤ 0.1 then go to step 6,
otherwise go to step 7.
the wideband median-CQI+1 value and shall not react to the UE’s wideband CQI reports. The SS sends
downlink MAC padding bits on the DL RMC. For any PDSCH, transmitted by the SS, record and filter the
ACK, NACK and statDTX responses as in step 5 until 1000 filtered ACK+NACK responses are gathered.
ETSI
If the ratio (NACK /ACK + NACK) > 0.1
then pass the UE for this test and go to step 9, otherwise go to step 8.
the wideband median-CQI-1 value and shall not react to the UE’s wideband CQI reports. The SS sends downlink
MAC padding bits on the DL RMC. For any PDSCH, transmitted by the SS, record and filter the ACK, NACK
and statDTX responses as in step 5 until 1000 filtered ACK+NACK responses are gathered.
If the ratio (NACK /ACK + NACK) ≤ 0.1
8. If both SNR points of the test have not been tested, then repeat the same procedure (steps 1 to 7) for the other
SNR point as appropriate. Otherwise fail the UE.
9. Repeat step 1 to 8 for Test2.
6.2.2.1.1.1.4.4 Message contents
Message contents are according to TS 38.508 [6] clause 5.4.2 with the following exceptions:
6.2.2.1.1.1.4.4_1 Message exceptions for SA
Table 6.2.2.1.1.1.4.4_1-1: CSI-ReportConfig

CSI-ReportConfig ::= SEQUENCE {
reportConfigType CHOICE { Periodic
periodic SEQUENCE {
reportSlotConfig CSI- 5/1
ReportPeriodicityAndOffs
et
}
}
reportQuantity CHOICE {
cri-RI-PMI-CQI NULL,
}
reportFreqConfiguration SEQUENCE {
cqi-FormatIndicator widebandCQI
pmi-FormatIndicator widebandPMI
csi-ReportingBand CHOICE{
Subbands8 1111111
}
}
timeRestrictionForChannelMeasurements notConfigured
timeRestrictionForInterferenceMeasurements notConfigured
codebookConfig CodebookConfig
dummy Not present
cqi-Table table2
subbandSize Value8
non-PMI-PortIndication Not present
}
ETSI
Table 6.2.2.1.1.1.4.4_1-2: CodebookConfig

CodebookConfig ::= SEQUENCE {
codebookType CHOICE {
type1 SEQUENCE {
subType CHOICE {
typeI-SinglePanel SEQUENCE {
nrOfAntennaPorts CHOICE {
Two SEQUENCE {
twoTX-codebookSubsetRestriction 010000
}
},
}
}
typeI-SinglePanel-ri-Restriction notPresent
},
codebookMode 1
},
6.2.2.1.1.1.4.4_2 Message exceptions for NSA
Same as specified in 6.2.2.1.1.1.4.4_1.
6.2.2.1.1.1.5 Test Requirements
The pass fail decision is as specified in the test procedure in clause 6.2.2.1.1.1.4.2.
There are no parameters in the test setup or measurement process whose variation impacts the results so there are no
applicable test tolerances for this test.
6.2.2.1.2 CQI reporting under fading conditions

The reporting accuracy of CQI under frequency non-selective fading conditions is determined by the reporting variance,
the relative increase of the throughput obtained when the transport format is indicated by the reported CQI compared to
the throughput obtained when a fixed transport format is configured according to the reported median CQI, and a
minimum BLER using the transport formats indicated by the reported CQI. To account for sensitivity of the input SNR
the sub-band CQI reporting under frequency selective fading conditions is considered to be verified if the reporting
accuracy is met for at least one of two SNR levels separated by an offset of [1] dB.
6.2.2.1.2.1 2Rx FDD FR1 periodic wideband CQI reporting under fading conditions for both SA
and NSA
- Beamforming model is TBD in test parameter table -Minimum requirement is within square brackets
- Annex for measurement uncertainty and test tolerance is TBD
- Minimum test time is TBD
- Message exceptions for NSA is FFS
ETSI
6.2.2.1.2.1.1 Test purpose
To verify the variance of the wideband CQI reports is within the limits defined, that the ratio of the throughput is within
the limits defined and that the average PDSCH BLER is greater than or equal to [2]% for the indicated transport format.
6.2.2.1.2.1.2 Test applicability
This test also applies to all types of E-UTRA UE release 15 and forward supporting EN-DC.
6.2.2.1.2.1.3 Minimum conformance requirements
For the parameters specified in Table 6.2.2.1.2.1.3-1 and using the downlink physical channels specified in Annex
a) A CQI index not in the set {median CQI -1, median CQI, median CQI +1} shall be reported at least α% of the
time where α% is specified in Table 6.2.2.1.2.1-2;
b) The ratio of the throughput obtained when transmitting the transport format indicated by each reported wideband
CQI index and that obtained when transmitting a fixed transport format configured according to the wideband
CQI median shall be ≥ γ, where γ is specified in Table 6.2.2.1.2.1.3-2;
c) When transmitting the transport format indicated by each reported wideband CQI index, the average BLER for
the indicated transport formats shall be greater than or equal to [0.02].
ETSI
Table 6.2.2.1.2.1.3-1: Wideband CQI reporting test under frequency non-selective fading conditions
Bandwidth MHz 10
Duplex Mode FDD
First PRB 0
DL BWP configuration
Number of contiguous PRB 52
#1
SNR dB [6] [7] [12] [13]
Propagation channel TDLA30-5
Antenna configuration 2×2
Correlation configuration ULA high
As specified in Section [Annex
Beamforming Model
TBD]
CDM Type FD-CDM2
Density (ρ) 1
Row 5,4
9
for CSI-RS (l0)
CSI-RS
slot 5/1
CDM Type FD-CDM2
Density (ρ) 1
Row 3,(6,-)
13
for CSI-RS (l0)
slot 5/1
(4, 9)
(kCSI-IM,lCSI-IM)
CSI-IM timeConfig
slot 5/1
CQI-table Table 2
Sub-band Size RB [8]
Csi-ReportingBand [1111111]
(CodebookConfig-
Not configured
RI Restriction [N/A]
Physical channel for CSI report [PUCCH]
Measurement channel
1
ETSI
Table 6.2.2.1.2.1.3-2: Minimum requirements

Parameters Test 1 Test 2
α [%] [20] [20]
γ [1.05] [1.05]
6.2.2.1.2.1.4 Test description
6.2.2.1.2.1.4.1 Initial conditions
Annex A, in Figure A.3.1.6.2 for TE diagram and Figure A.3.2.3.1 for UE diagram.
2. The parameter settings for the cell are set up according to Table 6.2.2.1.2.1.3-1 as appropriate.
Connected without release On, Test Mode On and Test Loop Function On or EN-DC, DC bearer MCG and SCG,
Connected without release On, for NSA according to TS 38.508-1 [6] clause 4.5. Message content are defined in
clause 6.2.2.1.2.1.4.3.
6.2.2.1.2.1.4.2 Test procedure
1. Set the parameters of bandwidth, reference Channel, the propagation condition, antenna configuration and the
SNR according to Table 6.2.2.1.2.1.5-1.
padding bits on the DL RMC. Continue transmission of the PDSCH until [2000] wideband CQI reports have
been gathered. In this process the SS collects wideband CQI reports every 5 ms and also cases where UE
transmits nothing in its CQI timing are also counted as wideband CQI reports.
side). This CQI-value is declared as Median CQI value.
4. If Median CQI value is not equal to 1 or 15 and [400 (α%)] or more of the wideband CQI values are outside the
range (Median CQI - 1) ≤ Median CQI ≤ (Median CQI + 1) then continue with step 5, otherwise fail the UE.
the Median CQI value from step 3 and shall not react to the UE’s wideband CQI reports. The SS sends downlink
ETSI
responses reaches [1000]. Record the BLER (NACK / ACK + NACK) for Median CQI and measure the average
throughput according to Annex TBD. Declare the throughput as t median .
If the recorded BLER ≥ [0.02] then continue with step 6, otherwise fail the UE.6. The SS shall transmit PDSCH
via PDCCH DCI format [1_1] for C_RNTI to transmit the DL RMC according to the UE’s reported wideband
CQI value. The SS sends downlink MAC padding bits on the DL RMC. For any PDSCH transmitted by the SS,
record the associated ACK, NACK and statDTX responses. The responses are then filtered as follows: for the
sequence of responses for each HARQ process, discard all the statDTX responses. Continue to gather data until
the number of filtered ACK+NACK responses reaches [1000]. Record the BLER (NACK / ACK + NACK) and
measure the average throughput according to Annex TBD. Declare the throughput as t.
If the recorded BLER ≥ [0.02] and t / t median ≥ γ then continue with step 7, otherwise fail the UE.
SNR point as appropriate.
8. If both tests have not been done, then repeat the same procedure (steps 1 to 7) with test conditions according to
the table 6.2.2.1.2.1.5 -1 for the other Test as appropriate.
Table 6.2.2.1.2.1.4.3_1-1: CSI-RS-ResourceMapping for NZP-CSI-RS
Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [6], clause 4.6.3, Table 4.6.3-45

Row3 001000
}
nrofPorts p2
firstOFDMSymbolInTimeDomain 13
}
Table 6.2.2.1.2.1.4.3_1-2: CSI-RS-ResourceMapping for ZP-CSI-RS

Row5 000100
}
nrofPorts p4
}
ETSI
Table 6.2.2.1.2.1.4.3_1-3: CSI-IM-Resource

csi-IM-ResourceElementPattern
pattern0 SEQUENCE {
subcarrierLocation-p0 s4
symbolLocation-p0 9
}
periodicityAndOffset CSI-
ResourcePeriodicityAnd
Offset
Table 6.2.2.1.2.1.4.3_1-4: CSI-ResourcePeriodicityAndOffset

CSI-ResourcePeriodicityAndOffset CHOICE {
slots5 1
}

Two SEQUENCE {
twoTX-CodebookSubsetRestriction 000001
}
}
typeI-SinglePanel-ri-Restriction [00000000]

reportConfigType CHOICE {
periodic SEQUENCE {
reportSlotConfig CSI-
et
pucch-CSI-ResourceList [PUCCH-CSI-Resource]
}
csi-ReportingBand CHOICE {
subbands7 [1111111]
}
}
subbandSize 8
CSI-ReportPeriodicityAndOffset CHOICE {
Slots5 4 5 slots
}
}
ETSI
Table 6.2.2.1.2.1.4.3_2: Message exceptions for NSA
FFS
The pass/fail decision is as specified in the test procedure in clause 6.2.2.1.2.1.4.2.
ETSI
Table 6.2.2.1.2.1.5-1: Wideband CQI reporting test under frequency non-selective fading conditions
Bandwidth MHz 10
Duplex Mode FDD
First PRB 0
#1
[6] + [12] + [13] +
SNR dB [7] + TT
TT TT TT
Beamforming Model
TBD]
CDM Type FD-CDM2
Density (ρ) 1
Row 5,4
9
for CSI-RS (l0)
CSI-RS
slot 5/1
CDM Type FD-CDM2
Density (ρ) 1
Row 3,(6,-)
13
for CSI-RS (l0)
slot 5/1
(4, 9)
(kCSI-IM,lCSI-IM)
CSI-IM timeConfig
slot 5/1
CQI-table Table 2
Sub-band Size RB [8]
Csi-ReportingBand [11111111]
(CodebookConfig-
Not configured
Physical channel for CSI report [PUCCH]
As specified in Table A.4-2,
Measurement channel
TBS.2-1
Note 1: TT = TBD
ETSI

α [%] [20] [20]
γ [1.05] [1.05]
6.2.2.1.2.2 2Rx FDD FR1 periodic subband CQI reporting under fading conditions for both SA
and NSA
- Some TBD in minimum conformance requirements
The accuracy of sub-band channel CQI reporting under the frequency-selective fading conditions is determined by a
double-sided percentile of the reported differential CQI offset level 0 per sub-band, and the relative increase of the
throughput obtained when transmitting the transport format indicated by the corresponding reported sub-band CQI on a
randomly selected sub-band among the sub-bands with the highest reported differential CQI offset level compared to
the throughput when transmitting a fixed transport format according to the wideband CQI median on a randomly
selected sub-band among all the sub-bands.
a) A sub-band differential CQI offset level of 0 shall be reported at least α% of the time but less than β% of the
time for each sub-band, where α and β are specified in Table 6.2.2.1.2.2.3-2.
b) The ratio of the throughput obtained when transmitting the corresponding transport format on a randomly
selected sub-band among the sub-bands with the highest differential CQI offset level and that obtained when
transmitting the transport format indicated by the reported wideband CQI median on a randomly selected sub-
band among all the sub-bands shall be ≥ γ, where γ is specified in Table 6.2.2.1.2.2.3-2.
c) When transmitting the corresponding transport format on a randomly selected sub-band among the sub-bands
with the highest differential CQI offset level, the average BLER for the indicated transport format shall be
greater than or equal to TBD.
The requirements only apply for sub-bands of full size and the random scheduling across the sub-bands is done by
selecting a new sub-band in each TTI for FDD.
ETSI
Table 6.2.2.1.2.2.3-1: Sub-band CQI reporting test under frequency-selective fading conditions
Bandwidth MHz 10
Duplex Mode FDD
First PRB 0
#1
SNR dB TBD TBD TBD TBD
[Two tap model specified in Annex
Propagation channel B.2.4 with a=1, fD = 5Hz, and
τd=0.45μs]
Antenna configuration 2x2
Correlation configuration As per Annex B.1
Beamforming Model As specified in Section B.1
CDM Type FD-CDM2
Density (ρ) 1
Row 5,4
9
for CSI-RS (l0)
CSI-RS
slot 5/1
CDM Type FD-CDM2
Density (ρ) 1
Row 3,(6,-)
13
for CSI-RS (l0)
slot 5/1
(4, 9)
(kCSI-IM,lCSI-IM)
CSI-IM timeConfig
slot 5/1
CQI-table Table 2
cqi-FormatIndicator Subband
Sub-band Size RB 8
(CodebookConfig-
Not configured
RI Restriction N/A
Physical channel for CSI report TBD
Measurement channel TBD
ETSI

α [%] TBD TBD
β [%] TBD TBD
γ TBD TBD
Annex A, in Figure A.3.1.6.1 for TE diagram and Figure A.3.2.3.1 for UE diagram.
clause 6.2.2.1.2.2.4.3.
SNR according to Table 6.2.2.1.2.2.3-1 as appropriate.
CQI value 8 and keep it regardless of the wideband and subband CQI value sent by the UE. The SS sends
downlink MAC padding bits on the DL RMC. Continue transmission of the PDSCH until [2000] wideband CQI
reports and full-size subband CQI reports for each full-size subband have been gathered. In this process the SS
collects sub-band CQI reports every 10 ms and also cases where UE transmits nothing in its CQI timing are also
counted as subband CQI reports.
(wideband Median CQI is the CQI that is at or crosses 50% distribution from the lower wideband CQI side).
This CQI-value is declared as wideband Median CQI value.
4. For each subband, if subband differential CQI offset level of 0 is reported, at least α % but less than β % of
[2000] full-size subband CQI report, then continue to step 5, otherwise, go to step 7.
5. The SS shall transmit PDSCH via PDCCH DCI format [1_1] for C_RNTI to transmit the DL RMC in an each
available downlink transmission instance randomly selected full-size subband using the transport format
according to the wideband median CQI value regardless of UE wideband or subband CQI report. Note that each
ETSI
full-size subband shall be selected in the equal probability. The SS sends downlink MAC padding bits on the DL
RMC. Measure the average throughput according to Annex TBD. Declare the throughput as t median .
the highest UE reported full-size subband CQI value in one full-size subband selected among the sub-bands in
which UE report the highest full-size subband CQI. Subband differential CQI offset level is selected from {0, 1,
2, -1}. Note that the SS shall send PDSCH in the same full-size subband until next UE report is available. In case
when same full-size subbands are reported subsequently as subbands with highest full-size subband CQI, the SS
shall select for transmission a different subband with respect to the last selection. The SS sends downlink MAC
padding bits on the DL RMC Measure the average throughput and (NACK /(ACK + NACK)) according to
Annex TBD. Declare the throughput as t subband . If the ratio ( t subband / t median ) ≥ γ and (NACK /(ACK +
NACK)) ≥ TBD, pass the UE and go to step 8. Otherwise, go to step 7.
the table 6.2.2.1.2.2.3-1 for the other test as appropriate.

Row3 001000
}
nrofPorts p2
}

Row5 000100
}
nrofPorts p4
}
ETSI

pattern0 SEQUENCE {
symbolLocation-p0 9
}
Offset

slots5 1
}

Two SEQUENCE {
}
}

periodic SEQUENCE {
et
pucch-CSI-ResourceList [PUCCH-CSI-Resource]
}
cqi-FormatIndicator subbandCQI
csi-ReportingBand CHOICE {
subbands7 [1111111]
}
}
subbandSize 8
Slots8 7 8 slots
}
}

Same as in 6.2.2.1.2.2.4.3_1.
ETSI
ETSI
Table 6.2.2.1.2.2.5 -1: Sub-band CQI reporting test under frequency-selective fading conditions
Bandwidth MHz 10
Duplex Mode FDD
First PRB 0
#1
TBD TBD + TBD + TBD
SNR dB
+ TT TT TT + TT
[Two tap model specified in Annex
τd=0.45μs]
Antenna configuration TBD
Beamforming Model
TBD]
CDM Type FD-CDM2
Density (ρ) 1
Row 5,4
9
for CSI-RS (l0)
CSI-RS
slot 5/1
CDM Type FD-CDM2
Density (ρ) 1
Row 3,(6,-)
13
for CSI-RS (l0)
slot 5/1
(4, 9)
(kCSI-IM,lCSI-IM)
CSI-IM timeConfig
slot 5/1
CQI-table Table 2
Sub-band Size RB 8
(CodebookConfig-
Not configured
Note 1: TT = TBD
ETSI
Table: 6.2.2.1.2.2.5-2: Minimum requirements

α [%] TBD TBD
β [%] TBD TBD
γ TBD TBD
6.2.2.2 TDD
6.2.2.2.1 CQI Reporting definition under AWGN conditions
6.2.2.2.1.1 2Rx TDD FR1 periodic CQI reporting under AWGN conditions for both SA and NSA
6.2.2.2.1.1.1 Test Purpose
The purpose of this test is to verify the variance of the wideband CQI reports is within the limits defined and a PDSCH
BLER of 10% falls between the transport format based median CQI-1 and median CQI or the transport format based
median CQI and median CQI +1.
6.2.2.2.1.1.2 Test Applicability
6.2.2.2.1.1.3 Minimum requirement for periodic CQI reporting
The purpose of the requirements is to verify that the reported CQI values are in accordance with the CQI definition
given in TS 38.214 [12]. The reporting accuracy of CQI under AWGN condition is determined by the reporting
variance and BLER performance using the transport format indicated by the reported CQI median.
For the parameters specified in Table 6.2.2.2.1.1.3-1, and using the downlink physical channels specified in Annex
a) The reported CQI value according to the reference channel shall be in the range of ±1 of the reported median
more than 90% of the time.
b) If the PDSCH BLER using the transport format indicated by median CQI is less than or equal to 0.1, then the
BLER using the transport format indicated by the (median CQI+1) shall be greater than 0.1. If the PDSCH
BLER using the transport format indicated by the median CQI is greater than 0.1, then the BLER using transport
format indicated by (median CQI-1) shall be less than or equal to 0.1.
ETSI
Table 6.2.2.2.1.1.3-1: CQI reporting definition test

Bandwidth MHz 40
Duplex Mode TDD
SNR dB 8 9 14 15
Propagation channel AWGN
2×2 with static channel specified in
Annex B.1
Beamforming Model
B.4.1
CDM Type FD-CDM2
Density (ρ) 1
Row 5,4
9
for CSI-RS (l0)
CSI-RS
slot 10/1
CDM Type FD-CDM2
Density (ρ) 1
Row 3,(6,-)
13
for CSI-RS (l0)
slot 10/1
(4, 9)
(kCSI-IM,lCSI-IM)
CSI-IM timeConfig
slot 10/1
CQI-table Table 2
Sub-band Size RB 16
CSI-reportingBand 1111111
(CodebookConfig-
Not configured
RI Restriction N/A
CQI/RI/PMI delay ms 9.5
Measurement channel
4
ETSI
6.2.2.2.1.1.4 Test Description
6.2.2.2.1.1.4.1 Initial Conditions
2. The parameter settings for the NR cell are set up according to Table 6.1.2-1 and 6.2.2.2.1.1.3-1 as appropriate.
3. Downlink signals for the NR cell are initially set up according to Annex C.0, C.1, C.2, C.3.1 , and uplink signals
(EN-DC, DC bearer MCG and SCG, Connected without release On) for NSA according to TS 38.508-1 [6]
clause 4.5. Message content are defined in clause 6.2.2.2.1.1.4.3.
6.2.2.2.1.1.4.2 Test Procedure
1. Set the parameters of bandwidth, SCS, reference Channel, the propagation condition, antenna configuration and
the SNR according to Table 6.2.2.2.1.1.3-1.
padding bits on the DL RMC. Continue transmission of the PDSCH until 2000 wideband CQI reports have been
gathered. In this process the SS collects wideband CQI reports every 5 ms and also cases where UE transmits
nothing in its CQI timing are also counted as wideband CQI reports.
side). This CQI-value is declared as wideband Median CQI value.
4. If Median CQI is not equal to 1 or 15 and [1800] or more of the wideband CQI values are in the range (Median
CQI - 1) ≤ Median CQI ≤ ( Median CQI + 1) then continue with step 5, otherwise go to step 8.
the wideband median-CQI value and shall not react to the UE’s wideband CQI reports. The SS sends downlink
responses reaches 1000.
For the filtered ACK and NACK responses if the ratio (NACK / ACK + NACK) ≤ 0.1 then go to step 6,
otherwise go to step 7.
the wideband median-CQI+1 value and shall not react to the UE’s wideband CQI reports. The SS sends
ETSI
downlink MAC padding bits on the DL RMC. For any PDSCH, transmitted by the SS, record and filter the
ACK, NACK and statDTX responses as in step 5 until 1000 filtered ACK+NACK responses are gathered.
If the ratio (NACK /ACK + NACK) > 0.1
the wideband median-CQI-1 value and shall not react to the UE’s wideband CQI reports. The SS sends downlink
MAC padding bits on the DL RMC. For any PDSCH, transmitted by the SS, record and filter the ACK, NACK
and statDTX responses as in step 5 until 1000 filtered ACK+NACK responses are gathered.
If the ratio (NACK /ACK + NACK) ≤ 0.1
9. Repeat step 1 to 8 for Test2.
Message contents are according to TS 38.508 [6] clause 5.4.2 with the following exceptions:

CSI-ReportConfig ::= SEQUENCE {
reportConfigType CHOICE { Periodic
periodic SEQUENCE {
reportSlotConfig CSI- 10/1
et
}
}
reportQuantity CHOICE {
cri-RI-PMI-CQI NULL,
}
cqi-FormatIndicator widebandCQI
pmi-FormatIndicator widebandPMI
csi-ReportingBand CHOICE{
Subbands16 1111111
}
}
timeRestrictionForChannelMeasurements notConfigured
timeRestrictionForInterferenceMeasurements notConfigured
codebookConfig CodebookConfig
dummy Not present
cqi-Table table2
subbandSize Value16
non-PMI-PortIndication Not present
}
ETSI

CodebookConfig ::= SEQUENCE {
codebookType CHOICE {
type1 SEQUENCE {
subType CHOICE {
typeI-SinglePanel SEQUENCE {
Two SEQUENCE {
twoTX-codebookSubsetRestriction 010000
}
},
}
}
typeI-SinglePanel-ri-Restriction notPresent
},
codebookMode 1
},
Same as specified in 6.2.2.2.1.1.4.4_1.
6.2.2.2.1.1.5 Test Requirements
The pass fail decision is as specified in the test procedure in clause 6.2.2.2.1.1.4.2.
There are no parameters in the test setup or measurement process whose variation impacts the results so there are no
applicable test tolerances for this test.
6.2.2.2.2 Wideband CQI reporting under fading conditions
6.2.2.2.2.1 2Rx TDD FR1 periodic wideband CQI reporting under fading conditions for both SA
and NSA
-Minimum requirement is within square brackets
- Test tolerance is missing
- Message exceptions for NSA
ETSI
a) A CQI index not in the set {median CQI -1, median CQI, median CQI +1} shall be reported at least α% of the
time where α% is specified in Table 6.2.2.2.2.1.3-2;
b) The ratio of the throughput obtained when transmitting the transport format indicated by each reported wideband
CQI index and that obtained when transmitting a fixed transport format configured according to the wideband
CQI median shall be ≥ γ, where γ is specified in Table 6.2.2.2.2.1.3-2;
c) When transmitting the transport format indicated by each reported wideband CQI index, the average BLER for
the indicated transport formats shall be greater than or equal to [0.02].
ETSI
Table 6.2.2.2.2.1-1: Wideband CQI reporting test under frequency non-selective fading conditions
Bandwidth MHz 40
Duplex Mode TDD
SNR dB 6 7 12 13
Beamforming Model As specified in AnnexB.4.1
CDM Type FD-CDM2
Density (ρ) 1
Row 5,4
9
for CSI-RS (l0)
CSI-RS
slot 10/1
CDM Type FD-CDM2
Density (ρ) 1
Row 3,(6,-)
13
for CSI-RS (l0)
slot 10/1
(4, 9)
(kCSI-IM,lCSI-IM)
CSI-IM timeConfig
slot 10/1
CQI-table Table 2
Sub-band Size RB 16
Csi-ReportingBand 1111111
(CodebookConfig-
Not configured
RI Restriction N/A
Measurement channel
3
ETSI
Table 6.2.2.2.2.1-2: Minimum requirements

α [%] [20] [20]
γ [1.05] [1.05]
clause 6.2.2.2.2.1.4.3.
SNR according to Table 6.2.2.2.2.1.5-1.
padding bits on the DL RMC. Continue transmission of the PDSCH until [2000] wideband CQI reports have
been gathered. In this process the SS collects wideband CQI reports every 10 ms and also cases where UE
transmits nothing in its CQI timing are also counted as wideband CQI reports.
side). This CQI-value is declared as Median CQI value.
4. If Median CQI value is not equal to 1 or 15 and [400 (α%)] or more of the wideband CQI values are outside the
range (Median CQI - 1) ≤ Median CQI ≤ (Median CQI + 1) then continue with step 5, otherwise fail the UE.
the Median CQI value from step 3 and shall not react to the UE’s wideband CQI reports. The SS sends downlink
ETSI
responses reaches [1000]. Record the BLER (NACK / ACK + NACK) for Median CQI and measure the average
throughput according to Annex TBD. Declare the throughput as t median .
If the recorded BLER ≥ [0.02] then continue with step 6, otherwise fail the UE.
the UE’s reported wideband CQI value. The SS sends downlink MAC padding bits on the DL RMC. For any
PDSCH transmitted by the SS, record the associated ACK, NACK and statDTX responses. The responses are
then filtered as follows: for the sequence of responses for each HARQ process, discard all the statDTX
responses. Continue to gather data until the number of filtered ACK+NACK responses reaches [1000]. Record
the BLER (NACK / ACK + NACK) and measure the average throughput according to Annex TBD. Declare the
throughput as t.
If the recorded BLER ≥ [0.02] and t / t median ≥ γ then continue with step 7, otherwise fail the UE.
SNR point as appropriate.
the table 6.2.2.2.2.1.5 -1 for the other Test as appropriate.
Same as 6.2.2.1.2.1.4.3_1 with following exceptions:

slots10 1
}
FFS
Table 6.2.2.2.2.1.5 -1: Wideband CQI reporting test under frequency non-selective fading conditions
13+T
SNR dB 6+TT 7+TT 12+TT
T

α [%] [20] [20]
γ [1.05] [1.05]
ETSI
6.2.2.2.2.2 2Rx TDD FR1 periodic subband CQI reporting under fading conditions for both SA
and NSA
-Minimum requirement is within square brackets
- Minimum requirement for BLER is TBD
To verify the variance of the subband CQI reports is within the limits defined, that the ratio of the throughput is within
the limits defined and that the average PDSCH BLER is greater than or equal to TBD % for the indicated transport
format.
The purpose of the requirements is to verify that the preferred sub-bands can be used for frequency-selective scheduling
under the frequency-selective fading conditions.
The accuracy of sub-band channel CQI reporting under the frequency-selective fading conditions is determined by a
double-sided percentile of the reported differential CQI offset level 0 per sub-band, and the relative increase of the
throughput obtained when transmitting the transport format indicated by the corresponding reported sub-band CQI on a
randomly selected sub-band among the sub-bands with the highest reported differential CQI offset level compared to
the throughput when transmitting a fixed transport format according to the wideband CQI median on a randomly
selected sub-band among all the sub-bands.
a) A sub-band differential CQI offset level of 0 shall be reported at least α% of the time but less than β% of the
time for each sub-band, where α and β are specified in Table 6.2.2.2.2.2.3-2;
b) The ratio of the throughput obtained when transmitting the corresponding transport format on a randomly
selected sub-band among the sub-bands with the highest differential CQI offset level and that obtained when
transmitting the transport format indicated by the reported wideband CQI median on a randomly selected sub-
band among all the sub-bands shall be ≥ γ, where γ is specified in Table 6.2.2.2.2.2.3-2;
c) When transmitting the corresponding transport format on a randomly selected sub-band among the sub-bands
with the highest differential CQI offset level, the average BLER for the indicated transport format shall be
greater than or equal to TBD.
The requirements only apply for sub-bands of full size and the random scheduling across the sub-bands is done by
selecting a new sub-band in each available downlink transmission instance for TDD.
ETSI
Table 6.2.2.2.2.2.3-1: Sub-band CQI reporting test under frequency-selective fading conditions
Bandwidth MHz 40
Duplex Mode TDD
SNR dB [8] [9] [14] [15]
Two tap model specified in Annex
τd=0.1125μs
Beamforming Model
B.4.1
CDM Type FD-CDM2
Density (ρ) 1
Row 5,4
9
for CSI-RS (l0)
CSI-RS
slot 10/1
CDM Type FD-CDM2
Density (ρ) 1
Row 3,(6,-)
13
for CSI-RS (l0)
slot 10/1
(4, 9)
(kCSI-IM,lCSI-IM)
CSI-IM timeConfig
slot 10/1
CQI-table Table 2
Sub-band Size RB 16
(CodebookConfig-
Not configured
RI Restriction N/A
ETSI

α [%] [2] [2]
β [%] [55] [55]
γ [1.05] [1.05]
clause 6.2.2.2.2.2.4.3.
SNR according to Table 6.2.2.2.2.2.3-1 as appropriate.
CQI value 8 and keep it regardless of the wideband and subband CQI value sent by the UE. The SS sends
downlink MAC padding bits on the DL RMC. Continue transmission of the PDSCH until [2000] wideband CQI
reports and full-size subband CQI reports for each full-size subband have been gathered. In this process the SS
collects sub-band CQI reports every 10 ms and also cases where UE transmits nothing in its CQI timing are also
counted as subband CQI reports.
(wideband Median CQI is the CQI that is at or crosses 50% distribution from the lower wideband CQI side).
This CQI-value is declared as wideband Median CQI value.
4. For each subband, if subband differential CQI offset level of 0 is reported, at least α % but less than β % of
[2000] full-size subband CQI report, then continue to step 5, otherwise, go to step 7.
5. The SS shall transmit PDSCH via PDCCH DCI format [1_1] for C_RNTI to transmit the DL RMC in an each
available downlink transmission instance randomly selected full-size subband using the transport format
according to the wideband median CQI value regardless of UE wideband or subband CQI report. Note that each
ETSI
full-size subband shall be selected in the equal probability. The SS sends downlink MAC padding bits on the DL
RMC. Measure the average throughput according to Annex TBD. Declare the throughput as t median .
the highest UE reported full-size subband CQI value in one full-size subband selected among the sub-bands in
which UE report the highest full-size subband CQI. Subband differential CQI offset level is selected from {0, 1,
2, -1}. Note that the SS shall send PDSCH in the same full-size subband until next UE report is available. In case
when same full-size subbands are reported subsequently as subbands with highest full-size subband CQI, the SS
shall select for transmission a different subband with respect to the last selection. The SS sends downlink MAC
padding bits on the DL RMC Measure the average throughput and (NACK /(ACK + NACK)) according to
Annex TBD. Declare the throughput as t subband . If the ratio ( t subband / t median ) ≥ γ and (NACK /(ACK +
NACK)) ≥ TBD, pass the UE and go to step 8. Otherwise, go to step 7.
the table 6.2.2.2.2.2.3-1 for the other test as appropriate.

Row3 001000
}
nrofPorts p2
}

Row5 000100
}
nrofPorts p4
}
ETSI

pattern0 SEQUENCE {
symbolLocation-p0 9
}
Offset

slots10 1
}

Two SEQUENCE {
}
}

periodic SEQUENCE {
et
pucch-CSI-ResourceList TBD
}
}
slots10 1
}
Same as in 6.2.2.2.2.2.4.3_1.
ETSI
Table 6.2.2.2.2.2.5 -1: Subband CQI reporting test under frequency non-selective fading conditions
[8]+T [14]+T [15]+
SNR dB [9]+TT
T T TT
NOTE 1: Test tolerance TT = TBD dB.

α [%] [2] [2]
β [%] [55] [55]
γ [1.05] [1.05]
6.2.3.1 FDD
6.2.3.2 TDD
6.3 Reporting of Precoding Matrix Indicator (PMI)

6.3.2.1 FDD
6.3.2.1.1 2Rx FDD FR1 Single PMI with 4Tx Type I
6.3.2.1.1_1 2Rx FDD FR1 Single PMI with 4Tx Type I – SinglePanel codebook for both SA and NSA
Editor’s Note: This test case is incomplete. The following aspects are either missing or TBD
- Test Description is TBD since the following sections are not yet defined
- Test Procedure is TBD
-Test Requirements are TBD
The purpose of this test is to test the accuracy of the Precoding Matrix Indicator (PMI) reporting such that the system
throughput is maximized based on the precoders configured according to the UE reports.
6.3.2.1.1_1.3 Minimum conformance requirements
For the parameters specified in Table 6.3.2.1.1-1, and using the downlink physical channels specified in Annex C.3.1,
the minimum requirements are specified in Table 6.3.2.1.1-2.
ETSI
Table 6.3.2.1.1-1: Test parameters (single layer)
ETSI
Parameter Unit Test 1

Bandwidth MHz 10
Duplex Mode FDD
First PRB 0
DL BWP Number of
52
configuration contiguous PRB
#1 Subcarrier
kHz 15
spacing
High XP 4 x 2
(N1,N2) = (2,1)
Beamforming Model TBD
CSI-RS resource
Aperiodic
Type
Number of CSI-
4
RS ports (X)
CDM Type FD-CDM2
Density (ρ) 1
First subcarrier
ZP CSI-RS index in the PRB
Row 5, (4,-)
configuration used for CSI-RS
(k0, k1 )
First OFDM
symbol in the PRB
(9,-)
used for CSI-RS
(l0, l1)
CSI-RS
slot 5/1
interval and offset
CSI-RS resource
Aperiodic
Type
Number of CSI-
4
RS ports (X)
CDM Type FD-CDM2
Density (ρ) 1
First subcarrier
NZP CSI-RS
index in the PRB
for CSI Row 4, (0,-)
used for CSI-RS
acquisition
(k0, k1 )
First OFDM
symbol in the PRB
(13,-)
used for CSI-RS
(l0, l1)
CSI-RS
5/1
interval and offset
CSI-IM RE pattern Patten 0
CSI-IM Resource
CSI-IM Mapping (4,9)
configuration (kCSI-IM,lCSI-IM)
CSI-IM timeConfig
slot 5/1
interval and offset
ReportConfigType Aperiodic
CQI-table Table 1
timeRestrictionForChannelMeasure
Not configured
ments
timeRestrictionForInterferenceMeas
Not configured
urements
CSI-Report interval and offset slot 5/1
aperiodicTriggeringOffset 0
Codebook Type typeI-SinglePanel
Codebook Mode 1
Codebook
(CodebookConfig-
configuration
N1,CodebookConf (2,1)
ig-N2)
ETSI
CodebookSubset
11111111
Restriction
RI Restriction 00000001
Physical channel for CSI report PUSCH
Maximum number of HARQ
4
transmission
MCS 13, TBD for reference
Measurement channel
channel
Note 1: For random precoder selection, the precoder shall be updated in each
slot (1 ms granularity).
Note 2: If the UE reports in an available uplink reporting instance at slot#n
based on PMI estimation at a downlink slot not later than slot#[(n-4)],
this reported PMI cannot be applied at the eNB downlink before
slot#[(n+4)].
Note 3: Randomization of the principle beam direction shall be used as
specified in TBD.
Table 6.3.2.1.1-2: Minimum requirement

Parameter Test 1
γ [1.3]
carrier spacing based on NR operating bands specified in Table 5.3.5-1 and Table 5.3.6-1 of 38.521-1.
5. Ensure the UE is in state RRC_CONNECTED with generic procedure parameters Connectivity NR, Connected
without release On for SA or (EN-DC, DC bearer MCG and SCG, Connected without Release On) for NSA
according to TS 38.508-1 [6] clause 4.5. Message content are defined in clause 5.2.2.1.1.4.3.
FFS
ETSI
FFS
FFS
TBD
6.3.2.1.2 2Rx FDD FR1 Single PMI with 8Tx Type I – SinglePanel codebook for both SA
and NSA
Editor’s Note: This test case is incomplete. The following aspects are either missing or TBD
-Test Requirements is in []
-TT is TBD
-Message exceptions are FFS
-Procedure for establish , and are TBD
6.3.2.1.2.1 Test purpose
For the parameters specified in Table 6.3.2.1.2-1 and using the downlink physical channels specified in Annex C.3.1,
ETSI
Table 6.3.2.1.2.3-1: Test parameters (dual-layer)
ETSI

Bandwidth MHz 10
Duplex Mode FDD
High XP 8 x 2
(N1,N2) = (4,1)
As specified in TS 38.101
Beamforming Model
Section Annex B.4.1
CSI-RS resource
Aperiodic
Type
Number of CSI-
4
RS ports (X)
CDM Type FD-CDM2
Density (ρ) 1
First subcarrier
Row 5, (4,-)
(k0, k1 )
First OFDM
symbol in the PRB
(9,-)
used for CSI-RS
(l0, l1)
CSI-RS
slot 5/1
interval and offset
CSI-RS resource
Aperiodic
Type
Number of CSI-
8
RS ports (X)
CDM Type CDM4 (FD2, TD2)
Density (ρ) 1
First subcarrier
NZP CSI-RS
index in the PRB
for CSI Row 8, (4,6)
used for CSI-RS
acquisition
(k0, k1 )
First OFDM
symbol in the PRB
(5,-)
used for CSI-RS
(l0, l1)
CSI-RS
slot 5/1
interval and offset
CSI-IM CSI-IM RE pattern Patten 0
configuration CSI-IM Resource
Mapping (4,9)
(kCSI-IM,lCSI-IM)
CSI-IM timeConfig
slot 5/1
interval and offset
CQI-table Table 1
Not configured
ments
Not configured
urements
csi-ReportingBand [1111111]
(CodebookConfig-
ig-N2)
CodebookSubset
0x FFFF
Restriction
ETSI
4
transmission
Measurement channel R.PDSCH.1-6.2
slot#[(n+4)].
specified in TBD.
Table 6.3.2.1.2-2: Minimum requirement

Parameter Test 1
γ [1.5]
1. Set the parameters of bandwidth, the propagation condition, antenna configuration and measurement channel
2. The SS shall transmit PDSCH via PDCCH DCI format [1_1] for C_RNTI to transmit the DL RMC with
precoding matrix according to PMI report from the UE. The SS sends downlink MAC padding bits on the DL
RMC. SS schedules the UL transmission to carry the PUSCH CSI feedback via PDCCH DCI format [0_1] with
aperiodic CSI request triggered. Establish t ue , follow1, follow 2 and SNR follow1, follow 2 according to Annex TBD.
ETSI
3. Set SNR to SNR follow1, follow 2 . The SS shall transmit PDSCH with randomly selected precoding matrix from
codebook (Table 5.2.2.2.1-6 in TS 38.214 [TBD]) every slot regardless of PMI reports from the UE. Note that
each precoding matrix shall be selected in equal probabilities. The SS sends downlink MAC padding bits on the
DL RMC. SS schedules the UL transmission to carry the PUSCH CSI feedback via PDCCH DCI format [0_1]
with aperiodic CSI request triggered. Measure t rnd 1, rnd 2 according to Annex TBD.
tue, follow1, follow 2

4. Calculate γ = . If the ratio ≥ γ which is specified in table 6.3.2.1.2.4.4-1, then the test is pass.
trnd 1, rnd 2
Otherwise, the test is fail.
FFS
FFS
6.3.2.1.2. 5 Test requirement
Table 6.3.2.1.2.4.4-1: Test requirement

Parameter Test 1
γ [1.5]
6.3.2.2 TDD
6.3.2.2.1 2Rx TDD FR1 Single PMI with 4Tx Type1 - SinglePanel codebook for both SA
and NSA
Editor's Note: This test case is incomplete. The following aspects are either missing or TBD
- Initial Conditions are TBD
- Message Contents are TBD
- Test Requirements are TBD
ETSI
6.3.2.2.1.3 Minimum Conformance Requirements
Table 6.3.2.2.1.3-1: Test parameters (single layer)

Bandwidth MHz 40
Duplex Mode TDD
FR1.30-1 as specified in Annex
TDD DL-UL configuration
A
First PRB 0
DL BWP
Number of
configuration 106
contiguous PRB
#1
High XP 4 x 2
(N1,N2) = (2,1)
Beamforming Model TBD
CSI-RS resource
Aperiodic
Type
Number of CSI-RS
4
ports (X)
CDM Type FD-CDM2
Density (ρ) 1
First subcarrier
ZP CSI-RS
index in the PRB
configuration Row 5, (4,-)
used for CSI-RS
(k0, k1 )
First OFDM symbol
in the PRB used for (9,-)
CSI-RS (l0, l1)
CSI-RS
slot 10/1
interval and offset
CSI-RS resource
Aperiodic
Type
Number of CSI-RS
4
ports (X)
CDM Type FD-CDM2
Density (ρ) 1
NZP CSI-RS First subcarrier
for CSI index in the PRB
Row 4, (0,-)
acquisition used for CSI-RS
(k0, k1 )
First OFDM symbol
in the PRB used for (13,-)
CSI-RS (l0, l1)
CSI-RS
slot 10/1
interval and offset
Mapping (4,9)
(kCSI-IM, lCSI-IM)
CSI-IM timeConfig
slot 10/1
interval and offset
ETSI

CQI-table Table 1
Not configured
ments
Not configured
urements
(CodebookConfig-
N1,CodebookConfi (2,1)
g-N2)
CodebookSubsetR
11111111
estriction
4
transmission
MCS13, TBD for reference
Measurement channel
channel
NOTE 1: For random precoder selection, the precoder shall be updated in each
slot (0.5 ms granularity).
NOTE 2: If the UE reports in an available uplink reporting instance at slot #n
slot#[(n+6)].
NOTE 3: Randomization of the principle beam direction shall be used as
specified in TBD.
Table 6.3.2.2.1.3-2: Minimum requirement

Parameter Test 1
γ [1.3]
6.3.2.2.1.4 Test Description
TBD
6.3.2.2.1.5 Test Requirements
TBD
6.3.3.1 FDD
6.3.3.1.1 Single PMI with 4TX TypeI-SinglePanel Codebook– SinglePanel codebook for
both SA and NSA
-Procedure for establish t ue , follow1, follow 2 , SNR follow1, follow 2 and t rnd 1, rnd 2 are TBD
ETSI
- Test requirement is in []
- TT is TBD
- Message exceptions are FFs
To test the accuracy of the Precoding Matrix Indicator (PMI) reporting such that the system throughput is maximized
based on the precoders configured according to the UE reports.
ETSI
Table 6.3.3.1.1.3-1: Test parameters for single layer (FDD)
ETSI

Bandwidth MHz 10
Duplex Mode FDD
High XP 4 x 4
(N1,N2) = (2,1)
Beamforming Model
B.4.1
CSI-RS resource
Aperiodic
Type
Number of CSI-
4
RS ports (X)
CDM Type FD-CDM2
Density (ρ) 1
First subcarrier
Row 5, (4,-)
(k0, k1 )
First OFDM
symbol in the PRB
(9,-)
used for CSI-RS
(l0, l1)
CSI-RS
slot 5/1
interval and offset
CSI-RS resource
Aperiodic
Type
Number of CSI-
4
RS ports (X)
CDM Type FD-CDM2
Density (ρ) 1
First subcarrier
NZP CSI-RS
index in the PRB
used for CSI-RS
acquisition
(k0, k1 )
First OFDM
symbol in the PRB
(13,-)
used for CSI-RS
(l0, l1)
CSI-RS
slot 5/1
interval and offset
Mapping (4,9)
(kCSI-IM,lCSI-IM)
CSI-IM timeConfig
slot 5/1
interval and offset
CQI-table Table 1
Not configured
ments
Not configured
urements
Sub-band Size RB 8
csi-ReportingBand 1111111
(CodebookConfig-
ig-N2)
CodebookSubset
11111111
Restriction
ETSI
4
transmission
Measurement channel R.PDSCH.1-6.1 FDD
slot#[(n+3)].
specified in Annex B.2.3.2.3

Parameter Test 1
γ [1.3]
6.3.3.1.1.4 Test description6.3.3.1.1.4.1 Initial conditions
RMC. SS schedules the UL transmission to carry the PUSCH CQI feedback via PDCCH DCI format [0_1] with
ETSI
codebook (Table 5.2.2.2.1-5 in TS 38.214 [12]) every slot regardless of PMI reports from the UE. Note that each
precoding matrix shall be selected in equal probabilities. The SS sends downlink MAC padding bits on the DL
aperiodic CSI request triggered. Measure t rnd 1, rnd 2 according to Annex TBD.

4. Calculate γ = . If the ratio ≥ γ which is specified in table 6.3.2.1.1.5-1, then the test is pass.
trnd 1, rnd 2
FFS
FFS
Table 6.3.3.1.1.5-1: Test requirement

Parameter Test 1
γ [1.3]
6.3.3.1.2 Single PMI with 8TX TypeI-SinglePanel Codebook– SinglePanel codebook for
both SA and NSA
-Procedure for establish t ue , follow1, follow 2 , SNR follow1, follow 2 and trnd 1, rnd 2 are TBD
- TT is TBD
- Message exceptions are FFS
ETSI
For the parameters specified in Table 6.3.3.1.2.3-1, and using the downlink physical channels specified in Annex C.3.1,
the minimum requirements are specified in Table 6.3.3.1.2.3-2.
ETSI
ETSI

Bandwidth MHz 10
Duplex Mode FDD
High XP 8 x 4
(N1,N2) = (4,1)
Beamforming Model
B.4.1
CSI-RS resource
Aperiodic
Type
Number of CSI-
4
RS ports (X)
CDM Type FD-CDM2
Density (ρ) 1
First subcarrier
Row 5, (4,-)
(k0, k1 )
First OFDM
symbol in the PRB
(9,-)
used for CSI-RS
(l0, l1)
CSI-RS
slot 5/1
interval and offset
CSI-RS resource
Aperiodic
Type
Number of CSI-
8
RS ports (X)
Density (ρ) 1
First subcarrier
NZP CSI-RS
index in the PRB
used for CSI-RS
acquisition
(k0, k1 )
First OFDM
symbol in the PRB
(5,-)
used for CSI-RS
(l0, l1)
CSI-RS
slot 5/1
interval and offset
Mapping (4,9)
(kCSI-IM,lCSI-IM)
CSI-IM timeConfig
slot 5/1
interval and offset
CQI-table Table 1
Not configured
ments
Not configured
urements
Sub-band Size RB 8
(CodebookConfig-
ig-N2)
CodebookSubset
0x FFFF
Restriction
ETSI
4
transmission
Measurement channel R.PDSCH.1-6.2 FDD
slot#[(n+4)].

Parameter Test 1
γ [1.5]
ETSI

trnd 1, rnd 2
FFS
FFS

Parameter Test 1
γ [1.5]
6.3.3.2 TDD
6.3.3.2.1 4Rx TDD FR1 Single PMI with 4Tx Type1 - SinglePanel codebook for both SA and NSA
- TT is TBD
ETSI
For the parameters specified in Table 6.3.3.2.1.3-1 and using the downlink physical channels specified in Annex TBD,
ETSI
Table 6.3.3.2.1.3-1: Test parameters (single layer)
ETSI

Bandwidth MHz 40
Duplex Mode TDD
TDD DL-UL configuration
A
High XP 4 x 4
(N1,N2) = (2,1)
Beamforming Model
B.4.1
CSI-RS resource
Aperiodic
Type
Number of CSI-
4
RS ports (X)
CDM Type FD-CDM2
Density (ρ) 1
First subcarrier
Row 5, (4,-)
(k0, k1 )
First OFDM
symbol in the PRB
(9,-)
used for CSI-RS
(l0, l1)
CSI-RS
slot 10/1
interval and offset
CSI-RS resource
Aperiodic
Type
Number of CSI-
4
RS ports (X)
CDM Type FD-CDM2
Density (ρ) 1
First subcarrier
NZP CSI-RS
index in the PRB
used for CSI-RS
acquisition
(k0, k1 )
First OFDM
symbol in the PRB
(13,-)
used for CSI-RS
(l0, l1)
CSI-RS
10/1
interval and offset
Mapping (4,9)
(kCSI-IM,lCSI-IM)
CSI-IM timeConfig
slot 10/1
interval and offset
CQI-table Table 1
Not configured
ments
Not configured
urements
Sub-band Size RB 16
(CodebookConfig-
ig-N2)
ETSI
CodebookSubset
11111111
Restriction
4
transmission
Measurement channel R.PDSCH.2-8.1 TDD
slot#[(n+4)].
Parameter Test 1
γ [1.3]
5. Ensure the UE is in state RRC_CONNECTED with generic procedure parameters Connectivity NR,
Connected without release On for SA or (EN-DC, DC bearer MCG and SCG, Connected without
5.2.2.1.1.4.3.
ETSI

trnd 1, rnd 2
FFS
6.3.3.2.1.4.3.2 Message exception for NSA
FFS

Parameter Test 1
γ [1.3]
6.3.3.2.2 4Rx TDD FR1 Single PMI with 8Tx Type1 - SinglePanel codebook for both SA and NSA
- TT is TBD
ETSI
For the parameters specified in Table 6.3.3.2.2.3-1, and using the downlink physical channels specified in Annex TBD,
ETSI
ETSI

Bandwidth MHz 40
Duplex Mode TDD
TDD DL-UL configurations
A
High XP 8 x 4
(N1,N2) = (4,1)
Beamforming Model
B.4.1
CSI-RS resource
Aperiodic
Type
Number of CSI-
4
RS ports (X)
CDM Type FD-CDM2
Density (ρ) 1
First subcarrier
Row 5, (4,-)
(k0, k1 )
First OFDM
symbol in the PRB
(9,-)
used for CSI-RS
(l0, l1)
CSI-RS
slot 10/1
interval and offset
CSI-RS resource
Aperiodic
Type
Number of CSI-
8
RS ports (X)
Density (ρ) 1
First subcarrier
NZP CSI-RS
index in the PRB
used for CSI-RS
acquisition
(k0, k1 )
First OFDM
symbol in the PRB
(5,-)
used for CSI-RS
(l0, l1)
CSI-RS
slot 10/1
interval and offset
Mapping (4,9)
(kCSI-IM,lCSI-IM)
CSI-IM timeConfig
slot 10/1
interval and offset
CQI-table Table 1
timeRestrictionForChannnelMeasur
Not configured
ements
Not configured
urements
Sub-band Size RB 16
(CodebookConfig-
ig-N2)
ETSI
CodebookSubset
0x FFFF
Restriction
4
transmission
Measurement channel R.PDSCH.2-8.2 TDD
slot#[(n+6)].
Parameter Test 1
γ [1.5]
ETSI

trnd 1, rnd 2
FFS
FFS

Parameter Test 1
γ [1.5]
6.4 Reporting of Rank Indicator (RI)

6.4.2.1 FDD
6.4.2.2 TDD
6.4.2.2.1 2Rx TDD FR1 RI reporting for both SA and NSA

Editor's Note: This test case is incomplete. The following aspects are either missing or TBD
- SNR and gamma ratio are currently in square brackets in TS 38.101-4.
- Annex G update for measuring throughput ratio
- Message Contents are TBD
- Test Procedure updates to differentiate RRC connection reconfiguration between NSA and SA
ETSI
6.4.2.2_1.1 Test Purpose
The purpose of this test is to verify that the reported rank indicator accurately represents the channel rank. The accuracy
of RI reporting is determined by the relative increase of the throughput obtained when transmitting based on the
reported rank compared to the case for which a fixed rank is used for transmission.
6.4.2.2_1.2 Test applicability
6.4.2.2_1.3 Minimum Conformance Requirements
The minimum performance requirement in Table 6.4.2.2_1.3-2 is defined as:
a) The ratio of the throughput obtained when transmitting based on UE reported RI and that obtained when
transmitting with fixed rank 1 shall be ≥ γ1;
b) The ratio of the throughput obtained when transmitting based on UE reported RI and that obtained when
For the parameters specified in Table 6.4.2.2_1.3-1, and using the downlink physical channels specified in Annex C.3.1,
the minimum requirements are specified in Table 6.4.2.2_1.3-2.
ETSI
Table 6.4.2.2_1.3-1: RI Test (TDD)

Parameter Unit Test 1 Test 2 Test 3
Bandwidth MHz 40 40 40
Subcarrier spacing kHz 30 30 30
Duplex Mode TDD TDD TDD
TDD Slot Configuration FR1.30-1 FR1.30-1 FR1.30-1
SNR dB [0] [20] [20]
Propagation channel TDLA30-5 TDLA30-5 TDLA30-5
Antenna configuration ULA Low 2x2 ULA Low 2x2 ULA High 2x2
As defined in As defined in As defined in
Beamforming Model
Annex B.4.1 Annex B.4.1 Annex B.4.1
CSI-RS resource Type Periodic Periodic Periodic
Number of CSI-RS ports (X) 4 4 4
CDM Type FD-CDM2 FD-CDM2 FD-CDM2
Density (ρ) 1 1 1
ZP CSI-RS
First subcarrier index in the
configuratio Row 5, (4,-) Row 5, (4,-) Row 5, (4,-)
PRB used for CSI-RS (k0, k1 )
n
(9,-) (9,-) (9,-)
used for CSI-RS (l0, l1)
CSI-RS
slot 10/1 10/1 10/1
CSI-RS resource Type Periodic Periodic Periodic
Number of CSI-RS ports (X) 2 2 2
CDM Type FD-CDM2 FD-CDM2 FD-CDM2
Density (ρ) 1 1 1
NZP CSI-
RS for CSI Row 3 (6,-) Row 3 (6,-) Row 3 (6,-)
acquisition
(13,-) (13,-) (13,-)
slot 10/1 10/1 10/1
CSI-IM CSI-IM RE pattern Pattern 0 Pattern 0 Pattern 0
configuratio CSI-IM Resource Mapping
(4,9) (4,9) (4,9)
n (kCSI-IM,lCSI-IM)
CSI-IM timeConfig
slot 10/1 10/1 10/1
ReportConfigType Periodic Periodic Periodic
CQI-table Table 2 Table 2 Table 2
cri-RI-PMI- cri-RI-PMI-
CQI CQI
not not
timeRestrictionForChannelMeasurements not configured
configured configured
not not
timeRestrictionForInterferenceMeasurements not configured
configured configured
cqi-FormatIndicator Wideband Wideband Wideband
pmi-FormatIndicator Wideband Wideband Wideband
Sub-band Size RB 16 16 16
csi-ReportingBand 1111111 1111111 1111111
CSI-Report periodicity and offset slot 10/1 10/1 10/1
Codebook Codebook Type typeI- typeI- typeI-
configuration SinglePanel SinglePanel SinglePanel
Codebook Mode 1 1 1
(CodebookConfig-
N/A N/A N/A
CodebookSubsetRestriction 010000 for 000011 for 000011 for
fixed rank 2, fixed rank 1, fixed rank 1,
010011 for 010011 for 010011 for
following rank following rank following rank
RI Restriction N/A N/A N/A
Physical channel for CSI report PUCCH PUCCH PUCCH
CQI/RI/PMI delay ms 9.5 9.5 9.5
Maximum number of HARQ transmission 1 1 1
Fixed RI = 2 Fixed RI = 1 Fixed RI = 1
RI Configuration
and follow RI and follow RI and follow RI
ETSI
Table 6.4.2.2_1.3-2: Minimum requirement (TDD)

Test 1 Test 2 Test 3
γ1 N/A TBD TBD
γ2 TBD N/A N/A
6.4.2.2_1.4 Test Description
6.4.2.2_1.4.1 Initial conditions
to reach the correct measurement state. The initial test configurations consist of environmental conditions, test
frequencies, test channel bandwidths and sub-carrier spacing based on NR operating bands specified in Table 5.3.5-1 of
38.521-1.
Configurations of PDSCH and PDCCH before measurement are specified in Annex D.
Test Environment: Normal as defined in TS 38.508 [6] clause 4.1.
Frequencies to be tested: Mid Range as defined in TS 38.508 [6] clause 4.3.1.1.
as appropriate.
without release On and Test Mode ON for SA or (EN-DC, DC bearer MCG and SCG, Connected without release
On for NSA according to TS 38.508-1 [TBD] clause 4.5. Message contents are defined in clause 6.4.2.2_1.4.3.
6.4.2.2_1.4.2 Test procedure
1. Set the parameters of bandwidth, reference channel, the propagation condition, antenna configuration, antenna
correlation, Codebook configuration, Beamforming Model, RI configuration and SNR according to Table
6.4.2.2_1.3-1 as appropriate.
2. The SS shall send PDSCH via PDCCH DCI format [1_1] for C_RNTI to transmit the DL RMC according to the
UE reported CQI (wideband CQI), PMI and fixed RI as defined in Table 6.4.2.2_1.3-1. The SS sends downlink
MAC padding bits on the DL RMC. The SS sends uplink scheduling information via PDCCH DCI format [1_1].
Measure the t fix according to Annex TBD
4. The SS sends uplink scheduling information via PDCCH DCI format [1_1].
5. The SS shall transmit an RRC Connection Reconfiguration message to set codebookSubsetRestriction as for UE
reported RI according to Table 6.4.2.2_1.3-1.
6. The UE shall transmit RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete message.
7. Propagation conditions are set according to Table 6.4.2.2_1.3-1.
UE reported CQI (wideband CQI), PMI and RI. The SS sends downlink MAC padding bits on the DL RMC. The
ETSI
SS sends uplink scheduling information via PDCCH DCI format [1_1]. Measure t reported according to Annex
TBD
If the ratio ( t reported / t fix ) satisfies the requirement in Table 6.4.2.2_1.5-1, then pass the UE for this test and go
to step 9. Otherwise, declare a FAIL verdict.
9. If all tests have not been done, then repeat the same procedure (steps 1 to 8) with test conditions according to the
Table 6.6.2.2_1.3-2 for the other Tests as appropriate. Otherwise, declare a PASS verdict.
6.4.2.2_1.4.3 Message Contents
TBD
6.4.2.2_1.5 Test Requirements
Table 6.4.2.2_1.5-1: Test Requirement (TDD)
Test 1 Test 2 Test 3

γ1 N/A TBD TBD
γ2 TBD N/A N/A
6.4.3.1 FDD
6.4.3.2 TDD
6.4.3.2_1 4Rx TDD FR1 RI reporting for both SA and NSA

Editor’s Note: This test case is incomplete. The following aspects are either missing or incomplete:
- RAN4 dependency: There are brackets and TBDs in core requirements and test parameters.
- Message Contents are not complete
- TT analysis is missing
6.4.3.2_1.1 Test Purpose
The purpose of this test is to verify that the reported rank indicator accurately represents the channel rank. The accuracy
of RI reporting is determined by the relative increase of the throughput obtained when transmitting based on the
reported rank compared to the case for which a fixed rank is used for transmission.
6.4.3.2_1.2 Test applicability
6.4.3.2_1.3 Minimum Conformance Requirements
The minimum performance requirement in Table 6.4.3.2_1.3-2 is defined as
a) The ratio of the throughput obtained when transmitting based on UE reported RI and that obtained when
b) The ratio of the throughput obtained when transmitting based on UE reported RI and that obtained when
ETSI
For the parameters specified in Table 6.4.3.2_1.3-1, and using the downlink physical channels specified in Annex C.3.1,
the minimum requirements are specified in Table 6.4.3.2_1.3-2.
ETSI
Table 6.4.3.2_1.3-1: RI Test (TDD)
ETSI
Parameter Unit Test 1 Test 2 Test 3 Test 4

Bandwidth MHz 40 40 40 40
Duplex Mode TDD TDD TDD TDD
TDD Slot Configuration FR1.30-1 FR1.30-1 FR1.30-1 FR1.30-1
First PRB 0 0 0 0
DL BWP Number of contiguous
106 106 106 106
configuration #1 PRB
Subcarrier spacing kHz 30 30 30 30
SNR dB TBD [16] [16] TBD
Propagation channel TDLA30-5 TDLA30-5 TDLA30-5 TDLA30-5
Antenna configuration ULA Low 2x4 ULA Low 2x4 ULA High 2x4 ULA Low 4x4
As defined in As defined in As defined in As defined in
Beamforming Model
Annex B.4.1 Annex B.4.1 Annex B.4.1 Annex B.4.1
CSI-RS resource Type Periodic Periodic Periodic Periodic
Number of CSI-RS ports (X) 4 4 4 4
CDM Type FD-CDM2 FD-CDM2 FD-CDM2 FD-CDM2
Density (ρ) 1 1 1 1
ZP CSI-RS
configuratio Row 5, (4,-) Row 5, (4,-) Row 5, (4,-) Row 5, (4,-)
n
(9,-) (9,-) (9,-) (9,-)
CSI-RS
slot 10/1 10/1 10/1 10/1
CSI-RS resource Type Periodic Periodic Periodic Periodic
Number of CSI-RS ports (X) 2 2 2 2
CDM Type FD-CDM2 FD-CDM2 FD-CDM2 FD-CDM2
Density (ρ) 1 1 1 1
NZP CSI-
RS for CSI Row 3 (6,-) Row 3 (6,-) Row 3 (6,-) Row 4 (0,-)
acquisition
(13,-) (13,-) (13,-) (13,-)
slot 10/1 10/1 10/1 10/1
CSI-IM CSI-IM RE pattern Pattern 0 Pattern 0 Pattern 0 Pattern 0
configuratio CSI-IM Resource Mapping
(4,9) (4,9) (4,9) (4,9)
n (kCSI-IM,lCSI-IM)
CSI-IM timeConfig
slot 10/1 10/1 10/1 10/1
ReportConfigType Periodic Periodic Periodic Periodic
CQI-table Table 2 Table 2 Table 2 Table 2
cri-RI-PMI- cri-RI-PMI- cri-RI-PMI-
CQI CQI CQI
not not not
timeRestrictionForChannelMeasurements not configured
configured configured configured
not not not
timeRestrictionForInterferenceMeasurements not configured
configured configured configured
cqi-FormatIndicator Wideband Wideband Wideband Wideband
pmi-FormatIndicator Wideband Wideband Wideband Wideband
Sub-band Size RB [16] [16] [16] [16]
csi-ReportingBand [1111111] [1111111] [1111111] [1111111]
CSI-Report periodicity and offset slot 10/1 10/1 10/1 10/1
Codebook Codebook Type typeI- typeI- typeI- typeI-
configuration SinglePanel SinglePanel SinglePanel SinglePanel
Codebook Mode 1 1 1 1
(CodebookConfig-
N/A N/A N/A (2,1)
CodebookSubsetRestriction [000011 for [000011 for
[010000 for
fixed rank 1, fixed rank 1,
fixed rank 2,
010011 for 010011 for 11111111
010011 for
following following
following rank]
rank] rank]
RI Restriction 00000010 for
fixed Rank 2
N/A N/A N/A and
00001111 for
follow RI
ETSI
Physical channel for CSI report PUCCH PUCCH PUCCH PUCCH

CQI/RI/PMI delay ms 9.5 9.5 9.5 9.5
Maximum number of HARQ transmission 1 1 1 1
Fixed RI = 2 Fixed RI = 1 Fixed RI = 1 Fixed RI = 2
RI Configuration
and follow RI and follow RI and follow RI and follow RI
Table 6.4.3.2_1.3-2: Minimum requirement (TDD)

Test 1 Test 2 Test 3 Test 4
γ1 N/A [1.05] [0.9] N/A
γ2 TBD N/A N/A TBD
6.4.3.2_1.4 Test Description
6.4.3.2_1.4.1 Initial conditions
carrier spacing based on NR operating bands specified in Table 5.3.5-1 of 38.521-1[7].
Test Environment: Normal as defined in TS 38.508-1 [6] clause 4.1.
Frequencies to be tested: Mid Range as defined in TS 38.508-1 [6] clause 4.3.1.1.
2. The parameter settings for the cell are set up according to Table 6.1.2-1 and Table 6.4.3.2_1.3-1 as appropriate.
without release On and Test Mode ON for SA or (EN-DC, DC bearer MCG and SCG, Connected without release
On for NSA according to TS 38.508-1 [6] clause 4.5. Message contents are defined in clause 6.4.3.2_1.4.3.
6.4.3.2_1.4.2 Test procedure
1. Set the parameters of bandwidth, reference channel, the propagation condition, antenna configuration, antenna
correlation, Codebook configuration, Beamforming Model, RI configuration and SNR according to Table
6.4.3.2_1.3-1 as appropriate.
UE reported CQI (wideband CQI), PMI and fixed RI as defined in Table 6.4.3.2_1.3-1. The SS sends downlink
MAC padding bits on the DL RMC. The SS sends uplink scheduling information via PDCCH DCI format [1_1].
Measure the t fix according to Annex.
4. The SS sends uplink scheduling information via PDCCH DCI format [1_1].
ETSI
5. The SS shall transmit an RRC Connection Reconfiguration message to set codebookSubsetRestriction as for UE
reported RI according to Table 6.4.3.2_1.3-1.
6. The UE shall transmit RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete message.
7. Propagation conditions are set according to Table 6.4.3.2_1.3-1.
UE reported CQI (wideband CQI), PMI and RI. The SS sends downlink MAC padding bits on the DL RMC. The
SS sends uplink scheduling information via PDCCH DCI format [1_1]. Measure t reported according to Annex
TBD
If the ratio ( t reported / t fix ) satisfies the requirement in Table 6.4.3.2_1.5-1, then pass the UE for this test and go
to step 9. Otherwise, declare a FAIL verdict.
9. If all tests have not been done, then repeat the same procedure (steps 1 to 8) with test conditions according to the
Table 6.4.3.2_1.3-2 for the other Tests as appropriate. Otherwise, declare a PASS verdict.
6.4.3.2_1.4.3 Message Contents
Message contents are according to TS 38.508-1 [6] clause 4.6 with the following exceptions:
TBD
6.4.3.2_1.5 Test Requirements
Table 6.4.3.2_1.5-1: Test Requirement (TDD)

Test 1 Test 2 Test 3 Test 4
γ1 N/A [1.05] [0.9] N/A
γ2 TBD N/A N/A TBD
7 Demodulation performance requirements (Radiated

requirements)
7.1 General
For conformance testing involving FR2 test cases in this specification, the UE under test shall disable UL Tx diversity
schemes.
7.1.1.1 General
The minimum performance requirements are applicable to the FR2 operating bands defined in TS 38.101-2 [3] with
FDL_high not exceeding 40000 MHz.
The minimum performance requirements in Clause 7 are mandatary for UE supporting NR operation, except test cases
listed in Clause 7.1.1.3.
7.1.1.2 Applicability of requirements for different number of RX antenna ports

UE shall support 2 RX ports for different RF operating bands. The UE requirements applicability is defined in Table
7.1.1.2-1.
ETSI
Table 7.1.1.2-1: Requirements applicability

Supported RX Test type Test list
antenna ports
UE supports 2RX PDSCH All tests in Clause 7.2.2
antenna ports PDCCH All tests in Clause 7.3.2
PBCH All tests in Clause 7.4.2
7.1.1.3 Applicability of requirements for optional UE capabilities

For UE which supports optional UE capabilities the additional performance requirements from Table 7.1.1.3-1 should
be applied.
Table 7.1.1.3-1: Requirements applicability for optional UE capabilities

UE feature/capability Test type Test list Applicability notes
[Enhanced Type X receiver] FR2 TDD PDSCH 7.2.2.2.1 Minimum
Mapping Type-A (Test 3-
1)
7.2 PDSCH demodulation requirements

The parameters specified in Table 7.2-1 are valid for all PDSCH demodulation tests unless otherwise stated.
ETSI
Table 7.2-1: Common Test Parameters
ETSI

Transmission
PDSCH transmission scheme
scheme 1
PTRS epre-Ratio 0
Offset between Point A and the
Actual carrier lowest usable subcarrier on this RBs 0
configuration carrier (Note 2)
RB offset RBs 0
Maximum
transmission
bandwidth
DL BWP
configuration as
configuration
specified in TS
#1 Number of contiguous PRB PRBs
38.101-2 [7,
Section 5.3.2] for
tested channel
bandwidth and
subcarrier spacing
Physical Cell ID 0
Common SSB position in burst 1
serving cell SSB periodicity ms 20
parameters First DMRS position for Type A
2
PDSCH mapping
Symbols with PDCCH 0
Table 7.2-2 for
tested channel
Number of PRBs in CORESET
bandwidth and
PDCCH
subcarrier spacing
configuration
Number of PDCCH candidates and
1/8
aggregation levels
DCI format 1_1
First subcarrier index in the PRB 0 for CSI-RS
used for CSI-RS (k0) resource 1,2,3,4
6 for CSI-RS
resource 1 and 3
10 for CSI-RS
for CSI-RS (l0)
resource 2 and 4
1 for CSI-RS
Number of CSI-RS ports (X)
resource 1,2,3,4
CSI-RS for ‘No CDM’ for CSI-
tracking CDM Type RS resource
1,2,3,4
3 for CSI-RS
Density (ρ)
resource 1,2,3,4
60 kHz SCS: 80 for
CSI-RS resource
1,2,3,4
120 kHz SCS: 160
for CSI-RS
resource 1,2,3,4
ETSI
60 kHz SCS:
40 for CSI-RS
resource 1 and 2
41 for CSI-RS
resource 3 and 4
CSI-RS offset Slots
120 kHz SCS:
80 for CSI-RS
resource 1 and 2
81 for CSI-RS
resource 3 and 4
Start PRB 0
BWP size
0
12
for CSI-RS (l0)
CDM Type FD-CDM2
NZP CSI-RS
Density (ρ) 1
for CSI
60 kHz SCS: 80
acquisition CSI-RS periodicity Slots
120 kHz SCS: 160
CSI-RS offset 0
Start PRB 0
BWP size
4
12
for CSI-RS (l0)
CDM Type FD-CDM2
ZP CSI-RS for
Density (ρ) 1
CSI acquisition
60 kHz SCS: 80
120 kHz SCS: 160
CSI-RS offset 0
Start PRB 0
BWP size
First subcarrier index in the PRB k0=0 for CSI-RS
used for CSI-RS resource 1,2
l0 = 8 for CSI-RS
First OFDM symbol in the PRB used resource 1
for CSI-RS l0 = 9 for CSI-RS
resource 2
1 for CSI-RS
resource 1,2
‘No CDM’ for CSI-
CDM Type
CSI-RS for RS resource 1,2
beam 3 for CSI-RS
Density (ρ)
refinement resource 1,2
60 kHz SCS: 80 for
CSI-RS resource
1,2
120 kHz SCS: 160
for CSI-RS
resource 1,2
0 for CSI-RS
CSI-RS offset Slots
resource 1,2
ETSI
{1000} for Rank 1

tests
Antenna ports indexes {1000, 1001} for
PDSCH DMRS
Rank 2 tests
configuration
1
QCL
TCI state #0
QCL
information QCL Type Type D
CSI-RS resource 1
Type 1
from ‘CSI-RS for
QCL CSI-RS resource
tracking’
information
configuration
QCL Type Type A
TCI state #1
CSI-RS resource 1
Type 2
from ‘CSI-RS for
QCL CSI-RS resource
tracking’
information
configuration
QCL Type Type D
PTRS Frequency density (KPT-RS) 2
configuration Time density (LPT-RS) 1
Maximum number of code block groups for ACK/NACK
1
feedback
SP Type I, Random
Precoding configuration per slot with PRB
OCNG in Annex
Symbols for all unused Res
A.5
Note 1: UE assumes that the TCI state for the PDSCH is identical to the TCI state
applied for the PDCCH transmission.
Note 2: Point A coincides with minimum guard band as specified in Table 5.3.3-1
from 38.101-2 [7] for tested channel bandwidth and subcarrier spacing.
Table 7.2-2: Number of PRBs in CORESET
SCS (kHz) 50 MHz 100 MHz 200 MHz 400 MHz

60 66 132 264 N.A
120 30 66 132 264
ETSI
7.2.2.1 FDD (Void)
7.2.2.2 TDD
7.2.2.2.1_0 Minimum conformance requirements
For PDSCH Type-A scheduling, the requirements are specified in Table 7.2.2.2.1_0-3, 7.2.2.2.1_0-4 and 7.2.2.2.1_0-5,
with the addition of the parameters in Table 7.2.2.2.1_0-2 and the downlink physical channel setup according to Annex
C.5.1. The purpose is to verify the performance of PDSCH Type-A scheduling.
The test purposes are specified in Table 7.2.2.2.1_0-1.
Table 7.2.2.2.1_0-1: Tests purpose
Purpose Test index

Verify the PDSCH mapping Type A normal performance 1-1, 1-3, 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, 2-4, 2-5, 2-6
with 2 MIMO layers.
ETSI
Table 7.2.2.2.1_0-2: Test Parameters

Duplex mode TDD
For Test 1-1 and 1-
2:
First OFDM symbol in the PRB 3 for CSI-RS
used for CSI-RS (l0) resource 1 and 3
7 for CSI-RS
CSI-RS for tracking resource 2 and 4
For Test 1-2:
82 for CSI-RS
CSI-RS offset Slots resource 1 and 2
83 for CSI-RS
resource 3 and 4
Mapping type Type A
k0 0
As defined in Annex
Length (L)
A.1.3
PDSCH configuration PRB bundling type Static
WB for 1-1,
PRB bundling size
2 for other tests
VRB-to-PRB mapping
N/A
interleaver bundle size
DMRS Type Type 1
Single-symbol DM-
Length
RS
PDSCH DMRS
{1000} for Rank1
configuration
Antenna ports indexes {1000,1001} for
Rank2
1
8 for Test 1-1, 1-3,
2-2, 2-4
Number of HARQ Processes 10 for Test 2-1, 2-3,
2-5, 2-6, 3-1
16 for Test 1-2
K1 value As defined in Annex
(PDSCH-to-HARQ-timing-indicator) A.1.3
Table 7.2.2.2.1_0-3: Minimum performance for Rank 1 (FRC)
Reference value
Correlation
Bandwidth Modulation TDD UL- Fraction of
(MHz)/Subcarrier and code DL maximum SNRBB
spacing (kHz) rate pattern throughput (dB)
configuration
(%)
R.PDSCH.5- FR2.120-
1-1 100/120 QPSK, 0.30 TDLC60-300 2x2 ULA Low 70 -0.4
1.1TDD 1.1
1-2 100/120 TDLA30-300 2x2 ULA Low 30 1.7
2.1TDD 0.48 1
R.PDSCH.5- 64QAM, FR2.120- 2x2 XPL Med-
1-3 100/120 TDLA30-300 70 12.4
3.1TDD 0.45 1 A
ETSI
Table 7.2.2.2.1_0-4: Minimum performance for Rank 2 (FRC)
Reference value
Correlation
Bandwidth Fraction
Test Modulatio TDD Propagatio matrix and
Reference (MHz)/Subca
num n and UL-DL n antenna of
channel rrier spacing SNRBB
. code rate pattern condition configuratio maximum
(kHz) (dB)
n throughp
ut (%)
R.PDSCH. QPSK, FR2.12 2x2 ULA
2-1 100/120 TDLA30-75 70 4.1
5-4.1TDD 0.30 0-2 Low
R.PDSCH. 16QAM, FR2.12 TDLA30- 2x2 ULA
2-2 100/120 70 14.4
5-2.2TDD 0.48 0-1 300 Low
R.PDSCH. 16QAM,0.4 FR2.12 2x2 ULA
2-3 50/120 TDLA30-75 70 14.0
5-5.2TDD 8 0-2 Low
2-4 200/120 70 14.2
5-2.3TDD 0.48 0-1 300 Low
R.PDSCH. 16QAM, FR2.60- 2x2 ULA
2-5 50/60 TDLA30-75 70 14.3
4-1.1TDD 0.48 1 Low
R.PDSCH. 64QAM, FR2.12 2x2 ULA
2-6 100/120 TBD 70 18.6
5-6.1TDD 0.43 0-2 Low
Table 7.2.2.2.1_0-5: Minimum performance for Rank 2 (FRC) for Enhanced Type X Receiver
Reference value
Correlation
Bandwidth Fraction
Test Modulatio TDD matrix and
Reference (MHz)/Subcarri Propagatio of
num n and UL-DL antenna SNRB
channel er spacing n condition maximum
. code rate pattern configuratio B (dB)
(kHz) throughp
n
ut (%)
3-1 100/120 TDLA30-75 70 19.0
5-5.1TDD 0.48 -2 Med
receiver for SA and NSA
Editor's Note: This clause is incomplete. The following aspects are either missing or not yet determined:
- Method for setting up UE in Rx beam peak direction is TBD
- Minimum test time is TBD.
- message contents are TBD
Verify the PDSCH mapping Type A normal performance with different channel models, MCSs and number of MIMO
layers
ETSI
For EN-DC within FR2 operation, setup the LTE radiated link according to Annex D:
1. Connection between SS, the faders, AWGN noise source and the UE antenna is shown in TS 38.508-1 [TBD]
Annex [TBD], Figure [TBD].
2. The parameter settings for the NR cell are set up according to Table 7.2-1 and Table 7.2.2.2.1.0-2 and as
appropriate.
3. Downlink signals for NR cell are initially set up according to Annexes C.0, C.1, C.2, C.3.1, and uplink signals
4. Propagation conditions for NR cell are set according to Annex B.0.
Connected without release On, Test Mode On or (EN-DC, DC bearer MCG and SCG), Connected without
release On) for NSA according to TS 38.508-1 [6] clause 4.5. Message content are defined in clause
7.2.2.2.1.4.3.
1. Set the UE in the Rx beam peak direction using method described in Annex [TBD].
2. Configure UE for SS-RSRB reporting.
3. Ensure channel between SS and UE is conducive for UE to start decoding a rank 2 MCS using procedure
specified in stage 2 of Annex Y.
7.2.2.2.1_1.3-3 and 7.2.2.2.1_1.3-4. The SS sends downlink MAC padding bits on the DL RMC.
to schedule the UL RMC according to Table 7.2.2.2.1_1.3-3 and 7.2.2.2.1_1.3-4. Since the UL has no payload
and no loopback data to send the UE sends uplink MAC padding bits on the UL RMC.
and the SNR according to Tables 7.2.2.2.1_1.4.4-1 as appropriate.
TBD clause TBD. Count the number of NACKs, ACKs and statDTXs on the UL during each subtest and decide
pass or fail according to Tables TBD and TBD in Annex TBD clause TBD.
8. Repeat steps from 1 to 7 for each subtest in Table 7.2.2.2.1_1.4.4-1 and Table 7.2.2.2.1_1.4.4-2 as appropriate.
Message contents are according to TS 38.508-1 [6] subclause 4.6.1 with the following exceptions:
ETSI
FFS
FFS
Table 7.2.2.2.1-2 defines the primary level settings.
A.3.2 for each throughput test shall meet or exceed the specified value in Table 7.2.2.2.1_1.4-1 and Table 7.2.2.21_1.4-
2 for the specified SNR including test tolerances for all throughput tests.
Table 7.2.2.2.1_1.4-1: Test Requirement for Rank 1 (FRC)
Reference value
Correlation
Bandwidth Modulation TDD UL- Fraction of
(MHz)/Subcarrier and code DL maximum SNRBB
spacing (kHz) rate pattern throughput (dB)
configuration
(%)
R.PDSCH.5- FR2.120- -0.4 +
1-1 100/120 QPSK, 0.30 TDLC60-300 2x2 ULA Low 70
1.1TDD 1.1 TT
R.PDSCH.5- 16QAM, FR2.120- 1.7 +
1-2 100/120 TDLA30-300 2x2 ULA Low 30
2.1TDD 0.48 1 TT
R.PDSCH.5- 64QAM, FR2.120- 2x2 XPL Med- 12.4 +
1-3 100/120 TDLA30-300 70
3.1TDD 0.45 1 A TT
Table 7.2.2.2.1_1.4-2: Test Requirement for Rank 2 (FRC)
Reference value
Correlation
Bandwidth
Test Modulatio TDD Propagatio matrix and Fraction
Reference (MHz)/Subca
num n and UL-DL n antenna of
channel rrier spacing SNRBB
. code rate pattern condition configuratio maximum
(kHz) (dB)
n throughp
ut (%)
R.PDSCH. QPSK, FR2.12 2x2 ULA
2-1 100/120 TDLA30-75 70 4.1+TT
5-4.1TDD 0.30 0-2 Low
2-2 100/120 70 14.4+TT
5-2.2TDD 0.48 0-1 300 Low
R.PDSCH. 16QAM,0.4 FR2.12 2x2 ULA
2-3 50/120 TDLA30-75 70 14.0+TT
5-5.2TDD 8 0-2 Low
2-4 200/120 70 14.2+TT
5-2.3TDD 0.48 0-1 300 Low
R.PDSCH. 16QAM, FR2.60- 2x2 ULA
2-5 50/60 TDLA30-75 70 14.3+TT
4-1.1TDD 0.48 1 Low
2-6 100/120 TBD 70 18.6+TT
5-6.1TDD 0.43 0-2 Low
7.2.2.2.1_2 2Rx TDD FR2 PDSCH mapping Type A performance - 2x2 MIMO with enhanced type
X receiver for SA and NSA
ETSI
- Min test time is TBD
Verify the PDSCH mapping Type A normal performance with different channel models, MCSs and number of MIMO
layers
type X.
Same test description as in clause 7.2.2.2.1_1.4 with following exception:
- Table 7.2.2.2.1_2.5-1 instead of Table 7.2.2.2.1_1.5-1
A TBD for each throughput test shall meet or exceed the specified value in Table 7.2.2.2.1_2.4-1 for the specified SNR
Table 7.2.2.2.1_2.4-1: Test Requirement for Rank 2 (FRC) for Enhanced Type X Receiver
Reference value
Correlation
Bandwidth Fraction
Test Modulatio TDD Propagatio matrix and
Reference (MHz)/Subcarri of
num n and UL-DL n antenna SNRBB
channel er spacing maximum
. code rate pattern condition configuratio (dB)
(kHz) throughp
n
ut (%)
R.PDSCH. 16QAM, FR2.12 2x2 ULA 19.0+T
3-1 100/120 TDLA30-75 70
5-5.1TDD 0.48 0-2 Med T
7.3 PDCCH demodulation requirements

The receiver characteristics of the PDCCH are determined by the probability of miss-detection of the Downlink
Scheduling Grant (Pm-dsg).
The parameters specified in Table 7.3-1 are valid for all PDCCH tests unless otherwise stated.
ETSI
Table 7.3-1: Common test Parameters
ETSI

DL BWP
configuration #1
serving cell SSB position in burst 1
PDCCH
Number of PDCCH candidates 1
configuration
0
CSI-RS resource 1:
4
CSI-RS resource 2:
4
CSI-RS resource 4:
8
CSI-RS for Number of CSI-RS ports (X) 1
tracking CDM Type No CDM
Density (ρ) 3
CSI-RS periodicity Slots 160
80 for CSI-RS
resource 1 and 2
CSI-RS offset Slots
81 for CSI-RS
resource 3 and 4
Start PRB 0
BWP size
0
CSI-RS resource 1:
9
NZP CSI-RS for
CDM Type No CDM
beam
Density (ρ) 3
management
120 kHz SCS: 160
CSI-RS periodicity Slots for CSI-RS resource
1,2
0 for CSI-RS
CSI-RS offset Slots
resource 1,2
Repetition ON
SP Type I, Random
per slot with REG
Precoding configuration bundling granularity
for number of Tx
larger than 1
TCI state #0
CSI-RS resource 1
from ‘CSI-RS for
tracking’
information
configuration
QCL Type Type A
TCI state #1
CSI-RS resource 1
from ‘CSI-RS for
tracking’
information
configuration
QCL Type Type D
Symbols for all unused REs OCNG in Annex A.5
ETSI

(Void)
7.3.2.1 FDD
(Void)
7.3.2.2 TDD
Table 7.3.2.2.1.3-1.
7.3.2.2.1.2 Test Applicability
C.5.1.
ETSI
Table 7.3.2.2.1.3-1: Test Parameters

CCE to REG mapping type Interleaved
2 for test 1-1
REG bundle size 2
6 for test 1-2
3 for test 1-1
Interleaver size 3
2 for test 1-2
Shift index 0
Table 7.3.2.2.1.3-2: Minimum performance requirements with 120 kHz SCS for 1Tx antenna
CORES
Test CORE Aggreg configurati
Bandwid ET Propagation Pm-
numb SET ation Reference Channel on and SNRBB
th duratio Condition dsg
er RB level correlation (dB)
n (%)
Matrix
1-1 100 MHz 60 1 2 CCE R.PDCCH.5-1.1 TDD TDLA30-75 1x2 Low 1 6.0
1-2 100 MHz 60 1 4 CCE R.PDCCH.5-1.2 TDD TDLA30-300 1x2 Low 1 2.6
7.3.2.2.1.4.1 Initial Conditions
Configurations of PDCCH before measurement are specified in Annex TBD.
1. Connect the SS, the faders and AWGN noise source to the UE antenna connectors as shown in TS 38.508-
1 [TBD] Annex A, in Figure TBD for TE diagram and clause TBD for UE diagram.
2. The parameter settings for the cell are set up according to Table 7.3-1 and Table 7.3.2.2.1.3-1as appropriate.
(EN-DC, DC bearer MCG and SCG, Connected without Release On) for NSA according to TS 38.508-1 [TBD]
clause 4.5. Message content are defined in clause 7.3.2.2.1.4.3.
2. Configure UE for SS-RSRB reporting
ETSI
3. SS transmits PDCCH with DCI format [1_1] for C_RNTI to transmit the DL RMC according to Table
7.3.2.2.1.4.4-1. The details of PDCCH are specified in Table [ ] respectively. The SS sends downlink MAC
according to Table 7.3.2.2.1.4.4-1 as appropriate.
5. Measure the Pm-dsg for a duration sufficient to achieve statistical significance according to Annex [G] clause
[G.4]. Count the number of NACKs, ACKs and statDTXs on the UL PUCCH during each subtest interval. Pm-
7.3.2.2.1.4.4-1, pass the UE. Otherwise fail the UE.
6. Repeat steps from 1 to 5 for each subtest in Table 7.3.2.2.1.4.4-1 as appropriate.
Table 7.3.2.2.1.4.3.1: message exceptions for SA
FFS
Table 7.3.2.2.1.4.3.2: message exceptions for NSA
FFS
For the parameters specified in Table 7.3.2.2.1.3-1 the average probability of a missed downlink scheduling grant (Pm-
dsg) shall be below the specified value in Table 7.3.2.2.1.4.4-1.
Table 7.3.2.2.1.4.4-1: Test requirements with 120 kHz SCS for 1Tx antenna
CORES
Test COR Aggreg configurati
ET Propagation Pm-
numb Bandwidth ESE ation Reference Channel on and SNRBB
duratio Condition dsg
er T RB level correlation (dB)
n (%)
Matrix
1-1 100 MHz 60 1 2 CCE R.PDCCH.5-1.1 TDD TDLA30-75 1x2 Low 1 6 + TT
1-2 100 MHz 60 1 4 CCE R.PDCCH.5-1.2 TDD TDLA30-300 1x2 Low 1 2.6 + TT
ETSI
This test verifies the demodulation performance of PDCCH for two-antenna port with a given SNR for which the
Table 7.3.2.2.2.3-1.
7.3.2.2.2.2 Test Applicability
For the parameters specified in Table 7.3.2.2.2.3-1, the average probability of a missed downlink scheduling grant (Pm-
dsg) shall be below the specified value in Table 7.3.2.2.2.3-1. The downlink physical setup is in accordance with Annex
C.5.1.
Table 7.3.2.2.2.3-1: Test Parameters

CCE to REG mapping type Interleaved
2 for test 1-1
REG bundle size 2
6 for test 1-2
3 for test 1-1
Interleaver size 3
2 for test 1-2
Shift index 0
Table 7.3.2.2.2.3-1: Minimum performance requirements with 120 kHz SCS for 2Tx Antenna
Antenna Reference
CORE
Test CORE Aggreg configurati value
Bandwidt SET Propagation
num SET ation Reference Channel on and Pm-
h durati Condition SNRBB
ber RB level correlation dsg
on (dB)
Matrix (%)
2-1 100 MHz 60 1 8 CCE R.PDCCH.5-1.3 TDD TDLA30-75 2x2 Low 1 -0. 4
2-2 100 MHz 60 2 16 CCE R.PDCCH.5-2.1 TDD TDLA30-75 2x2 Low 1 -3. 4
The normative reference for this requirement is TS 38.101-4 [TBD] clause 7.3.2.2.2.
7.3.2.2.2.4.1 Initial Conditions
Configurations of PDCCH before measurement are specified in Annex TBD.
ETSI
1. Connect the SS, the faders and AWGN noise source to the UE antenna connectors as shown in TS 38.508-
1 [TBD] Annex A, in Figure TBD for TE diagram and clause TBD for UE diagram.
2. The parameter settings for the cell are set up according to Table 7.3-1 and Table 7.3.2.2.2.3-1as appropriate.
(EN-DC, DC bearer MCG and SCG, Connected without Release On) for NSA according to TS 38.508-1 [TBD]
clause 4.5. Message content are defined in clause 7.3.2.2.1.4.3.
2. Configure UE for SS-RSRB reporting
3. SS transmits PDCCH with DCI format [1_1] for C_RNTI to transmit the DL RMC according to Table
7.3.2.2.2.4.4-1. The details of PDCCH are specified in Table [ ] respectively. The SS sends downlink MAC
according to Table 7.3.2.2.2.4.4-1 as appropriate.
5. Measure the Pm-dsg for a duration sufficient to achieve statistical significance according to Annex [G] clause
[G.4]. Count the number of NACKs, ACKs and statDTXs on the UL PUCCH during each subtest interval. Pm-
7.3.2.2.2.4.4-1, pass the UE. Otherwise fail the UE.
6. Repeat steps from 1 to 5 for each subtest in Table 7.3.2.2.2.4.4-1 as appropriate.
Table 7.3.2.2.2.4.3.1: message exceptions for SA
FFS
Table 7.3.2.2.2.4.3.2: message exceptions for NSA
FFS
For the parameters specified in Table 7.3.2.2.2.3-1 the average probability of a missed downlink scheduling grant (Pm-
dsg) shall be below the specified value in Table 7.3.2.2.2.4.4-1.
ETSI
Table 7.3.2.2.2.4.4-1: Test requirements with 120 kHz SCS

CORES
Bandwidt ET Aggregati Propagation
numb SET Reference Channel ion and Pm-dsg SNRBB
h duratio on level Condition
er RB correlatio (%) (dB)
n
n Matrix
2-1 100 MHz 60 1 8 CCE R.PDCCH.5-1.3 TDD TDLA30-75 2x2 Low 1 -0.4 +
TT
2-2 100 MHz 60 2 16 CCE R.PDCCH.5-2.1 TDD TDLA30-75 2x2 Low 1 -3.4 +
TT
7.4 PBCH demodulation requirements

RAN4 will specify the PBCH performance requirements and has recommended that these requirements do not need to
be tested.
7.5 Sustained downlink data rate provided by lower layers
8 CSI reporting requirements (Radiated requirements)
8.1 General
schemes.

FFS
8.1.2 Common test parameters

Parameters specified in Table 8.1.2-1 are applied for all test cases in this section unless otherwise stated.
Table 8.1.2-1: Test parameters for CSI test cases

Transmission
PDSCH transmission scheme
scheme 1
Duplex Mode TDD
PTRS epre-Ratio 0
ETSI
Offset between Point A and the

Actual carrier lowest usable subcarrier on this RBs 0
configuration carrier (Note 3)
RB offset RBs 0
Maximum
transmission
bandwidth
DL BWP
configuration as
configuration
specified in TS
#1 Number of contiguous PRB PRBs
38.101-2 [7, Section
5.3.2] for tested
channel bandwidth
and subcarrier
spacing
serving cell SSB position in burst First SSB in Slot #0
Symbols with PDCCH 0,1
PDCCH Number of PDCCH candidates
1/[8]
configuration and aggregation levels
DCI format 1_1
Mapping type Type A
k0 0
Length (L) 12
PDSCH
configuration
PRB bundling size 2
Resource allocation type 0
VRB-to-PRB mapping interleaver
N/A
bundle size
DMRS Type Type 1
{1000} for Rank1
DMRS ports indexes {1000,1001} for
PDSCH DMRS
Rank2
configuration
Single-symbol DM-
Length
RS
2
PTRS Frequency density (KPT-RS) 2
configuration Time density (LPT-RS) 1
0
4
used for CSI-RS (l0)
CDM Type No CDM
Density (ρ) 3
CSI-RS periodicity slot 120kHz SCS: 160
CSI-RS for
tracking 120 kHz SCS:
80 for CSI-RS
CSI-RS offset slot resource 1 and 2
81 for CSI-RS
resource 3 and 4
Start PRB 0
BWP size
ETSI
Start PRB 0
NZP CSI-RS
for CSI
BWP size
acquisition
Start PRB 0
ZP CSI-RS for
CSI acquisition
BWP size
First subcarrier index in the PRB k0=0 for CSI-RS
used for CSI-RS resource 1,2
l0 = 8 for CSI-RS
First OFDM symbol in the PRB resource 1
used for CSI-RS l0 = 9 for CSI-RS
resource 2
1 for CSI-RS
resource 1,2
CSI-RS for ‘No CDM’ for CSI-RS
CDM Type
beam resource 1,2
refinement 3 for CSI-RS
Density (ρ)
resource 1,2
120 kHz SCS: 160
CSI-RS periodicity Slots for CSI-RS resource
1,2
0 for CSI-RS
CSI-RS offset Slots
resource 1,2
Repetition ON
QCL
TCI state #0
QCL
CSI-RS resource 1
Type 1
from ‘CSI-RS for
QCL CSI-RS resource
tracking’
information
configuration
QCL Type Type A
TCI state #1
CSI-RS resource 1
Type 2
from ‘CSI-RS for
QCL CSI-RS resource
tracking’
information
configuration
QCL Type Type D
For FR2.120-1:
3 if mod (i.5) = 0,
6 if mod(i,5) = 2
For FR2.120-2:
K1 value 11 if mod(i,8) = 0,
(PDSCH-to-HARQ-timing-indicator) 7]if mod(i,8) = 4,
6]if mod(i,8) = 5,
where i is slot index
per radio fame with
values 0-79.
OCNG as specified
Symbols for unused Res
in A.5
Note 1: PDSCH is not scheduled on slots containing CSI-RS or slots which are not
full DL.
Note 2: UE assumes that the TCI state for the PDSCH is identical to the TCI state
applied for the PDCCH transmission.
Note 3: Point A coincides with minimum guard band as specified in Table 5.3.3-1
from 38.101-2 [7] for tested channel bandwidth and subcarrier spacing.
ETSI
8.2 Reporting of Channel Quality Indicator (CQI)

TBD
8.2.2.1 FDD
TBD
8.2.2.2 TDD
8.3 Reporting of Precoding Matrix Indicator (PMI)

8.3.2.1 FDD
TBD
8.3.2.2 TDD
8.4 Reporting of Rank Indicator (RI)

TBD
8.4.2.1 FDD
TBD
8.4.2.2 TDD
9 Demodulation performance requirements for

interworking
9.1 General
This clause covers the UE demodulation performance requirements for EN-DC, NE-DC, inter-band NR-DC between
FR1 and FR2, and inter-band NR CA between FR1 and FR2.
ETSI
schemes.

The following applicability rules are specified for demodulation performance requirements for interworking:
- For UEs supporting both SA and NSA,
- The performance requirements specified in Section 5 will be verified only for SA except for the sustained
downlink data rate test specified in Section 5.5 and 5.5A.
- The performance requirements specified in Section 7 will be verified only for SA except for the sustained
downlink data rate test specified in Section 7.5.- The sustained downlink data rate tests specified in Sections
5.5, 5.5A and 7.5 for SA and in Section 9.4B for NSA are verified separately.
- The FR1 EN-DC test cases with the NR TDD DL-UL configurations which are not aligned with LTE’s can be
tested on the corresponding EN-DC band combinations where UE supports simultaneous transmission and
reception.
9.2 Void
9.2A PDSCH Demodulation for CA

9.2A.1 NR CA between FR1 and FR2
FFS
9.2B PDSCH Demodulation for DC

9.2B.1 EN-DC
9.2B.1.1 EN-DC within FR1

The NR PDSCH demodulation performance requirements and test case details for this test case are specified in Section
5.2.
During the test, only the PDSCH performance on the NR cell(s) shall be verified
9.2B.1.2 EN-DC including FR2 NR carrier only

The NR PDSCH demodulation performance requirements and test case details for this test case are specified in Section
7.2.
During the test, only the PDSCH performance on the NR cell(s) on FR2 carriers shall be verified.
9.2B.1.3 EN-DC including FR1 and FR2 NR carriers

The demodulation performance requirements are verified according to Section 9.2B.1.1 for EN-DC with FR1 NR
carrier only and Section 9.2B.1.2 for EN-DC with FR2 NR carrier only.
During the test for EN-DC with FR2 NR carriers, only demodulation performance requirements on the FR2 carriers are
verified.
No demodulation requirement for FR1 NR or LTE carriers is specified for EN-DC including FR2 carrier(s).
ETSI
9.2B.2 NR DC between FR1 and FR2

FFS
9.3 Void
9.3A PDCCH Demodulation for CA

9.3A.1 NR CA between FR1 and FR2
FFS
9.3B PDCCH Demodulation for DC

9.3B.1 EN-DC

The NR PDCCH demodulation performance requirements and test case details for this test case are specified in Section
5.3.
During the test, only the PDCCH performance on the single NR cell shall be verified.
9.3B.1.2 EN-DC including FR2 NR carrier only

The NR PDCCH demodulation performance requirements and test case details for this test case are specified in Section
7.3.
During the test, only the PDCCH performance on the single NR cell shall be verified.

The demodulation performance requirements are verified according to Section 9.3B.1.1 for EN-DC with FR1 NR
carrier only and Section 9.3B.1.2 for EN-DC with FR2 NR carrier only.
During the test for EN-DC with FR2 NR carriers, only demodulation performance requirements on the FR2 carriers are
verified.
No demodulation requirement for FR1 NR or LTE carriers is specified for EN-DC including FR2 carrier(s).

FFS
9.4 Void
9.4A SDR test for CA

FFS
ETSI
9.4B SDR test for DC

9.4B.1 EN-DC
9.4B.1.1 Sustained downlink data rate performance for EN-DC within FR1
- Test Procedure to calculate PDCP SDU success rate is FFS
9.4B.1.1.1 Test Purpose
The purpose of the test is to verify that the Layer 1 and Layer 2 correctly process in a sustained manner the received
packets corresponding to the maximum data rate indicated by UE capabilities. The sustained downlink data rate shall be
verified in terms of the success rate of delivered PDCP SDU(s) by Layer 2. The test case below specifies the RF
conditions and the required success rate of delivered TB by Layer 1 to meet the sustained data rate requirement
9.4B.1.1.2 Test Applicability
This test applies to all types of EUTRA UE release 15 and forward supporting EN-DC.
9.4B.1.1.3 Minimum conformance requirements
During the test, the PDSCH performance on both the NR cell(s) and LTE cell(s) shall be verified.
The TB success rate shall be higher than 85% when NR PDSCH is scheduled with MCS defined for the selected EN-
DC bandwidth combination and with the downlink physical channel setup according to Annex C.3.1 and when E-
UTRA PDSCH is scheduled with FRC defined for the selected EN-DC bandwidth combination and with the downlink
physical channel setup according to Annex C.3.2 from TS 36.101 [X].
The TB success rate is defined as 100%*NDL_correct_rx / (NDL_newtx + NDL_retx), where NDL_newtx is the number of newly
transmitted DL transport blocks, NDL_retx is the number of retransmitted DL transport blocks, and NDL_correct_rx is the
number of correctly received DL transport blocks.
The common test parameters for NR cell are specified in Table 9.4B.1.1.3-1. The parameters specified in Table
9.4B.1.1.3-2 are applicable for tests on FDD NR cell and parameters specified in Table 9.4B.1.1.3-3 are applicable for
tests on TDD NR cell.
Unless otherwise stated, no user data is scheduled on slot #0, 10 and 11 within 20 ms for SCS 15 kHz for NR cell.
Unless otherwise stated, no user data is scheduled on slot #0, 20 and 21 within 20 ms for SCS 30 kHz for NR cell.
ETSI
Table 9.4B.1.1.3-1: Common test parameters for FDD or TDD NR band
ETSI

Channel bandwidth MHz Channel bandwidth
Physical Cell ID 0
Common serving
cell parameters
2
mapping
configuration
RB offset RBs 0
DL BWP Number of contiguous PRB 38.101-1 [6, Section 5.3.2] for tested
configuration #1 channel bandwidth and subcarrier
spacing
Symbols with PDCCH Symbols #0
Number of PRBs in CORESET Table 5.5A-4
PDCCH 1/AL 1 for 30 kHz / 5 MHz

configuration Number of PDCCH candidates and 1/AL4 for 15 kHz / 5 MHz, 30 kHz / 10
aggregation levels MHz and 30 kHz / 15 MHz
1/AL 8 for other combinations
DCI format 1_1
TCI State TCI state #1
Mapping type Type A
k0 0
PDSCH
PRB bundling size WB
configuration
N/A
size
DMRS Type Type 1
Length 1
PDSCH DMRS {1000} for 1 Layer CCs
configuration Antenna ports indexes {1000, 1001} for 2 Layers CCs
{1000 – 1003} for 4 Layers CCs
Number of PDSCH DMRS CDM group(s) 1 for 1 layer and 2 layers CCs
without data 2 for 4 Layers CCs
k0 = 3 for CSI-RS resource 1,2,3,4
CSI-RS
OFDM symbols in the PRB used for CSI- l0 = 6 for CSI-RS resource 1 and 3
RS l0 = 10 for CSI-RS resource 2 and 4
CSI-RS for tracking CDM Type ‘No CDM’ for CSI-RS resource 1,2,3,4
1,2,3,4
1,2,3,4
ETSI
15 kHz SCS:
CSI-RS offset Slots
30 kHz SCS:
Start PRB 0
k0 = 4
CSI-RS
l0 = 12
RS
NZP CSI-RS for
Density (ρ) 1
CSI acquisition
15 kHz SCS: 20
CSI-RS periodicity
30 kHz SCS: 40
CSI-RS offset 0
Start PRB 0
k0 = 0
CSI-RS
l0 = 12
RS
ZP CSI-RS for CSI CDM Type ‘FD-CDM2’
acquisition Density (ρ) 1
15 kHz SCS: 20
CSI-RS periodicity
30 kHz SCS: 40
CSI-RS offset 0
Start PRB 0
TCI state #0
information
QCL Type Type A
TCI state #1
TCI state #0
information
information
Symbols for all unused Res OCNG Annex A.5
1 layer CCs 1x2 or 1x4
Antenna
2 layers CCs 2x2 or 2x4
configuration
4 layers CCs 4x4
transmission
channel bandwidth and subcarrier spacing
ETSI
Table 9.4B.1.1.3-2: Additional test parameters for NR FDD band

Duplex mode FDD
K1 value 2
Table 9.4B.1.1.3-3: Additional test parameters for NR TDD band

Duplex mode TDD
K1 value Specific to each UL-DL pattern
TDD UL-DL pattern
Note 1: PDSCH is scheduled only on full DL slots
Table 9.4B.1.1.3-4: Number of PRBs in CORESET for NR cell
SCS 100
(kHz) MHz
15 24 48 78 102 132 156 216 270 N/A N/A N/A
30 6 24 36 48 60 78 102 132 162 216 270
ETSI
Table 9.4B.1.1.3-5: MCS indexes for indicated UE capabilities for NR cell

Maximum number of Maximum Scaling MCS
PDSCH MIMO layers modulation format factor
1 8 1 26
1 8 0.8 21
1 8 0.75 20
1 8 0.4 11
1 6 1 27
1 6 0.8 23
1 6 0.75 22
1 6 0.4 14
1 4 1 16
1 4 0.8 16
1 4 0.75 16
1 4 0.4 10
1 2 1 9
1 2 0.8 9
1 2 0.75 9
1 2 0.4 4
2 8 1 26
2 8 0.8 21
2 8 0.75 20
2 8 0.4 11
2 6 1 27
2 6 0.8 23
2 6 0.75 22
2 6 0.4 14
2 4 1 16
2 4 0.8 16
2 4 0.75 16
2 4 0.4 10
2 2 1 9
2 2 0.8 9
2 2 0.75 9
2 2 0.4 4
4 8 1 26
4 8 0.8 23
4 8 0.75 22
4 8 0.4 12
4 6 1 27
4 6 0.8 24
4 6 0.75 23
4 6 0.4 14
4 4 1 16
4 4 0.8 16
4 4 0.75 16
4 4 0.4 11
4 2 1 9
4 2 0.8 9
4 2 0.75 9
4 2 0.4 5
ETSI
Table 9.4B.1.1.3-6: Additional test setup for E-UTRA CC

Inter-TTI Distance 1
Number of OFDM
symbols for PDCCH per OFDM symbols 1
component carrier
Ês at antenna port dBm/15kHz -85
2 layer CC 2x2 or 2x4
4 layer CC 4x4
Codebook subset 2 layer CC 10
restriction 4 layer CC 1000
Downlink power 2 layer CC ρ A = -3dB, ρ B = -3dB, σ = 0dB
allocation 4 layer CC ρ A = -6dB, ρ B = -6dB, σ = 3dB
Table 9.4B.1.1.3-7: E-UTRA FRC for SDR test (FDD)

Reference channel
MIMO layer Bandwidth
64QAM 256QAM 1024QAM
5 R.PDSCH.4-1.1 FDD R.PDSCH.4-3.1 FDD R.PDSCH.4-5.1 FDD
2 layer
4 layer
Table 9.4B.1.1.3-8: E-UTRA FRC for SDR test (TDD)

Reference channel
MIMO layer Bandwidth
64QAM 256QAM 1024QAM
10 R.PDSCH.6-1.1 TDD R.PDSCH.6-3.1 TDD R.PDSCH.6-5.1 TDD
2 layer 15 R.PDSCH.6-1.2 TDD R.PDSCH.6-3.2 TDD R.PDSCH.6-5.2 TDD
4 layer 15 R.PDSCH.6-2.2 TDD R.PDSCH.6-4.2 TDD R.PDSCH.6-6.2 TDD
9.4B.1.1.3.1 Procedure for test parameter selection
The test parameters are determined by the following procedure:
- Select one EN-DC bandwidth combination among all supported EN-DC configurations and set of per component
carrier (CC) UE capabilities among all supported UE capabilities that provides the largest data rate [TS 38.306
[14, Section 4.1.2]].
- Set of per NR CC UE capabilities include channel bandwidth, subcarrier spacing, number of PDSCH MIMO
layers, modulation format and scaling factor TS 38.306 [14] Section 4.1.2]].
- Set of per E-UTRA CC UE capabilities includes channel bandwidth, number of PDSCH MIMO layers and
modulation format [TS 38.306 [14] Section 4.1.2]].
- When there are multiple sets of EN-DC bandwidth combinations and UE capabilities with same largest data
rate, select one among sets with the smallest aggregated channel bandwidth.
ETSI
- For each NR FR1 CC in EN-DC bandwidth combination, use Table 9.4B.1.1.3-5 to determine MCS based on
test parameters and indicated UE capabilities.
- For each E-UTRA CC in EN-DC bandwidth combination, use Table 9.4B.1.1.3-7 and Table 9.4B.1.1.3-8 to
determine FRC based on test parameters and indicated UE capabilities.
Pasting relevant portion of max data rate equation from TS 38.306 [14] section 4.1
For NR, the approximate data rate for a given number of aggregated carriers in a band or band combination is computed
as follows.
BW ( j ), μ
⋅12
( )
J
 ( j)

N PRB
data rate (in Mbps) = 10 − 6 ⋅ v
 Layers
⋅ Q m( j ) ⋅ f ( j)
⋅ R max ⋅ μ
⋅ 1 − OH ( j )
j =1  Ts 
wherein
J is the number of aggregated component carriers in a band or band combination
Rmax = 948/1024
For the j-th CC,
v (Layers
j)
is the maximum number of supported layers given by higher layer parameter maxNumberMIMO-
LayersPDSCH for downlink and maximum of higher layer parameters maxNumberMIMO-LayersCB-PUSCH
and maxNumberMIMO-LayersNonCB-PUSCH for uplink.
Qm( j ) is the maximum supported modulation order given by higher layer parameter
supportedModulationOrderDL for downlink and higher layer parameter supportedModulationOrderUL for
uplink.
f ( j ) is the scaling factor given by higher layer parameter scalingFactor and can take the values 1, 0.8, 0.75,
and 0.4.
μ is the numerology (as defined in TS 38.211 [6])
10 −3
μ
Ts is the average OFDM symbol duration in a subframe for numerology μ , i.e. T sμ =
14 ⋅ 2 μ . Note that
normal cyclic prefix is assumed.
BW ( j ), μ ( j)
N PRB μ
is the maximum RB allocation in bandwidth BW with numerology , as defined in 5.3 TS
( j)
38.101-1 [2] and 5.3 TS 38.101-2 [3], where BW is the UE supported maximum bandwidth in the given
band or band combination.
OH ( j ) is the overhead and takes the following values
NOTE: Only one of the UL or SUL carriers (the one with the higher data rate) is counted for a cell operating
SUL.
For EUTRA in case of MR-DC, the approximate data rate for a given number of aggregated carriers in a band or band
combination is computed as follows.
10−3 ⋅  j =1TBS j
J
Data rate (in Mbps) =
ETSI
wherein
J is the number of aggregated EUTRA component carriers in MR-DC band combination
is the total maximum number of DL-SCH transport block bits received within a 1ms TTI for j-th CC, as
derived from TS36.213 [22] based on the UE supported maximum MIMO layers for the j-th carrier, and based
on the modulation order and number of PRBs based on the bandwidth of the j-th carrier.
The approximate maximum data rate can be computed as the maximum of the approximate data rates computed using
the above formula for each of the supported band or band combinations.
For MR-DC, the approximate maximum data rate is computed as the sum of the approximate maximum data rates from
NR and EUTRA
The normative reference for this requirement is TS 38.101-4 [5], clause 9.4B.1.1.
9.4B.1.1.4 Test description
9.4B.1.1.4.1 Initial conditions
carrier spacing based on NR and E-UTRA operating bands specified in Table 5.3.5-1 of TS 38.521-1.
Configurations of NR PDSCH and NR PDCCH before measurement are specified in Annex C.
E-UTRA configurations before measurement are specified in Annex D.
1. Connect the SS to the UE antenna connectors as shown in TS 38.508-1 [6] Annex A, in Figure A.3.1.7.1 for TE
diagram (without fader and AWGN) and clause A.3.2.2 for UE diagram.
3. Downlink signals for E-UTRA cell are initially set up according to TS 36.521-1 [16] Annex C.0 and uplink
signals according to TS 36.521-1 [16] Annex H
4. Propagation conditions are set according to TS 36.521-1 [16] and TS 38.521-1 [7] Annex B.0 for E-UTRA CG
and NR CG respectively.
5. Ensure the UE is in state RRC_CONNECTED with generic procedure parameters Connectivity EN-DC, DC
bearer MCG and SCG, Connected without release On, according to TS 38.508-1 [6] clause 4.5.4. Message
content are defined in clause 5.5.1.4.3.
6. SS shall transmit UECapabilityEnquiry message containing UE-CapabilityRAT-Request with rat-Type set to

eutra-nr and eutra.
7. The UE shall transmit UECapabilityInformation message.
8. Using the UE capabilities advertised in the UE-CapabilityRAT-Container of the type UE-MRDC-Capability and
UE-EUTRA-Capability, and the procedure outlined in 9.4B.1.1.3.1 determine one EN-DC bandwidth
combination that would provide the largest aggregated data rate.
9. Setup up the NR CG and E-UTRA CG using these parameters for the test.
10. Configure the NR CG TBsize, NR CG DL RMC, NR CG UL RMC from Annex A.3.2_1 and Annex A.2.2 for
UL as appropriate. Configure the E-UTRA CG TBsize, DL RMC and UL RMC from Table 9.4B.1.1.3-7, Table
9.4B.1.1.3-8 as appropriate.
ETSI
9.4B.1.1.4.2 Test procedure
FFS
9.4B.1.1.4.3 Message contents
Message contents are according to TS 38.508-1 [6] clause 5.4.2 with the following exceptions
Table 9.4B.1.1.4.3-1: PDCCH-ControlResourceSet

frequencyDomainResources CORESET value
according to Table
5.5.1.3-4 as applicable
}
}
Table 9.4B.1.1.4.3-2: PDCCH Search Space

monitoringSymbolsWithinSlot 10000000000000 Symbols 0
aggregationLevel1 n1 5MHz 30kHz
aggregationLevel4 n1 5MHz 15kHz,
10MHz 30kHz,
15MHz 30kHz
aggregationLevel8 n1 AL8 For all other
BW/SCS cases
}
}
Table 9.4B.1.1.4.3-3: CSI-RS-ResourceMapping for TRS

row1 0001 k0=0 for CSI-RS TRS
resource 1,2,3,4
}
}
Table 9.4B.1.1.4.3-4: NZP CSI-RS-ResourceMapping for CSI Acquisition

NZP-CSI-RS-Resource ::= SEQUENCE {
row1 0100 k0=4
}
}
}
ETSI
Table 9.4B.1.1.4.3-5: ZP CSI-RS-ResourceMapping for CSI Acquisition

ZP-CSI-RS-Resource ::= SEQUENCE {
row1 0001 k0=0
}
}
}
Table 9.4B.1.1.4.3-6: PDSCH-Config

bundleSize wideband Wideband PRB
Bundling
}
}
}
9.4B.1.1.5 Test requirement
The PDCP SDU success rate of greater than 85% shall be sustained during at least 300 frames.
10 CSI reporting requirements for interworking
10.1 General
This clause specifies CSI performance requirements for EN-DC, NE-DC, inter-band NR-DC between FR1 and FR2,
and inter-band NR CA between FR1 and FR2
schemes.

The following applicability rules are specified for demodulation performance requirements for interworking:
- For UEs supporting both SA and NSA,
- The performance requirements specified in Section 6 will be verified in SA mode only.
- The performance requirements specified in Section 8 will be verified in SA mode only.
- The FR1 EN-DC test cases with the NR TDD DL-UL configurations which are not aligned with LTE TDD DL-
UL configuration can be tested on the corresponding EN-DC band combinations where UE supports
simultaneous transmission and reception.
ETSI
10.2 Void
10.2A Reporting of Channel Quality Indicator (CQI) for CA

FFS
10.2B Reporting of Channel Quality Indicator (CQI) for DC

10.2B.1 EN-DC

The NR CQI requirements and test case details for this test case are specified in Section 6.2.
During the test, only the CQI requirements on the NR cell shall be verified.
10.2B.1.2 EN-DC including FR2 NR carrier

The NR CQI requirements and test case details for this test case are specified in Section 8.2.
During the test, only the CQI performance on the NR cell(s) on FR2 carriers shall be verified.

The CSI performance requirements are verified according to section 10.2B.1.1 for EN-DC with FR1 NR carrier only
and section 10.2B.1.2 for EN-DC with FR2 NR carrier only.
During the test for EN-DC with FR2 NR carriers, only the CSI performance requirements on the FR2 carriers are
verified.
No CSI requirement for FR1 NR or LTE carriers is specified for EN-DC including FR2 carrier(s).

FFS
10.3A Reporting of Precoding Matrix Indicator (PMI) for CA

FFS
10.3B Reporting of Precoding Matrix Indicator (PMI) for DC

10.3B.1 EN-DC

The NR PMI requirements and test case details for this test case are specified in Section 6.3.
During the test, only the PMI requirements on the NR cell shall be verified.

The NR PMI requirements and test case details for this test case are specified in Section 8.3.
During the test, only the PMI performance on the NR cell(s) on FR2 carriers shall be verified.
ETSI

The PMI performance requirements are verified according to section 10.3B.1.1 for EN-DC with FR1 NR carrier only
and section 10.3B.1.2 for EN-DC with FR2 NR carrier only.
During the test for EN-DC with FR2 NR carriers, only the PMI performance requirements on the FR2 carriers are
verified.
No PMI requirement for FR1 NR or LTE carriers is specified for EN-DC including FR2 carrier(s).

FFS
10.4A Reporting of Rank Indicator (RI) for CA

FFS
10.4B Reporting of Rank Indicator (RI) for DC

10.4B.1 EN-DC

The NR RI requirements and test case details for this test case are specified in Section 6.4.
During the test, only the RI requirements on the NR cell shall be verified.

The NR RI requirements and test case details for this test case are specified in Section 8.4.
During the test, only the RI performance on the NR cell(s) on FR2 carriers shall be verified.

The RI performance requirements are verified according to section 10.4B.1.1 for EN-DC with FR1 NR carrier only and
section 10.4B.1.2 for EN-DC with FR2 NR carrier only.
During the test for EN-DC with FR2 NR carriers, only the RI performance requirements on the FR2 carriers are
verified.
No RI requirement for FR1 NR or LTE carriers is specified for EN-DC including FR2 carrier(s).

FFS
ETSI
Annex A (normative):
Measurement channels
A.1 General
A.1.1 Throughput definition

The throughput values defined in the measurement channels specified in Annex A, are calculated and are valid per
codeword. For multi-codeword transmissions, the throughput referenced in the minimum requirements is the sum of
throughputs of all codewords.
A.1.2 TDD UL-DL patterns for FR1

TDD UL-DL patterns configurations for performance requirements are provided in Tables A.1.2-1, A.1.2-2, and A.1.2-
3.
Table A.1.2-1: TDD UL-DL pattern for SCS 15 kHz

UL-DL pattern
Parameter Unit
FR1.15-1
TDD Slot Configuration pattern (Note 1) DDDSU
Special Slot Configuration (Note 2) 10D+2G+2U
UL-DL configuration referenceSubcarrierSpacing kHz 15
(tdd-UL-DL- dl-UL-TransmissionPeriodicity ms 5
ConfigurationCommon) nrofDownlinkSlots 3
nrofDownlinkSymbols 10
nrofUplinkSlot 1
nrofUplinkSymbols 2
K1 value 4 if mod(i,5) = 0
(PDSCH-to-HARQ-timing-indicator) 3 if mod(i,5) = 1
2 if mod(i,5) = 2
6 if mod(i,5) = 3
NOTE 1: D denotes a slot with all DL symbols; S denotes a slot with a mix of DL, UL and
guard symbols; U denotes a slot with all UL symbols. The field is for information.
NOTE 2: D, G, U denote DL, guard and UL symbols, respectively. The field is for information.
NOTE 3: i is the slot index per frame; i = {0,…,9}
ETSI
UL-DL pattern
Parameter Unit
FR1.30-1 FR1.30-2 FR1.30-3 FR1.30-5 FR1.30-6
TDD Slot Configuration pattern (Note 1) 7DS2U DDDSU DDDSUDDSUU DDSU DS1S2U
6D+4G+4U 10D+2G+2U 10D+2G+2U 10D+2G+2U S1:
10D+2G+2U
Special Slot Configuration (Note 2)
S2:
12D+2G+0U
UL-DL configuration referenceSubcarrierSpacing kHz 30 30 30 30 30
(tdd-UL-DL- dl-UL-TransmissionPeriodicity ms 5 2.5 2.5 2 1
ConfigurationCommon) nrofDownlinkSlots 7 3 3 2 1
nrofDownlinkSymbols 6 10 10 10 10
nrofUplinkSlot 2 1 1 1 0
nrofUplinkSymbols 4 2 2 2 2
UL-DL configuration2 referenceSubcarrierSpacing kHz N/A N/A 30 N/A 30
(tdd-UL-DL- dl-UL-TransmissionPeriodicity ms N/A N/A 2.5 N/A 1
ConfigurationCommon2) nrofDownlinkSlots N/A N/A 2 N/A 0
nrofDownlinkSymbols N/A N/A 10 N/A 12
nrofUplinkSlot N/A N/A 2 N/A 1
nrofUplinkSymbols N/A N/A 2 N/A 0
K1 value 8 if mod(i,10) = 4 if mod(i,5) = 0 4 if mod(i,10) = 3 if mod(i,4) = 0 3 if mod(i,4) = 0
(PDSCH-to-HARQ-timing-indicator) 0 3 if mod(i,5) = 1 0 2 if mod(i,4) = 1 2 if mod(i,4) = 1
7 if mod(i,10) = 2 if mod(i,5) = 2 3 if mod(i,10) = 5 if mod(i,4) = 3 3 if mod(i,4) = 3
1 6 if mod(i,5) = 3 1
6 if mod(i,10) = 2 if mod(i,10) =
2 2
5 if mod(i,10) = 5 if mod(i,10) =
3 3
5 if mod(i,10) = 3 if mod(i,10) =
4 5
4 if mod(i,10) = 3 if mod(i,10) =
5 6
3 if mod(i,10) = 2 if mod(i,10) =
6 7
2 if mod(i,10) =
7
NOTE 1: D denotes a slot with all DL symbols; S denotes a slot with a mix of DL, UL and guard symbols; U denotes a slot with all UL symbols. The field is for information.
ETSI
Table A.1.2-2a: TDD UL-DL pattern for SCS 30 kHz for DCI-based dynamic UL/DL detection
UL-DL pattern
Parameter Unit
FR1.30-1.1
TDD Slot Configuration pattern (Note 1) 7DS2U
UL-DL configuration referenceSubcarrierSpacing kHz N/A
(tdd-UL-DL- dl-UL-TransmissionPeriodicity ms N/A
ConfigurationCommon) nrofDownlinkSlots N/A
(Note 4)
nrofDownlinkSymbols N/A
nrofUplinkSlot N/A
nrofUplinkSymbols N/A
UL-DL configuration2 referenceSubcarrierSpacing kHz N/A
(tdd-UL-DL- dl-UL-TransmissionPeriodicity ms N/A
ConfigurationCommon2) nrofDownlinkSlots N/A
(Note 4) nrofDownlinkSymbols N/A
nrofUplinkSlot N/A
PDCCH DCI DCI Format 1-1 for slot indices with
Configuration mod(i,10) = 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7
Scheduled Grant Symbol 2-13 for slot indices
with mod(i,10) = 0,1,2,3,4,5,6
and Symbol 2-5 for slot
indices with mod(i,10) = 7
6 if mod(i,10) = 2
5 if mod(i,10) = 3
5 if mod(i,10) = 4
4 if mod(i,10) = 5
3 if mod(i,10) = 6
2 if mod(i,10) = 7
NOTE 1: D denotes a slot with all DL symbols; S denotes a slot with a mix of DL, UL and guard symbols; U
denotes a slot with all UL symbols. The field is for information.
NOTE 2: D, G and U denote DL, guard and UL symbols, respectively. The field is for information.
NOTE 4: Do not configure TDD UL-DL pattern semi-statically using RRC configuration.
A.1.3 TDD UL-DL patterns for FR2

TDD UL-DL patterns configurations for performance requirements are provided in Tables A.1.3-1, A.1.3-2.

UL-DL pattern
Parameter Unit
FR2.60-1
TDD Slot Configuration pattern (Note 1) DDSU
nrofUplinkSlot 1
nrofUplinkSymbols 0
K1 value K1 = 3 if mod(i,4) = 0
(PDSCH-to-HARQ-timing-indicator) K1 = 2 if mod(i,4) = 1
K1 = 5 if mod(i,4) = 2
NOTE 1: D denotes a slot with all DL symbols; S denotes a slot with a mix of DL, UL and guard symbols; U
ETSI

UL-DL pattern
Parameter Unit
FR2.120-1 FR2.120-2
TDD Slot Configuration pattern (Note 1) DDDSU DDSU
Special Slot Configuration (Note 2) 10D+2G+2U 11D+3G+0U
UL-DL configuration referenceSubcarrierSpacing kHz 120 120
(tdd-UL-DL- dl-UL-TransmissionPeriodicity ms 0.625 0.5
ConfigurationCommon) nrofDownlinkSlots 3 2
nrofDownlinkSymbols 10 11
nrofUplinkSlot 1 1
nrofUplinkSymbols 2 0
K1 value K1 = 4 if mod(i,5) = 0 K1 = 3 if mod(i,4) = 0
(PDSCH-to-HARQ-timing-indicator) K1 = 3 if mod(i,5) = 1 K1 = 2 if mod(i,4) = 1
K1 = 2 if mod(i,5) = 2 K1 = 5 if mod(i,4) = 2
K1 = 6 if mod(i,5) = 3
NOTE 1: D denotes a slot with all DL symbols; S denotes a slot with a mix of DL, UL and guard symbols; U denotes a
slot with all UL symbols. The field is for information.
Table A.1.3-2a: TDD UL-DL pattern for SCS 120 kHz for DCI-based dynamic UL/DL detection
UL-DL pattern
Parameter Unit
FR2.120-1.1
UL-DL configuration referenceSubcarrierSpacing kHz N/A
(tdd-UL-DL- dl-UL- ms
N/A
ConfigurationCommon) TransmissionPeriodicity
(Note 4) nrofDownlinkSlots N/A
nrofUplinkSlot N/A
UL-DL configuration2 referenceSubcarrierSpacing kHz N/A
(tdd-UL-DL- dl-UL- ms
N/A
ConfigurationCommon2) TransmissionPeriodicity
(Note 4) nrofDownlinkSlots N/A
nrofUplinkSlot N/A
PDCCH DCI DCI Format 1-1 for slot indices
Configuration with mod(i,5) =
0,1,2,3
Scheduled Grant Symbol 1-13 for slot
indices with mod(i,5)
= 0,1,2 and Symbol
1-9 for slot indices
with mod(i,5) = 3
K1 value K1 = 4 if mod(i,5) =
(PDSCH-to-HARQ-timing-indicator) 0
K1 = 3 if mod(i,5) =
1
K1 = 2 if mod(i,5) =
2
K1 = 6 if mod(i,5) =
3
NOTE1: D denotes a slot with all DL symbols; S denotes a slot with a mix of DL, UL
and guard symbols; U denotes a slot with all UL symbols. The field is for
information.
NOTE 2: D, G and U denote DL, guard and UL symbols, respectively. The field is for
information.
NOTE 4: Do not configure TDD UL-DL pattern semi-statically using RRC
configuration.
ETSI
A.2 UL Reference measurement channels
A.2.1 General
The measurement channels in the following subclauses are defined to test the performance requirements where PUSCH
is required. The measurement channels represent example configurations of physical channels for different data rates.
ETSI
A.2.2 Reference measurement channels for FDD

A.2.2.1 RMC for Sustained downlink data rate
A.2.2.1.1 CP-OFDM 64QAM

Table A.2.2.1.1-1: Reference Channels for CP-OFDM 64QAM for 15kHz SCS
Para Chann Subca Alloc CP- Modul MC Tar Payl Trans LD Num Tota Total
meter el rrier ated OFD ation S get oad port PC ber l modul
band Spaci resou M Ind Cod size block Bas of num ated
width ng rce Sym ex ing CRC e code ber symb
block bols (N Rat Gra bloc of ols
s per ote e ph ks bits per
slot 2) per per slot
(Note slot slot
1) (Not
e 3)
Unit MHz KHz Bits Bits Bits
64QA 1980
5 15 25 11 M 19 1/2 9992 24 1 2 0 3300
64QA 2100 4118
10 15 52 11 M 19 1/2 0 24 1 3 4 6864
64QA 3175 6256
15 15 79 11 M 19 1/2 2 24 1 4 8 10428
64QA 4201 8395
20 15 106 11 M 19 1/2 6 24 1 5 2 13992
64QA 5328 1053
25 15 133 11 M 19 1/2 8 24 1 7 36 17556
64QA 6352 1267
30 15 160 11 M 19 1/2 8 24 1 8 20 21120
64QA 8604 1710
40 15 216 11 M 19 1/2 0 24 1 11 72 28512
64QA 1085 2138
50 15 270 11 M 19 1/2 52 24 1 13 40 35640
Note 1: PUSCH mapping Type-A and single-symbol DM-RS configuration Type-1 with 2 additional DM-RS
symbols, such that the DM-RS positions are set to symbols 2, 7, 11. DMRS is [TDM’ed] with PUSCH data.
Note 2: MCS Index is based on MCS table 5.1.3.1-1 defined in TS 38.214 [12].
Note 3: If more than one Code Block is present, an additional CRC sequence of L = 24 Bits is attached to each
Code Block (otherwise L = 0 Bit)
ETSI
Para Chann Subca Alloc CP- Modul MC Tar Payl Trans LD Num Tota Total
meter el rrier ated OFD ation S get oad port PC ber l modul
band Spaci resou M Ind Cod size block Bas of num ated
width ng rce Sym ex ing CRC e code ber symb
block bols (N Rat Gra bloc of ols
s per ote e ph ks bits per
slot 2) per per slot
(Note slot slot
1) (Not
e 3)
Unit MHz KHz Bits Bits Bits
64QA
5 30 11 11 M 19 1/2 4352 24 1 1 8712 1452
64QA 1900
10 30 24 11 M 19 1/2 9480 24 1 2 8 3168
64QA 1511 3009
15 30 38 11 M 19 1/2 2 24 1 2 6 5016
64QA 2049 4039
20 30 51 11 M 19 1/2 6 24 1 3 2 6732
64QA 2612 5148
25 30 65 11 M 19 1/2 0 24 1 4 0 8580
64QA 3124 6177
30 30 78 11 M 19 1/2 0 24 1 4 6 10296
64QA 4201 8395
40 30 106 11 M 19 1/2 6 24 1 5 2 13992
64QA 5328 1053
50 30 133 11 M 19 1/2 8 24 1 7 36 17556
64QA 6455 1283
60 30 162 11 M 19 1/2 2 24 1 8 04 21384
64QA 8604 1718
80 30 217 11 M 19 1/2 0 24 1 11 64 28644
64QA 9837 1940
90 30 245 11 M 19 1/2 6 24 1 12 40 32340
64QA 1085 2162
100 30 273 11 M 19 1/2 52 24 1 13 16 36036
Note 1: PUSCH mapping Type-A and single-symbol DM-RS configuration Type-1 with 2 additional DM-RS
symbols, such that the DM-RS positions are set to symbols 2, 7, 11. DMRS is [TDM’ed] with PUSCH data.
Note 3: If more than one Code Block is present, an additional CRC sequence of L = 24 Bits is attached to each
Code Block (otherwise L = 0 Bit)
ETSI
A.2.3 Reference measurement channels for TDD

A.2.3.1 RMC for Sustained downlink data rate
A.2.3.1.1 CP-OFDM 16QAM

Parameter Channel Subcarrier Allocated CP- Modulation MCS Target Payload Transport
bandwidth Spacing resource OFDM Index Coding size for block
blocks Symbols (Note 2) Rate slots 4 CRC
per slot and 9
(Note 1)
Unit MHz KHz Bits Bits

5-50 15 1 11 16QAM 10 1/3 176 16
5 15 13 11 16QAM 10 1/3 2280 16
5 15 25 11 16QAM 10 1/3 4352 24
10 15 26 11 16QAM 10 1/3 4480 24
10 15 52 11 16QAM 10 1/3 9224 24
15 15 40 11 16QAM 10 1/3 7040 24
15 15 79 11 16QAM 10 1/3 13832 24
20 15 53 11 16QAM 10 1/3 9224 24
20 15 106 11 16QAM 10 1/3 18432 24
25 15 67 11 16QAM 10 1/3 11784 24
25 15 133 11 16QAM 10 1/3 23040 24
30 15 80 11 16QAM 10 1/3 14088 24
30 15 160 11 16QAM 10 1/3 28168 24
40 15 108 11 16QAM 10 1/3 18960 24
40 15 216 11 16QAM 10 1/3 37896 24
50 15 135 11 16QAM 10 1/3 23568 24
50 15 270 11 16QAM 10 1/3 47112 24
Note 1: PUSCH mapping Type-A and single-symbol DM-RS configuration Type-1 with 2 additional DM-RS symbols, such that t
11. DMRS is [TDM’ed] with PUSCH data.
Note 3: If more than one Code Block is present, an additional CRC sequence of L = 24 Bits is attached to each Code Block (oth
ETSI
Parameter Channel Subcarrier Allocated CP- Modulation MCS Target Payload Transport
bandwidth Spacing resource OFDM Index Coding size for block
blocks Symbols (Note 2) Rate slots 8, CRC
per slot 9, 18
(Note 1) and 19
Unit MHz KHz Bits Bits

5-50 30 1 11 16QAM 10 1/3 176 16
5 30 6 11 16QAM 10 1/3 1064 16
5 30 11 11 16QAM 10 1/3 1928 16
10 30 12 11 16QAM 10 1/3 2088 16
10 30 24 11 16QAM 10 1/3 4224 24
15 30 19 11 16QAM 10 1/3 3368 16
15 30 38 11 16QAM 10 1/3 6656 24
20 30 26 11 16QAM 10 1/3 4480 24
20 30 51 11 16QAM 10 1/3 8968 24
25 30 33 11 16QAM 10 1/3 5760 24
25 30 65 11 16QAM 10 1/3 11272 24
30 30 39 11 16QAM 10 1/3 6784 24
30 30 78 11 16QAM 10 1/3 13576 24
40 30 53 11 16QAM 10 1/3 9224 24
40 30 106 11 16QAM 10 1/3 18432 24
50 30 67 11 16QAM 10 1/3 11784 24
50 30 133 11 16QAM 10 1/3 23040 24
60 30 81 11 16QAM 10 1/3 14088 24
60 30 162 11 16QAM 10 1/3 28168 24
80 30 109 11 16QAM 10 1/3 18960 24
80 30 217 11 16QAM 10 1/3 37896 24
90 30 123 11 16QAM 10 1/3 21504 24
90 30 245 11 16QAM 10 1/3 43032 24
100 30 137 11 16QAM 10 1/3 24072 24
100 30 273 11 16QAM 10 1/3 48168 24
Note 1: PUSCH mapping Type-A and single-symbol DM-RS configuration Type-1 with 2 additional DM-RS symbols, such that t
11. DMRS is [TDM’ed] with PUSCH data.
Note 3: If more than one Code Block is present, an additional CRC sequence of L = 24 Bits is attached to each Code Block (oth
A.3 DL reference measurement channels
A.3.1 General
The transport block size (TBS) determination procedure is described in Clause 5.1.3.2 of TS 38.214 [12].
[Unless otherwise stated, no user data is scheduled on slot #0 within 20 ms in order to avoid SSB and PDSCH
transmissions in one slot and simplify test configuration.]
A.3.2 Reference measurement channels for PDSCH performance

requirements
For PDSCH reference channels if more than one Code Block is present, an additional CRC sequence of L = 24 Bits is
attached to each Code Block (otherwise L = 0 Bit).
ETSI
A.3.2.1 FDD
A.3.2.1.1 Reference measurement channels for SCS 15 kHz FR1

Table A.3.2.1.1-1: PDSCH Reference Channel for FDD (QPSK)

R.PDSCH.1- R.PDSCH.1 R.PDSCH.1 R.PDSCH.1 R.PDSCH.1
Reference channel
1.1 FDD -1.2 FDD -1.3 FDD -1.4 FDD -1.5 FDD
Channel bandwidth MHz 10 10 10 10 10
Subcarrier spacing kHz 15 15 15 15 15
Number of allocated resource blocks PRBs 52 6 52 52 52
Number of consecutive PDSCH
12 12 7 9 11
symbols
Allocated slots per 2 frames Slots 19 19 19 19 19
MCS table 64QAM 64QAM 64QAM 64QAM 64QAM
MCS index 4 4 4 4 4
Modulation QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK
Target Coding Rate 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30
Number of MIMO layers 1 1 1 1 1
Number of DMRS REs 18 12 12 12 12
Overhead for TBS determination 0 0 0 18 18
Information Bit Payload per Slot
For Slot i = 0 Bits N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
For Slots i = 1,…, 19 Bits 3904 480 2280 2472 3240
Transport block CRC per Slot
For Slots i = 1,…, 19 Bits 24 16 16 16 16
Number of Code Blocks per Slot
For Slot i = 0 CBs N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
For Slots i = 1,…, 19 CBs 1 1 1 1 1
Binary Channel Bits Per Slot
For Slots i = 10, 11 Bits 12480 1512 6864 7760 10256
For Slots i = 3,…, 9, 12, …, 19 Bits 13104 1584 7488 8384 10880
Max. Throughput averaged over 2
Mbps 3.709 0.456 2.166 2.348 3.078
frames
NOTE 1: SS/PBCH block is transmitted in slot #0 with periodicity 20 ms.
NOTE 2: Slot i is slot index per 2 frames.
ETSI
Table A.3.2.1.1-2: PDSCH Reference Channel for FDD (16QAM)

R.PDSCH.1- R.PDSCH.1 R.PDSCH.1 R.PDSCH.1
Reference channel
2.1 FDD -2.2 FDD -2.3 FDD -2.4 FDD
Channel bandwidth MHz 10 10 10 10
Number of allocated resource blocks PRBs 52 52 52 52
12 12 12 12
symbols
Allocated slots per 2 frames Slots 19 19 19 19
MCS table 64QAM 64QAM 64QAM 64QAM
MCS index 13 13 13 13
Modulation 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM
Target Coding Rate 0.48 0.48 0.48 0.48
Number of MIMO layers 1 2 3 4
Number of DMRS REs 12 12 24 24
Overhead for TBS determination 0 0 0 0
For Slot i = 0 Bits N/A N/A N/A N/A
For Slots i = 1,…, 19 Bits 13064 26120 35856 48168
For Slots i = 1,…, 19 Bits 24 24 24 24
For Slot i = 0 CBs N/A N/A N/A N/A
For Slots i = 1,…, 19 CBs 2 4 5 6
For Slots i = 10, 11 Bits 26208 52416 71136 94848
For Slots i = 1,…, 9, 12, …, 19 Bits 27456 54912 74880 99840
Mbps 12.411 24.814 34.063 45.760
frames
ETSI

R.PDSCH.1-
Reference channel
3.1 FDD
Channel bandwidth MHz 10
Number of allocated resource blocks PRBs 52
12
symbols
Allocated slots per 2 frames Slots 19
MCS table 64QAM
MCS index 19
Modulation 64QAM
Target Coding Rate 0.51
Number of MIMO layers 2
Number of DMRS REs 12
Overhead for TBS determination 0
For Slot i = 0 Bits N/A
For Slots i = 1,…, 19 Bits 42016
For Slot i = 0 CBs N/A
For Slots i = 1,…, 19 CBs 5
For Slots i = 10, 11 Bits 78624
For Slots i = 1,…, 9, 12, …, 19 Bits 82368
Mbps 39.915
frames
ETSI

R.PDSCH.1-
Reference channel
4.1 FDD
12
symbols
MCS table 256QAM
MCS index 24
Modulation 256QAM
For Slots i = 1,…, 9, 12, …, 19 Bits 54912
Mbps 42.841
frames
ETSI
Table A.3.2.1.1-5: PDSCH Reference Channel for FDD and CSI-RS overlapped with PDSCH
R.PDSCH.1-
Reference channel
5.1 FDD
12
symbols
MCS table 64QAM
MCS index 13
Modulation 16QAM
For Slots i = 10 Bits 48256
For Slots i = 1,…,4,6,…,
Bits 54912
9,12,…14,16,…,19
Mbps 24.814
frames
ETSI
Table A.3.2.1.1-6: PDSCH Reference Channel for FDD PMI reporting requirements
R.PDSCH.1 R.PDSCH.1
Reference channel
-6.1 FDD -6.2 FDD
Channel bandwidth MHz 10 10
Subcarrier spacing kHz 15 15
Number of allocated resource blocks PRBs 52 52
12 12
symbols
Allocated slots per 2 frames Slots 15 15
MCS table 64QAM 64QAM
MCS index 13 13
Modulation 16QAM 16QAM
Target Coding Rate 0.48 0.48
Number of MIMO layer 1 2
Number of DMRS REs (Note 3) 24 24
Overhead for TBS determination 0 0
For Slot i = 0 Bits N/A N/A
For CSI Slots i, if mod (i,5) =1,
N/A N/A
i={0,…,19}
For Non CSI-RS Slot i, if mod (i,5)
Bits 12040 24072
={0,2,3,4}, i={1,..19}
N/A N/A
i={0,…,19}
Bits 24 24
={0,2,3,4}, i={1,..19}
For Slot i = 0 CBs N/A N/A
N/A N/A
i={0,…,19}
CBs 2 3
={0,2,3,4}, i={1,..,19}
N/A N/A
i={0,…,19}
For Slots i = 10 Bits 23712 47424
Bits 24960 49920
={0,2,3,4}, i={1,..9,11,…,19}
Mbps 9.030 18.054
frames
NOTE 3: Number of DMRS REs includes the overhead of the DM-RS CDM groups without data.
ETSI

R.PDSCH.2-
Reference channel
1.1 FDD
12
symbols
MCS table 64QAM
MCS index 19
Modulation 64QAM
For Slots i = 1,…, 9, 12, …, 19 Bits 80784
Mbps 79.903
frames
ETSI
A.3.2.2 TDD
A.3.2.2.1 Reference measurement channels for SCS 15 kHz FR1 (Void)

Table A.3.2.2.2-1: PDSCH Reference Channel for TDD UL-DL pattern FR1.30-1 and FR1.30-1.1 (QPSK)
R.PDSCH. R.PDSCH. R.PDSCH.
Reference channel
2-1.1 TDD 2-1.2 TDD 2-1.3 TDD
Channel bandwidth MHz 40 40 40
Allocated resource blocks PRBs 106 6 106
Number of consecutive PDSCH symbols
For Slot i, if mod(i, 10) = 7 for i from
4 4 N/A
{0,…,39}
For Slot i, if mod(i, 10) = {0,1,2,3,4,5,6)
12 12 7
for i from {1,…,39}
Allocated slots per 2 frames 31 31 27
MCS table 64QAM 64QAM 64QAM
MCS index 4 4 4
Modulation QPSK QPSK QPSK
Target Coding Rate 0.30 0.30 0.30
Number of MIMO layers 1 1 1
Number of DMRS REs
6 6 N/A
{0,…,39}
For Slot i, if mod(i, 10) = {0,1,2,3,4,5,6)
18 12 12
Overhead for TBS determination 0 0 0
For Slots 0 and Slot i, if mod(i, 10) =
Bits N/A N/A N/A
{8,9} for i from {0,…,39}
Bits 2664 144 N/A
{0,…,39}
For Slot i, if mod(i, 10) = {0,1,2,3,4,5,6)
Bits 8064 480 4608
Bits N/A N/A N/A
{8,9} for i from {0,…,39}
Bits 16 16 N/A
{0,…,39}
For Slot i, if mod(i, 10) = {0,1,2,3,4,5,6)
Bits 24 16 24
CBs N/A N/A N/A
{8,9} for i from {0,…,39}
CBs 1 1 N/A
{0,…,39}
For Slot i, if mod(i, 10) = {0,1,2,3,4,5,6)
CBs 1 1 1
Bits N/A N/A N/A
{8,9} for i from {0,…,39}
For Slots i = 20, 21 Bits 25440 1512 13992
Bits 8904 504 N/A
{0,…,39}
For Slot i, if mod(i, 10) = {0,1,2,3,4,5,6)
Bits 26712 1584 15264
for i from {1,…,19,22,…,39}
Max. Throughput averaged over 2 frames Mbps 11.419 0.677 6.221
ETSI
Table A.3.2.2.2-2: PDSCH Reference Channel for TDD UL-DL pattern FR1.30-1 (16QAM)
R.PDSCH. R.PDSCH. R.PDSCH. R.PDSCH.
Reference channel
2-2.1 TDD 2-2.2 TDD 2-2.3 TDD 2-2.4 TDD
Channel bandwidth MHz 40 40 40 40
Allocated resource blocks PRBs 106 106 106 106
4 4 4 4
{0,…,39}
For Slot i, if mod(i, 10) = {0,1,2,3,4,5,6)
12 12 12 12
Allocated slots per 2 frames 31 31 31 31
MCS table 64QAM 64QAM 64QAM 64QAM
MCS index 13 13 13 13
Modulation 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM
Target Coding Rate 0.48 0.48 0.48 0.48
Number of MIMO layers 1 2 3 4
Number of DMRS REs
6 6 12 12
{0,…,39}
For Slot i, if mod(i, 10) = {0,1,2,3,4,5,6)
12 12 24 24
Bits N/A N/A N/A N/A
{8,9} for i from {0,…,39}
Bits 8456 16896 22032 29192
{0,…,39}
For Slot i, if mod(i, 10) = {0,1,2,3,4,5,6)
Bits 26632 53288 73776 98376
{8,9} for i from {0,…,39}
Bits 24 24 24 24
{0,…,39}
For Slot i, if mod(i, 10) = {0,1,2,3,4,5,6)
Bits 24 24 24 24
CBs N/A N/A N/A N/A
{8,9} for i from {0,…,39}
CBs 2 3 3 4
{0,…,39}
For Slot i, if mod(i, 10) = {0,1,2,3,4,5,6)
CBs 4 7 9 12
{8,9} for i from {0,…,39}
For Slots i = 20, 21 Bits 53424 106848 144008 193344
Bits 17808 35616 45792 61056
{0,…,39}
For Slot i, if mod(i, 10) = {0,1,2,3,4,5,6)
Bits 55968 111936 152640 203520
for i from {1,…,19,22,…,39}
Max. Throughput averaged over 2 frames Mbps 37.644 75.318 104.719 138.646
ETSI
R.PDSCH. R.PDSCH.
Reference channel
2-3.1 TDD 2-3.2 TDD
Allocated resource blocks PRBs 106 51
4 4
{0,…,39}
For Slot i, if mod(i, 10) = {0,1,2,3,4,5,6)
12 12
Allocated slots per 2 frames 31 31
MCS index 19 19
Number of MIMO layers 2 2
Number of DMRS REs
6 6
{0,…,39}
For Slot i, if mod(i, 10) = {0,1,2,3,4,5,6)
12 12
Bits N/A N/A
{8,9} for i from {0,…,39}
Bits 27144 13064
{0,…,39}
For Slot i, if mod(i, 10) = {0,1,2,3,4,5,6)
Bits 83976 40976
Bits N/A N/A
{8,9} for i from {0,…,39}
Bits 24 24
{0,…,39}
For Slot i, if mod(i, 10) = {0,1,2,3,4,5,6)
Bits 24 24
CBs N/A N/A
{8,9} for i from {0,…,39}
CBs 4 2
{0,…,39}
For Slot i, if mod(i, 10) = {0,1,2,3,4,5,6)
CBs 10 5
Bits N/A N/A
{8,9} for i from {0,…,39}
For Slots i = 20, 21 Bits 160272 77112
Bits 53424 25704
{0,…,39}
For Slot i, if mod(i, 10) = {0,1,2,3,4,5,6)
Bits 167904 80784
for i from {1,…,19,22,…,39}
Max. Throughput averaged over 2 frames Mbps 118.796 57.930
ETSI
R.PDSCH.
Reference channel
2-4.1 TDD
Allocated resource blocks PRBs 106
4
{0,…,39}
For Slot i, if mod(i, 10) = {0,1,2,3,4,5,6)
12
Allocated slots per 2 frames 31
MCS table 256QAM
MCS index 24
Modulation 256QAM
Number of DMRS REs
6
{0,…,39}
For Slot i, if mod(i, 10) = {0,1,2,3,4,5,6)
12
Maximum number of HARQ transmissions 4
Bits N/A
{8,9} for i from {0,…,39}
Bits 29192
{0,…,39}
For Slot i, if mod(i, 10) = {0,1,2,3,4,5,6)
Bits 92200
Bits N/A
{8,9} for i from {0,…,39}
Bits 24
{0,…,39}
For Slot i, if mod(i, 10) = {0,1,2,3,4,5,6)
Bits 24
CBs N/A
{8,9} for i from {0,…,39}
CBs 4
{0,…,39}
For Slot i, if mod(i, 10) = {0,1,2,3,4,5,6)
CBs 11
Bits N/A
{8,9} for i from {0,…,39}
Bits 35616
{0,…,39}
For Slot i, if mod(i, 10) = {0,1,2,3,4,5,6)
Bits 111936
for i from {1,…,19,22,…,39}
Max. Throughput averaged over 2 frames Mbps 130.308
ETSI
Table A.3.2.2.2-5: PDSCH Reference Channel for TDD UL-DL pattern FR1.30-2
R.PDSCH.
Reference channel
2-5.1 TDD
8
{0,…,39}
For Slot i, if mod(i, 5) = {0,1,2) for i from
12
{1,…,39}
MCS table 64QAM
MCS index 4
Modulation QPSK
Number of DMRS REs
12
{0,…,39}
12
{1,…,39}
For Slot 0 and Slot i, if mod(i, 5) = 4 for i
Bits N/A
from {0,…,39}
Bits 5376
{0,…,39}
Bits 8456
{1,…,39}
Bits N/A
from {0,…,39}
Bits 24
{0,…,39}
Bits 24
{1,…,39}
CBs N/A
from {0,…,39}
CBs 1
{0,…,39}
CBs 2
{1,…,39}
Bits N/A
from {0,…,39}
For Slot i = 20, 21 Bits 26712
Bits 17808
{0,…,39}
Bits 27984
{1,…,19,22,…,39}
ETSI
Table A.3.2.2.2-6: PDSCH Reference Channel for TDD UL-DL pattern FR1.30-3
R.PDSCH.
Reference channel
2-6.1 TDD
For Slot i, if mod(i, 10) = {3,7} for i from
8
{0,…,39}
For Slot i, if mod(i, 10) = {0,1,2,5,6) for i
12
from {1,…,39}
MCS table 64QAM
MCS index 4
Modulation QPSK
Number of DMRS REs
12
{0,…,39}
12
from {1,…,39}
Maximum number of HARQ transmissions 4
For Slot 0 and Slot i, if mod(i, 10) =
Bits N/A
{4,8,9} for i from {0,…,39}
Bits 5376
{0,…,39}
Bits 8456
from {1,…,39}
Bits N/A
{4,8,9} for i from {0,…,39}
Bits 24
{0,…,39}
Bits 24
from {1,…,39}
CBs N/A
{4,8,9} for i from {0,…,39}
CBs 1
{0,…,39}
CBs 2
from {1,…,39}
Bits N/A
{4,8,9} for i from {0,…,39}
Bits 17808
{0,…,39}
Bits 27984
from {1,…,19,22,…,39}
ETSI
Table A.3.2.2.2-7: PDSCH Reference Channel for TDD UL-DL pattern FR1.30-1 and CSI-RS overlapped
with PDSCH
R.PDSCH.
Reference channel
2-7.1 TDD
4
{0,…,39}
For Slot i, if mod(i, 10) = {0,1,2,3,4,5,6)
12
MCS table 64QAM
MCS index 13
Modulation 16QAM
Number of DMRS REs
6
{0,…,39}
For Slot i, if mod(i, 10) = {0,1,2,3,4,5,6)
12
Bits N/A
{8,9} for i from {0,…,39}
Bits 16896
{0,…,39}
For Slot i, if mod(i, 10) = {0,1,2,3,4,5,6)
Bits 53288
Bits N/A
{8,9} for i from {0,…,39}
Bits 24
{0,…,39}
For Slot i, if mod(i, 10) = {0,1,2,3,4,5,6)
Bits 24
CBs N/A
{8,9} for i from {0,…,39}
CBs 3
{0,…,39}
For Slot i, if mod(i, 10) = {0,1,2,3,4,5,6)
CBs 7
Bits N/A
{8,9} for i from {0,…,39}
For Slot i, if mod(i, 10) = {0,5) for i from
Bits 103456
{1,…,19,22,…,39}
Bits 35616
{0,…,39}
Bits 111936
from {1,…,19,22,…,39}
ETSI
Table A.3.2.2.2-8: PDSCH Reference Channel for TDD PMI reporting requirements with UL-DL pattern
FR1.30-1 (16QAM)
R.PDSCH. R.PDSCH.
Reference channel
2-8.1 TDD 2-8.2 TDD
Allocated resource blocks PRBs106 106
Number of consecutive PDSCH symbols 12 12
MCS index 13 13
Bits N/A N/A
{7,8,9} for i from {0,…,39}
For CSI-RS Slot i, if mod(i,10) =1 for i
Bits N/A N/A
from {0,…,39}
For Slot i = 20 Bits 24576 49176
For Slot i, if mod(i, 10) = {0,2,3,4,5,6} for
24576 49176
i from {1,…,19,22,…,39}
Bits N/A N/A
{7,8,9} for i from {0,…,39}
N/A N/A
from {0,…,39}
For Slot i = 20 Bits 24 24
Bits 24 24
i from {1,…,19,22,…,39}
CBs N/A N/A
{7,8,9} for i from {0,…,39}
N/A N/A
from {0,…,39}
For Slot i = 20 CBs 3 6
CBs 3 6
i from {1,…,19,22,…,39}
Bits N/A N/A
{7,8,9} for i from {0,…,39}
Bits N/A N/A
from {0,…,39}
For Slot i = 20 Bits 48336 96672
Bits 50880 101760
i from {1,…,19,22,…,39}
NOTE 3: Number of DMRS REs includes the overhead of the DM-RS CDM groups without data.
ETSI

R.PDSCH.4-
Reference channel
1.1 TDD
For Slot i, if mod(i, 4) = 2 for i from {1,…,
10
79}
13
{1,…,79}
MCS table 64QAM
MCS index 13
Modulation 16QAM
Number of DMRS REs
12
79}
12
{1,…,79}
For Slots 0 and Slot i, if mod(i, 4) = 3 for
Bits N/A
i from {0,…,79}
Bits 25608
79}
Bits 34816
{1,…,79}
Bits N/A
i from {0,…,79}
Bits 24
79}
Bits 24
{1,…,79}
CBs N/A
i from {0,…,79}
CBs 4
79}
CBs 5
{1,…,79}
Bits N/A
i from {0,…,79}
Bits 54912
79}
Bits 73128
{1,…,39,42,…,79}
ETSI

Table A.3.2.2.5-1: PDSCH Reference Channel for TDD UL-DL pattern FR2.120-1 and FR2.120-1.1
(QPSK)
R.PDSCH.5-
Reference channel
1.1 TDD
9
159}
13
{1,…,159}
MCS table 64QAM
MCS index 4
Modulation QPSK
Number of DMRS REs
12
159}
12
{1,…,159}
Bits N/A
i from {0,…,159}
Bits 3624
159}
Bits 5504
{1,…,159}
Bits N/A
i from {0,…,159}
Bits 16
159}
Bits 24
{1,…,159}
CBs N/A
i from {0,…,159}
CBs 1
159}
CBs 1
{1,…,159}
Bits N/A
i from {0,…,159}
Bits 12210
159}
Bits 18282
{1,…,79,82,…,159}
ETSI
R.PDSCH.5- R.PDSCH.5- R.PDSCH.
Reference channel
2.1 TDD 2.2 TDD 5-2.3 TDD
Channel bandwidth MHz 100 100 200
Allocated resource blocks PRBs 66 66 132
9 9 9
{0,…, 159}
13 13 13
{1,…,159}
Allocated slots per 2 frames 127 127 127
MCS table 64QAM 64QAM 64QAM
MCS index 13 13 13
Modulation 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM
Target Coding Rate 0.48 0.48 0.48
Number of MIMO layers 1 2 2
Number of DMRS REs
12 12 12
{0,…, 159}
12 12 12
{1,…,159}
Overhead for TBS determination 6 6 6
Bits N/A N/A N/A
i from {0,…,159}
Bits 11272 22536 45096
{0,…, 159}
Bits 17424 34816 69672
{1,…,159}
Bits N/A N/A N/A
i from {0,…,159}
Bits 24 24 24
{0,…, 159}
Bits 24 24 24
{1,…,159}
CBs N/A N/A N/A
i from {0,…,159}
CBs 2 3 6
{0,…, 159}
CBs 3 5 9
{1,…,159}
Bits N/A N/A N/A
i from {0,…,159}
For Slots i = 80, 81 Bits 34980 69960 139920
Bits 24420 48840 97680
{0,…, 159}
Bits 36564 73128 146256
{1,…,79,82,…,159}
Mbps 100.799 201.434 403.096
frames
ETSI
R.PDSCH.5-
Reference channel
3.1 TDD
9
159}
13
{1,…,159}
MCS table 64QAM
MCS index 18
Modulation 64QAM
Number of DMRS REs
12
159}
12
{1,…,159}
For Slots 0 and Slot i, if mod(i, 5) = 4 for N/A
Bits
i from {0,…,159}
Bits 16136
159}
Bits 25104
{1,…,159}
Bits
i from {0,…,159}
Bits 24
159}
Bits 24
{1,…,159}
CBs N/A
i from {0,…,159}
CBs 2
159}
CBs 3
{1,…,159}
Bits
i from {0,…,159}
Bits 36630
159}
Bits 54846
{1,…,79,82,…,159}
ETSI
Table A.3.2.2.5-4: PDSCH Reference Channel for TDD UL-DL pattern FR2.120-2 (QPSK)
R.PDSCH.5-
Reference channel
4.1 TDD
10
159}
13
{1,…,159}
MCS table 64QAM
MCS index 4
Modulation QPSK
Number of DMRS REs
12
159}
12
{1,…,159}
Bits N/A
i from {0,…,159}
Bits 736
159}
Bits 1032
{1,…,159}
Bits N/A
i from {0,…,159}
Bits 16
159}
Bits 16
{1,…,159}
CBs N/A
i from {0,…,159}
CBs 1
159}
CBs 1
{1,…,159}
Bits N/A
i from {0,…,159}
Bits 2496
159}
Bits 3324
{1,…,79,82,…,159}
ETSI
R.PDSCH.5- R.PDSCH.
Reference channel
5.1 TDD 5-5.2 TDD
Allocated resource blocks PRBs 66 32
10 10
159}
13 13
{1,…,159}
MCS index 13 13
Number of DMRS REs
12 12
159}
12 12
{1,…,159}
Bits N/A N/A
i from {0,…,159}
Bits 25608 12552
159}
Bits 34816 16896
{1,…,159}
Bits N/A N/A
i from {0,…,159}
Bits 24 24
159}
Bits 24 24
{1,…,159}
CBs N/A N/A
i from {0,…,159}
CBs 4 2
159}
CBs 5 3
{1,…,159}
Bits N/A N/A
i from {0,…,159}
For Slot i = 80, 81 Bits 69960 33920
Bits 54912 26624
159}
Bits 73128 35456
{1,…,79,82,…,159}
ETSI
R.PDSCH.5-
Reference channel
6.1 TDD
10
159}
13
{1,…,159}
MCS table 64QAM
MCS index 17
Modulation 64QAM
Number of DMRS REs
12
159}
12
{1,…,159}
Bits N/A
i from {0,…,159}
Bits 34816
159}
Bits 47112
{1,…,159}
Bits N/A
i from {0,…,159}
Bits 24
159}
Bits 24
{1,…,159}
CBs N/A
i from {0,…,159}
CBs 5
159}
CBs 6
{1,…,159}
Bits N/A
i from {0,…,159}
For Slot i = 80, 81 Bits 114940
Bits 82368
159}
Bits 109692
{1,…,79,82,…,159}
ETSI
FR2.120-1 (16QAM)
R.PDSCH.5-
Reference channel
7.1 TDD
Number of consecutive PDSCH symbols 12
MCS table 64QAM
MCS index 13
Modulation 16QAM
Number of DMRS rEs (Note 3) 6
Bits N/A
{7,8,9} for i from {0,…,39}
Bits 14344
from {0,…,39}
For Slot i, if mod(i, 10) = {0,2,3,4,5,6}
14344
for i from {1,…,19,22,…,39}
Bits N/A
{7,8,9} for i from {0,…,39}
24
from {0,…,39}
For Slot i, if mod(i, 10) = {0,2,3,4,5,6}
Bits 24
for i from {1,…,19,22,…,39}
CBs N/A
{7,8,9} for i from {0,…,39}
2
from {0,…,39}
For Slot i, if mod(i, 10) = {0,2,3,4,5,6}
CBs 2
for i from {1,…,19,22,…,39}
Bits N/A
{7,8,9} for i from {0,…,39}
Bits 28776
from {0,…,39}
For Slot i, if mod(i, 10) =
Bits 30360
{0,2,3,4,5,6}for i from {1,…,19,22,…,39}
Mbps 45.1836
frames
NOTE 3: Number of DMRS rEs includes the overhead of the DM-RS CDM groups without data.
ETSI
FR2.120-2 (16QAM)
R.PDSCH.5-
Reference channel
8.1 TDD
Number of consecutive PDSCH symbols 12
MCS table 64QAM
MCS index 13
Modulation 16QAM
Number of DMRS rEs (Note 3) 6
Bits N/A
{7,8,9} for i from {0,…,39}
Bits 14344
from {0,…,39}
For Slot i, if mod(i, 10) = {0,2,3,4,5,6}
14344
for i from {1,…,19,22,…,39}
Bits N/A
{7,8,9} for i from {0,…,39}
24
from {0,…,39}
For Slot i, if mod(i, 10) = {0,2,3,4,5,6}
Bits 24
for i from {1,…,19,22,…,39}
CBs N/A
{7,8,9} for i from {0,…,39}
2
from {0,…,39}
For Slot i, if mod(i, 10) = {0,2,3,4,5,6}
CBs 2
for i from {1,…,19,22,…,39}
Bits N/A
{7,8,9} for i from {0,…,39}
Bits 28776
from {0,…,39}
For Slot i, if mod(i, 10) =
Bits 30360
{0,2,3,4,5,6}for i from {1,…,19,22,…,39}
Mbps 42.3148
frames
NOTE 3: Number of DMRS rEs includes the overhead of the DM-RS CDM groups without data.
ETSI
A.3.2_1 Reference measurement channels for Sustained downlink

data rate performance requirements
A.3.2_1.1 FDD
A.3.2_1.1.1 Reference measurement channels for SCS 15 kHz FR1

Table A.3.2_1.1.1-2: Sustained Downlink Data Rate Reference Channel for FDD 15kHz SCS FR1
(64QAM)
Param Chann Subcar Alloca Number MC Modula Targ Num LDP Informa Transp Numb Binar Max.
eter el rier ted of S tion et ber C tion Bit ort er of y Throug
bandwi spacin resour consecu Ind Codi of Bas Payload block Code Chan hput
dth g ce tive ex ng MIM e per Slot CRC Block nel average
blocks PDSCH (No Rate O Gra for per s per Bits d over 2
symbols te layer ph allocate Slot Slot per frames
for 2) s d full for for Slot
allocate DL allocat alloca for
d full DL slots ed full ted alloca
slots (Note 1) DL full ted
(Note 1) slots DL full
(Note slots DL
1) (Note slots
1, 6) (Note
1)
MHz kHz PRBs Symbol Bits Bits CBs Bits Mbps
s
10 15 52 13 18 64QAM 0.46 1 1 20496 24 3 44928 17.422

20 15 106 13 18 64QAM 0.46 1 1 42016 24 5 91584 35.714
10 15 52 13 22 64QAM 0.65 1 1 29192 24 4 44928 24.813
20 15 106 13 22 64QAM 0.65 1 1 59432 24 8 91584 50.517
10 15 52 13 23 64QAM 0.7 1 1 31752 24 4 44928 26.989
20 15 106 13 23 64QAM 0.7 1 1 64552 24 8 91584 54.869
10 15 52 13 27 64QAM 0.89 1 1 39936 24 5 44928 33.946
20 15 106 13 27 64QAM 0.89 1 1 81976 24 10 91584 69.68
10 15 52 13 18 64QAM 0.46 2 1 40976 24 5 89856 34.83
20 15 106 13 18 64QAM 0.46 2 1 83976 24 10 18316 71.38
8
10 15 52 13 22 64QAM 0.65 2 1 58384 24 7 89856 49.626
20 15 106 13 22 64QAM 0.65 2 1 118896 24 15 18316 101.062
8
10 15 52 13 23 64QAM 0.7 2 1 63528 24 8 89856 53.999
20 15 106 13 23 64QAM 0.7 2 1 129128 24 16 18316 109.759
8
10 15 52 13 27 64QAM 0.89 2 1 79896 24 10 89856 67.912
20 15 106 13 27 64QAM 0.89 2 1 163976 24 20 18316 139.38
8
10 15 52 13 19 64QAM 0.5 4 1 83976 24 10 16473 71.38
6
20 15 106 13 19 64QAM 0.5 4 1 167976 24 20 33580 142.78
8
10 15 52 13 23 64QAM 0.7 4 1 114776 24 14 16473 97.56
6
20 15 106 13 23 64QAM 0.7 4 1 237776 24 29 33580 202.11
8
10 15 52 13 24 64QAM 0.75 4 1 125016 24 15 16473 106.264
6
ETSI
20 15 106 13 24 64QAM 0.75 4 1 254176 24 31 33580 216.05

8
10 15 52 13 27 64QAM 0.89 4 1 147576 24 18 16473 125.44
6
20 15 106 13 27 64QAM 0.89 4 1 295176 24 36 33580 250.9
8
Note 1: Allocated full DL slots are with slot index i, if i is not in {0,10,11} for i = 0,1,...,19. So total number of allocated
slots per 2 frames is 17.
Note 2: MCS Index is based on MCS Table defined in TS38.214 when 256QAM is not enabled. MCS 18 and 19 are
equivalent to MCS 11 and 12 in 256QAM table, respectively.
Note 3: Number of DMRS REs per RB = 12,12,24,24 for number of MIMO layers = 1,2,3,4, respectively
Note 4: SS/PBCH block is transmitted in slot #0 with periodicity 20 ms.
Note 5: Overhead parameter for TBS determination is 0.
Note 6: If more than one Code Block is present, an additional CRC sequence of L = 24 Bits is attached to each Code
Block (otherwise L = 0 Bit)
Table A.3.2_1.1.1-2: Sustained Downlink Data Rate Reference Channel for FDD 15kHz SCS FR1
(256QAM)
Para Chan Subc Allo Numb M Modu Tar Nu LD Infor Tran Num Bina Max.
mete nel arrier cate er of C lation get mb PC matio spor ber ry Throu
r band spaci d conse S Co er Ba n Bit t of Cha ghput
width ng reso cutive In din of se Paylo bloc Cod nnel avera
urce PDSC de g MIM Gr ad k e Bits ged
bloc H x Rat O ap per CRC Bloc per over
ks symb (N e laye h Slot per ks Slot 2
ols ot rs for Slot per for frame
for e alloca for Slot allo s
alloca 2) ted alloc for cate
ted full ated allo d
full DL full cate full
DL slots DL d DL
slots (Note slots full slot
(Note 1) (Not DL s
1) e 1) slot (Not
s e 1)
(Not
e 1,
6)
MHz kHz PRB Symb Bits Bits CBs Bits Mbps
s ols
10 15 52 13 20 256Q 0.6 1 1 39936 24 5 5990 33.94

AM 7 4 6
20 15 106 13 20 256Q 0.6 1 1 81976 24 10 1221 69.68
AM 7 12
10 15 52 13 21 256Q 0.6 1 1 42016 24 5 5990 35.71
AM 9 4 4
20 15 106 13 21 256Q 0.6 1 1 83976 24 10 1221 71.38
AM 9 12
10 15 52 13 26 256Q 0.9 1 1 53288 24 7 5990 45.29
AM 4 5
20 15 106 13 26 256Q 0.9 1 1 10855 24 13 1221 92.26
AM 2 12 9
10 15 52 13 20 256Q 0.6 2 1 79896 24 10 1198 67.91
AM 7 08 2
20 15 106 13 20 256Q 0.6 2 1 16397 24 20 2442 139.3
AM 7 6 24 8
10 15 52 13 21 256Q 0.6 2 1 83976 24 10 1198 71.38
AM 9 08
20 15 106 13 21 256Q 0.6 2 1 16797 24 20 2442 142.7
AM 9 6 24 8
25 15 133 13 21 256Q 0.6 2 1 21317 24 26 3064 181.2
AM 9 6 32
ETSI
10 15 52 13 26 256Q 0.9 2 1 10657 24 13 1198 90.59

AM 6 08
20 15 106 13 26 256Q 0.9 2 1 21712 24 26 2442 184.5
AM 8 24 59
10 15 52 13 22 256Q 0.7 4 1 15988 24 19 2196 135.8
AM 4 0 48 98
20 15 106 13 22 256Q 0.7 4 1 32788 24 39 4477 278.7
AM 4 8 44 05
10 15 52 13 23 256Q 0.7 4 1 17217 24 21 2196 146.3
AM 8 6 48 5
20 15 106 13 23 256Q 0.7 4 1 35244 24 42 4477 299.5
AM 8 0 44 74
25 15 133 13 23 256Q 0.7 4 1 43428 24 52 5617 369.1
AM 8 0 92 38
10 15 52 13 26 256Q 0.9 4 1 19677 24 24 2196 167.2
AM 6 48 6
20 15 106 13 26 256Q 0.9 4 1 40164 24 48 4477 341.3
AM 0 44 94
Note 1: Allocated full DL slots are with slot index i, if i is not in {0,10,11} for i = 0,1,...,19. So total number of allocated
slots per 2 frames is 17.
Note 2: MCS Index is based on MCS Table defined in TS38.214 when 256QAM is enabled.
A.3.2_1.2 TDD
A.3.2_1.2.1 Reference measurement channels for SCS 30 kHz FR1

Table A.3.2_1.2.1-1: Sustained Downlink Data Rate Reference Channel for TDD 30kHz SCS FR1
(64QAM)
(Note slots DL
1) (Note slots
1, 6) (Note
1)
s
20 30 51 13 18 64QAM 0.46 1 1 19968 24 3 44064 24.96

100 30 273 13 18 64QAM 0.46 1 1 106576 24 13 23587 133.22
2
20 30 51 13 22 64QAM 0.65 1 1 28680 24 4 44064 35.85
100 30 273 13 22 64QAM 0.65 1 1 151608 24 18 23587 189.51
2
20 30 51 13 23 64QAM 0.7 1 1 30728 24 4 44064 38.41
100 30 273 13 23 64QAM 0.7 1 1 163976 24 20 23587 204.97
2
20 30 51 13 27 64QAM 0.89 1 1 38936 24 5 44064 48.67
ETSI
100 30 273 13 27 64QAM 0.89 1 1 208976 24 25 23587 261.22

2
20 30 51 13 18 64QAM 0.46 2 1 39936 24 5 88128 49.92
100 30 273 13 18 64QAM 0.46 2 1 213176 24 26 47174 266.47
4
20 30 51 13 22 64QAM 0.65 2 1 57376 24 7 88128 71.72
100 30 273 13 22 64QAM 0.65 2 1 303240 24 36 47174 379.05
4
20 30 51 13 23 64QAM 0.7 2 1 61480 24 8 88128 76.85
100 30 273 13 23 64QAM 0.7 2 1 327888 24 39 47174 409.86
4
20 30 51 13 27 64QAM 0.89 2 1 77896 24 10 88128 97.37
100 30 273 13 27 64QAM 0.89 2 1 417976 24 50 47174 522.47
4
20 30 51 13 19 64QAM 0.5 4 1 81976 24 10 16156 102.47
8
100 30 273 13 19 64QAM 0.5 4 1 434280 24 52 86486 542.85
4
20 30 51 13 23 64QAM 0.7 4 1 112648 24 14 16156 140.81
8
100 30 273 13 23 64QAM 0.7 4 1 606504 24 72 86486 758.13
4
20 30 51 13 24 64QAM 0.75 4 1 120936 24 15 16156 151.17
8
100 30 273 13 24 64QAM 0.75 4 1 655800 24 78 86486 819.75
4
20 30 51 13 27 64QAM 0.89 4 1 143400 24 18 16156 179.25
8
100 30 273 13 27 64QAM 0.89 4 1 770568 24 92 86486 963.21
4
Note 1: Allocated full DL slots are with slot index i, if mod(i,10) = 0,1,2,3,4,5,6 and i is not in {0,20,21} for i = 0,1,...,39.
So total number of allocated slots per 2 frames is 25.
Note 2: MCS Index is based on MCS Table defined in TS38.214 when 256QAM is not enabled. MCS 18 and 19 are
equivalent to MCS 11 and 12 in 256QAM table, respectively.
Table A.3.2_1.2.1-2: Sustained Downlink Data Rate Reference Channel for TDD 30kHz SCS
FR1(256QAM)
(Note slots DL
1) (Note slots
1, 6) (Note
1)
s
20 30 51 13 20 256QA 0.67 1 1 38936 24 5 58752 48.67

M
ETSI
100 30 273 13 20 256QA 0.67 1 1 208976 24 25 31449 261.22

M 6
20 30 51 13 21 256QA 0.69 1 1 40976 24 5 58752 51.22
M
100 30 273 13 21 256QA 0.69 1 1 217128 24 26 31449 271.41
M 6
20 30 51 13 26 256QA 0.9 1 1 52224 24 7 58752 65.28
M
100 30 273 13 26 256QA 0.9 1 1 278776 24 34 31449 348.47
M 6
20 30 51 13 20 256QA 0.67 2 1 77896 24 10 11750 97.37
M 4
100 30 273 13 20 256QA 0.67 2 1 417976 24 50 62899 522.47
M 2
20 30 51 13 21 256QA 0.69 2 1 81976 24 10 11750 102.47
M 4
100 30 273 13 21 256QA 0.69 2 1 434280 24 52 62899 542.85
M 2
20 30 51 13 26 256QA 0.9 2 1 104496 24 13 11750 130.62
M 4
100 30 273 13 26 256QA 0.9 2 1 557416 24 67 62899 696.77
M 2
20 30 51 13 22 256QA 0.74 4 1 159880 24 19 21542 199.85
M 4
100 30 273 13 22 256QA 0.74 4 1 852696 24 102 11531 1065.87
M 52
20 30 51 13 23 256QA 0.78 4 1 167976 24 20 21542 209.97
M 4
100 30 273 13 23 256QA 0.78 4 1 901344 24 107 11531 1126.68
M 52
20 30 51 13 26 256QA 0.9 4 1 192624 24 23 21542 240.78
M 4
100 30 273 13 26 256QA 0.9 4 1 1032192 24 123 11531 1290.24
M 52
Note 1: Allocated full DL slots are with slot index i, if mod(i,10) = 0,1,2,3,4,5,6 and i is not in {0,20,21} for i = 0,1,...,39.
So total number of allocated slots per 2 frames is 25.
Note 2: MCS Index is based on MCS Table defined in TS38.214 when 256QAM is enabled.
ETSI
A.3.3 Reference measurement channels for PDCCH performance

requirements
A.3.3.1 FDD

Table A.3.3.1.1-1: PDCCH Reference Channels (Time domain allocation 1 symbol)
Reference channel R.PDCCH.1- R.PDCCH.1- R.PDCCH.1-
1.1 FDD 1.2 FDD 1.3 FDD
CORESET 48 48 48
frequency domain
allocation
CORESET time 1 1 1
domain allocation
Aggregation level 4 4 8
DCI Format 1_0 1_1 1_1
Payload (without Bits 39 52 52
CRC)
Table A.3.3.1.1-2: PDCCH Reference Channel (Time domain allocation 2 symbols)

Reference channel R.PDCCH.1- R.PDCCH.1- R.PDCCH.1- R.PDCCH.1- R.PDCCH.1- R.PDCCH.1-
2.1 FDD 2.2 FDD 2.3 FDD 2.4 FDD 2.5 FDD 2.6 FDD
Subcarrier spacing kHz 15 15 15 15 15 15
CORESET 24 24 24 48 48 48
frequency domain
allocation
CORESET time 2 2 2 2 2 2
domain allocation
Aggregation level 2 4 2 4 8 16
DCI Format 1_0 1_0 1_1 1_1 1_1 1_0
Payload (without Bits 39 39 52 52 52 39
CRC)


1.1 FDD 1.2 FDD 1.3 FDD
CORESET [102] [102] 90
frequency domain
allocation
CORESET time 1 1 1
domain allocation
CRC)
ETSI

Reference channel R.PDCCH.2-
2.1 FDD
CORESET 48
frequency domain
allocation
CORESET time 2
domain allocation
Aggregation level 16
DCI Format 1_0
Payload (without Bits 41
CRC)
A.3.3.2 TDD


1.1 TDD 1.2 TDD 1.3 TDD
CORESET 48 48 48
frequency domain
allocation
CORESET time 1 1 1
domain allocation
CRC)

Reference channel R.PDCCH.1- R.PDCCH.1- R.PDCCH.1- R.PDCCH.1- R.PDCCH.1- R.PDCCH.1-
2.1 TDD 2.2 TDD 2.3 TDD 2.4 TDD 2.5 TDD 2.6 TDD
Subcarrier spacing kHz 15 15 15 15 15 15
CORESET 24 24 24 48 48 48
frequency domain
allocation
CORESET time 2 2 2 2 2 2
domain allocation
Aggregation level 2 4 2 4 8 16
DCI Format 1_0 1_0 1_1 1_1 1_1 1_0
Payload (without Bits 39 39 52 52 52 39
CRC)
ETSI

1.1 TDD 1.2 TDD 1.3 TDD
CORESET [102] [102] 90
frequency domain
allocation
CORESET time 1 1 1
domain allocation
CRC)

2.1 TDD
CORESET 48
frequency domain
allocation
CORESET time 2
domain allocation
DCI Format 1_0
CRC)

1.1 TDD 1.2 TDD 1.3 TDD
CORESET 60 60 60
frequency domain
allocation
CORESET time 1 1 1
domain allocation
CRC)
ETSI

2.1 TDD
CORESET 60
frequency domain
allocation
CORESET time 2
domain allocation
DCI Format 1_0
CRC)
A.4 CSI reference measurement channels

This clause defines the DL signal applicable to the reporting of channel status information (Clause X).
Tables in this clause specifies the mapping of CQI index to Information Bit payload, which complies with the CQI
definition specified in Clause 5.2.2.1 of TS 38.214 [12] and with MCS definition specified in Clause 5.1.3 of TS 38.214
[12]
Table A.4-1: Mapping of CQI Index to Information Bit payload (CQI table 1)
TBS Scheme TBS.1-1 TBS.1-2

MCS table 64QAM
Number of allocated PDSCH resource blocks 66 66
Number of consecutive PDSCH symbols 12 12
Number of PDSCH MIMO layers 1 2
Available RE-s 7920 7920
CQI index Spectral MCS index Modulation Information Bit Payload per Slot
efficiency
0 OOR OOR OOR N/A N/A
1 0.1523 0 1800 3624
2 0.2344 0 1800 3624
3 0.3770 2 2856 5640
QPSK
4 0.6016 4 4480 8968
5 0.8770 6 6528 13064
6 1.1758 8 8712 17928
7 1.4766 11 11016 22032
8 1.9141 13 16QAM 14343 28680
9 2.4063 15 17928 35856
10 2.7305 18 20496 40976
11 3.3223 20 25104 50184
12 3.9023 22 29192 58384
64QAM
13 4.5234 24 33816 67584
14 5.1152 26 38936 77896
15 5.5547 28 42016 83976
NOTE: Number of DMRS REs includes the overhead of the DM-RS CDM groups without data.
ETSI
Table A.4-2: Mapping of CQI Index to Information Bit payload (CQI table 2)
TBS Scheme TBS.2-1 TBS.2-2 TBS.2-3 TBS.2-4

MCS table 256QAM
Number of allocated PDSCH resource blocks 52 52 106 106
Number of consecutive PDSCH symbols 12 12 12 12
Number of PDSCH MIMO layers 1 2 1 2
Number of DMRS REs (Note 1) 24 24 24 24
Available RE-s for PDSCH 7920 7920 12720 12720
CQI index Spectral MCS index Modulation Information Bit Payload per Slot
efficiency
0 OOR OOR OOR N/A N/A N/A N/A
1 0.1523 0 1480 2976 2976 5896
2 0.3770 1 QPSK 2408 4744 4744 9480
3 0.8770 3 5504 11016 11016 22536
4 1.4766 5 9224 18432 18960 37896
5 1.9141 7 16QAM 12040 24072 24576 49176
6 2.4063 9 15112 30216 30728 61480
7 2.7305 11 16896 33816 34816 69672
8 3.3223 13 20496 40976 42016 83976
9 3.9023 15 64QAM 24576 49176 49176 98376
10 4.5234 17 28168 56368 57376 114776
11 5.1152 19 31752 63528 65576 131176
12 5.5547 21 34816 69672 69672 139376
13 6.2266 23 38936 77896 79896 159880
256QAM
14 6.9141 25 43032 86040 88064 176208
15 7.4063 27 46104 92200 94248 188576
NOTE: Number of DMRS REs includes the overhead of the DM-RS CDM groups without data.
A.5 OFDMA Channel Noise Generator (OCNG)
A.5.1 OCNG Patterns for FDD

A.5.1.1 OCNG FDD pattern 1: Generic OCNG FDD Pattern for all unused
REs
Table A.5.1.1-1: OP.1 FDD: Generic OCNG FDD Pattern for all unused REs
OCNG Appliance Control Region Data Region
OCNG Parameters (CORESET)
Resources allocated All unused REs (Note 1) All unused REs (Note 2)
Structure PDCCH PDSCH
Content Uncorrelated pseudo random Uncorrelated pseudo random QPSK
QPSK modulated data modulated data
Transmission scheme for multiple Single Tx port transmission Spatial multiplexing using any
antennas ports transmission precoding matrix with dimensions
same as the precoding matrix for
PDSCH
Subcarrier Spacing Same as for RMC PDCCH in Same as for RMC PDSCH in the
the active BWP active BWP
Power Level Same as for RMC PDCCH Same as for RMC PDSCH
NOTE 1: All unused REs in the active CORESETS appointed by the search spaces in use.
NOTE 2: Unused available REs refer to REs in PRBs not allocated for any physical channels, CORESETs,
synchronization signals or reference signals in channel bandwidth.
ETSI
A.5.2 OCNG Patterns for TDD

A.5.2.1 OCNG TDD pattern 1: Generic OCNG TDD Pattern for all unused
REs
Table A.5.2.1-1: OP.1 TDD: Generic OCNG TDD Pattern for all unused REs
OCNG Appliance Control Region Data Region

OCNG Parameters (CORESET)
Resources allocated All unused REs (Note 1) All unused REs (Note 2)
Structure PDCCH PDSCH
Content Uncorrelated pseudo random Uncorrelated pseudo random QPSK
QPSK modulated data modulated data
Transmission scheme for multiple Single Tx port transmission Spatial multiplexing using any
antennas ports transmission precoding matrix with dimensions
same as the precoding matrix for
PDSCH
Subcarrier Spacing Same as for RMC PDCCH in Same as for RMC PDSCH in the
the active BWP active BWP
Power Level Same as for RMC PDCCH Same as for RMC PDSCH
NOTE 1: All unused REs in the active CORESETS appointed by the search spaces in use.
NOTE 2: Unused available REs refer to REs in PRBs not allocated for any physical channels, CORESETs,
synchronization signals or reference signals in channel bandwidth.
ETSI
Annex B (normative):
Propagation conditions
B.1 Static propagation condition
B.1.1 UE Receiver with 2Rx

For 1 port transmission the channel matrix is defined in the frequency domain by:
1
H =   .
1
1 j 
H =  

.
1 − j 
1 1 j j 
H= 
1 1 − j − j 
1 1 1 1 j j j j
H=  
1 1 1 1 − j − j − j − j
B.1.2 UE Receiver with 4Rx

1
 
1
 
H=
1
 
1 .
1 j 


1 − j 
H=
1 j 
 
1 − j .
1 1 j j 


1 1 −j − j 
H=
1 −1 j − j
 
1 −1 − j j .
ETSI
1 1 1 1 j j j j 


1 1 1 1 −j −j −j − j 
H=
1 1 −1 −1 j j −j − j
 
1 1 −1 −1 − j − j j j 
B.2 Multi-path fading propagation conditions

The multipath propagation conditions consist of several parts:
- A delay profile in the form of a "tapped delay-line", characterized by a number of taps at fixed positions on a
sampling grid. The profile can be further characterized by the r.m.s. delay spread and the maximum delay
spanned by the taps.
- A combination of channel model parameters that include the Delay profile and the Doppler spectrum that is
characterized by a classical spectrum shape and a maximum Doppler frequency.
- Different models are used for FR1 (below 6 GHz) and FR2 (above 6 GHz).
B.2.1 Delay profiles

The delay profiles are simplified from the TR 38.901 TDL models. The simplification steps are shown below for
information. These steps are only used when new delay profiles are created. Otherwise, the delay profiles specified in
clauses B.2.1.1 and B.2.1.2 can be used as such.
Step 1: Use the original TDL model from TR38.901.
Step 2: Re-order the taps in ascending delays
Step 3: Perform delay scaling according to the procedure described in subclause 7.7.3 in TR 38.901 [15].
Step 4: Apply the quantization to the delay resolution 5 ns. This is done simply by rounding the tap delays to the
nearest multiple of the delay resolution.
Step 5: If multiple taps are rounded to the same delay bin, merge them by calculating their linear power sum.
Step 6: If there are more than 12 taps in the quantized model, merge the taps as follows:
- Find the weakest tap from all taps (both merged and unmerged taps are considered)
- If there are two or more taps having the same value and are the weakest, select the tap with the smallest
delay as the weakest tap.
- When the weakest tap is the first delay tap, merge taps as follows:
- Update the power of the first delay tap as the linear power sum of the weakest tap and the second delay
tap.
- Remove the second delay tap.
- When the weakest tap is the last delay tap, merge taps as follows:
- Update the power of the last delay tap as the linear power sum of the second-to-last tap and the last tap.
- Remove the second-to-last tap.
- Otherwise
- For each side of the weakest tap, identify the neighbour tap that has the smaller delay difference to the
weakest tap.
ETSI
- When the delay difference between the weakest tap and the identified neighbour tap on one side
equals the delay difference between the weakest tap and the identified neighbour tap on the other side.
- Select the neighbour tap that is weaker in power for merging.
- Otherwise, select the neighbour tap that has smaller delay difference for merging.
- To merge, the power of the merged tap is the linear sum of the power of the weakest tap and the selected
tap.
- When the selected tap is the first tap, the location of the merged tap is the location of the first tap. The
weakest tap is removed.
- When the selected tap is the last tap, the location of the merged tap is the location of the last tap. The
weakest tap is removed.
- Otherwise, the location of the merged tap is based on the average delay of the weakest tap and selected
tap. If the average delay is on the sampling grid, the location of the merged tap is the average delay.
Merge two parallel taps with different delays (average delay, sum power) starting from the weakest ones.
 
Otherwise, the location of the merged tap is rounded towards the direction of the selected tap (e.g. 10 ns
& 20 ns 15 ns, 10 ns & 25 ns 20 ns, if 25 ns had higher or equal power; 15 ns, if 10 ns had higher
power). The weakest tap and the selected tap are removed.
- Repeat step 6 until the final number of taps is 12.
Step 7: Round the amplitudes of taps to one decimal (e.g. -8.78 dB  -8.8 dB)
Step 8: If the delay spread has slightly changed due to the tap merge, adjust the final delay spread by increasing or
decreasing the power of the last tap so that the delay spread is corrected.
Step 9: Re-normalize tap powers such that the strongest tap is at 0dB.
NOTE 1: Some values of the delay profile created by the simplification steps may differ from the values in tables
B.2.1.1-2, B.2.1.1-3, B.2.1.1-4, B.2.1.2-2, and B.2.1.1-3 for the corresponding model.
NOTE 2: For Step 5 and Step 6, the power values are expressed in the linear domain using 6 digits of precision.
The operations are in the linear domain.
B.2.1.1 Delay profiles for FR1

The delay profiles for FR1 are selected to be representative of low, medium and high delay spread environment. The
resulting model parameters are specified in B.2.1.1-1 and the tapped delay line models are specified in Tables B.2.1.1-2
~ Table B.2.1.1-4.
Table B.2.1.1-1: Delay profiles for NR channel models

Model Number of Delay spread Maximum excess Delay resolution
channel taps (r.m.s.) tap delay (span)
TDLA30 12 30 ns 290 ns 5 ns
TDLB100 12 100 ns 480 ns 5 ns
TDLC300 12 300 ns 2595 ns 5 ns
ETSI
Table B.2.1.1-2: TDLA30 (DS = 30 ns)

Tap # Delay [ns] Power [dB] Fading distribution
1 0 -15.5 Rayleigh
2 10 0 Rayleigh
3 15 -5.1 Rayleigh
4 20 -5.1 Rayleigh
5 25 -9.6 Rayleigh
6 50 -8.2 Rayleigh
7 65 -13.1 Rayleigh
8 75 -11.5 Rayleigh
9 105 -11.0 Rayleigh
10 135 -16.2 Rayleigh
11 150 -16.6 Rayleigh
12 290 -26.2 Rayleigh
Table B.2.1.1-3: TDLB100 (DS = 100ns)

1 0 0 Rayleigh
2 10 -2.2 Rayleigh
3 20 -0.6 Rayleigh
4 30 -0.6 Rayleigh
5 35 -0.3 Rayleigh
6 45 -1.2 Rayleigh
7 55 -5.9 Rayleigh
8 120 -2.2 Rayleigh
9 170 -0.8 Rayleigh
Table B.2.1.1-4: TDLC300 (DS = 300 ns)

1 0 -6.9 Rayleigh
2 65 0 Rayleigh
3 70 -7.7 Rayleigh
4 190 -2.5 Rayleigh
5 195 -2.4 Rayleigh
6 200 -9.9 Rayleigh
7 240 -8.0 Rayleigh
8 325 -6.6 Rayleigh
9 520 -7.1 Rayleigh
10 1045 -13.0 Rayleigh
11 1510 -14.2 Rayleigh
12 2595 -16.0 Rayleigh
B.2.1.2 Delay profiles for FR2

The delay profiles for FR2 are specified in clause B.2.1.2-1 and the tapped delay line models are specified in Tables
B.2.1.2-2.
Table B.2.1.2-1: Delay profiles for NR channel models

Model Number of Delay spread Maximum excess Delay resolution
channel taps (r.m.s.) tap delay (span)
TDLA30 12 30 ns 290 ns 5 ns
TDLC60 12 60 ns 520 ns 5 ns
ETSI
Table B.2.1.2-2: TDLA30 (DS = 30 ns)

1 0 -15.5 Rayleigh
2 10 0 Rayleigh
3 15 -5.1 Rayleigh
4 20 -5.1 Rayleigh
5 25 -9.6 Rayleigh
6 50 -8.2 Rayleigh
7 65 -13.1 Rayleigh
8 75 -11.5 Rayleigh
10 135 -16.2 Rayleigh
11 150 -16.6 Rayleigh
12 290 -26.2 Rayleigh
Table B.2.1.2-3: TDLC60 (DS = 60 ns)

1 0 -7.8 Rayleigh
2 15 -0.3 Rayleigh
3 40 0 Rayleigh
4 50 -8.9 Rayleigh
5 55 -14.5 Rayleigh
6 75 -8.5 Rayleigh
7 80 -10.2 Rayleigh
10 300 -15.2 Rayleigh
11 360 -16.9 Rayleigh
12 520 -19.4 Rayleigh
B.2.2 Combinations of channel model parameters

The propagation conditions used for the performance measurements in multi-path fading environment are indicated as a
combination of a channel model name and a maximum Doppler frequency, i.e. TDLA<DS>-<Doppler>, TDLB<DS>-
<Doppler> or TDLC<DS>-<Doppler> where '<DS>' indicates the desired delay spread and '<Doppler>' indicates the
maximum Doppler frequency (Hz).
Table B.2.2-1 and Table B.2.2-2 show the propagation conditions that are used for the performance measurements in
multi-path fading environment for low, medium and high Doppler frequencies for FR1 and FR2, respectively.
Table B.2.2-1: Channel model parameters for FR1

Combination name Model Maximum Doppler
frequency
TDLA30-5 TDLA30 5 Hz
TDLB100-400 TDLB100 400 Hz
TDLC300-100 TDLC300 100 Hz
Table B.2.2-2: Channel model parameters for FR2

Combination name Model Maximum Doppler
frequency
TDLC60-300 TDLC60 300 Hz
ETSI
B.2.3 MIMO Channel Correlation Matrices

The MIMO channel correlation matrices defined in clause B.2.3 apply for the antenna configuration using uniform
linear arrays at both gNB and UE and for the antenna configuration using cross polarized antennas.
B.2.3.1 MIMO Correlation Matrices using Uniform Linear Array (ULA)

The MIMO channel correlation matrices defined in clause B.2.3.1 apply for the antenna configuration using uniform
linear array (ULA) at both gNB and UE.
B.2.3.1.1 Definition of MIMO Correlation Matrices

Table B.2.3.1.1-1 defines the correlation matrix for the gNB.
Table B.2.3.1.1-1: gNB correlation matrix

One antenna Two antennas Four antennas
1 4
 1 α 9
α 9
α 
 
α  19 * 1 4
1 
α 1 α 9
α 9
RgNB = 1 RgNB = ∗  RgNB = 4 
α
gNB Correlation  1 1

1  α 9* α 9*
1 α 9
 
 4 1

 α α α
* 9* 9*
1 
Table B.2.3.1.1-2 defines the correlation matrix for the UE:
Table B.2.3.1.1-2 UE correlation matrix

One antenna Two antennas Four antennas
 1 4 
 1 β 9 β 9 β 
 1 * 
1 β β 9 1 β
1
9 β
4
9 
RUE = 1 RUE =  ∗ 
 RUE =  4 * 1 * 
β 1 
UE Correlation 1
β 9 β 9 1 β 9 
 4 * 1 * 
 β* β 9 β 9 1 
 
Table B.2.3.1.1-3 defines the channel spatial correlation matrix Rspat . The parameters, α and β in Table B.2.3.1-3
defines the spatial correlation between the antennas at the gNB and UE.
ETSI
Table B.2.3.1.1-3: Rspat correlation matrices
 1 β
Rspat = RUE =  *
1x2 case
β 1 
1 4
 1 β 9
β 9
β 
 
*
 19 1 4 
β 1 β 9
β 9
1x4 case
Rspat = RUE = 4 * 1 * 1

 
β 9 β 9
1 β 9
 
4 * 1 *
 
 β β β
* 9 9
1 
 1 α
Rspat = RgNB = 
2x1 case
α
*
1 
 1 β
α αβ 

 1 α  1 β 
β* 1 αβ * α 
Rspat = RgNB ⊗ RUE =  ⊗ * =
2x2 case
α
*
1  β 1   α
*
α *β 1 β 
 * * 
α β α β
* *
1 
1 4
 1 β 9
β 9
β 
 
1 1 4
1 α   β 9* 1 β 9
β 9
Rspat = RgNB ⊗ RUE =  ∗ ⊗
 
α
2x4 case 1   β 4 9* 1 1
β 9*
1 β 9
 
4 1
 β*
 β 9*
β 9*
1 
1 4
 1 α 9
α 9 
α
 
*
 19 1 4 

α 1 α 9
α 9
Rspat = RgNB =
4x1 case  4 9* 1 *
1 
α α α 9
9
1
 4 *
1 * 
 α α α
* 9 9
 1 
1 4
 1 α 9
α 9
α
 
*
 19 1 4 

α 1 α 9
α  1
9
β
Rspat = RgNB ⊗ RUE = ⊗ *
4x2 case  4 9*
α 9  β
1  1 
*
1
α α 9
1
 4 *
1 * 
 α α α
* 9 9
1 
1 4
 1 α α  
α 1 4

β β β
9 9 9 9
   1 
*
 19 1 4  1 1 4

α 1 α 9
α 9   β 9* 1 β 9
β 9 
4x4 case
Rspat = RgNB ⊗ RUE = ⊗ 4 
 4 * *
1  1 1
α 9   β 9 
1
α
9
α 9
1
*
β 9*
1 β 9

 * *   4 1

1   β β β
4 1 * 9* 9*
 α α α 1
* 9 9

For cases with more antennas at either gNB or UE or both, the channel spatial correlation matrix can still be expressed
as the Kronecker product of RgNB and RUE according to Rspat = RgNB ⊗ RUE .
ETSI
B.2.3.1.2 MIMO Correlation Matrices at High, Medium and Low Level

The α and β for different correlation types are given in Table B.2.3.1.2-1.
Table B.2.3.1.2-1: The α and β parameters for ULA MIMO correlation matrices
Correlation Model α β
Low correlation 0 0
Medium 0.3 0.9
Correlation
Medium 0.3 0.3874
Correlation A
High Correlation 0.9 0.9
The correlation matrices for high, medium, medium A and low correlation are defined in Tables B.2.3.1.2-2, B.2.3.1.2-
3, B.2.3.1.2-4 and B.2.3.1.2-5 as below.
The values in Table B.2.3.1.2-2 have been adjusted for the 4x2 and 4x4 high correlation cases to insure the correlation
matrix is positive semi-definite after round-off to 4 digit precision. This is done using the equation:
R high = [ R spat + aI n ] /(1 + a )
Where the value "a" is a scaling factor such that the smallest value is used to obtain a positive semi-definite result. For
the 4x2 high correlation case, a=0.00010. For the 4x4 high correlation case, a=0.00012.
The same method is used to adjust the 2x4 and 4x4 medium correlation matrix in Table B.2.3.1.2-3 to insure the
correlation matrix is positive semi-definite after round-off to 4 digit precision with a = 0.00010 and a = 0.00012.
ETSI
Table B.2.3.1.2-2: MIMO correlation matrices for high correlation
 1 0.9 
Rhigh =  

1x2 case
 0 .9 1 
 1 0.9 
Rhigh =  

2x1 case
 0.9 1 
 1 0.9 0.9 0.81

 
 0.9 1 0.81 0.9 
Rhigh = 
2x2 case 0.9 0.81 1 0.9 
 
 0.81 0.9 0.9 1 
 
 1.0000 0.8999 0.9883 0.8894 0.9542 0.8587 0.8999 0.8099



0.8999 1.0000 0.8894 0.9883 0.8587 0.9542 0.8099 0.8999
 0.9883 0.8894 1.0000 0.8999 0.9883 0.8894 0.9542 0.8587 
 
 0.8894 0.9883 0.8999 1.0000 0.8894 0.9883 0.8587 0.9542
4x2 case
Rhigh =
 0.9542 0.8587 0.9883 0.8894 1.0000 0.8999 0.9883 0.8894
 
 0.8587 0.9542 0.8894 0.9883 0.8999 1.0000 0.8894 0.9883
 0.8999 0.8099 0.9542 0.8587 0.9883 0.8894 1.0000 0.8999
 

 0.8099 0.8999 0.8587 0.9542 0.8894 0.9883 0.8999 1.0000
 1.0000 0.9882 0.9541 0.8999 0.9882 0.9767 0.9430 0.8894 0.9541 0.9430 0.9105 0.8587 0.8999 0.8894 0.8587 0.8099


0.9882 1.0000 0.9882 0.9541 0.9767 0.9882 0.9767 0.9430 0.9430 0.9541 0.9430 0.9105 0.8894 0.8999 0.8894 0.8587
 0.9541 0.9882 1.0000 0.9882 0.9430 0.9767 0.9882 0.9767 0.9105 0.9430 0.9541 0.9430 0.8587 0.8894 0.8999 0.8894
 
 0.8999 0.9541 0.9882 1.0000 0.8894 0.9430 0.9767 0.9882 0.8587 0.9105 0.9430 0.9541 0.8099 0.8587 0.8894 0.8999
 0.9882 0.9767 0.9430 0.8894 1.0000 0.9882 0.9541 0.8999 0.9882 0.9767 0.9430 0.8894 0.9541 0.9430 0.9105 0.8587
 
 0.9767 0.9882 0.9767 0.9430 0.9882 1.0000 0.9882 0.9541 0.9767 0.9882 0.9767 0.9430 0.9430 0.9541 0.9430 0.9105
 0.9430 0.9767 0.9882 0.9767 0.9541 0.9882 1.0000 0.9882 0.9430 0.9767 0.9882 0.9767 0.9105 0.9430 0.9541 0.9430
 
 0.8894 0.9430 0.9767 0.9882 0.8999 0.9541 0.9882 1.0000 0.8894 0.9430 0.9767 0.9882 0.8587 0.9105 0.9430 0.9541

Rhigh = 
4x4 case 0.9541 0.9430 0.9105 0.8587 0.9882 0.9767 0.9430 0.8894 1.0000 0.9882 0.9541 0.8999 0.9882 0.9767 0.9430 0.8894
 
 0.9430 0.9541 0.9430 0.9105 0.9767 0.9882 0.9767 0.9430 0.9882 1.0000 0.9882 0.9541 0.9767 0.9882 0.9767 0.9430
 

0.9105 0.9430 0.9541 0.9430 0.9430 0.9767 0.9882 0.9767 0.9541 0.9882 1.0000 0.9882 0.9430 0.9767 0.9882 0.9767
 0.8587 0.9105 0.9430 0.9541 0.8894 0.9430 0.9767 0.9882 0.8999 0.9541 0.9882 1.0000 0.8894 0.9430 0.9767 0.9882
 
 0.8999 0.8894 0.8587 0.8099 0.9541 0.9430 0.9105 0.8587 0.9882 0.9767 0.9430 0.8894 1.0000 0.9882 0.9541 0.8999
 
0.8894 0.8999 0.8894 0.8587 0.9430 0.9541 0.9430 0.9105 0.9767 0.9882 0.9767 0.9430 0.9882 1.0000 0.9882 0.9541
 
 0.8587 0.8894 0.8999 0.8894 0.9105 0.9430 0.9541 0.9430 0.9430 0.9767 0.9882 0.9767 0.9541 0.9882 1.0000 0.9882
 0.8099 0.8587 0.8894 0.8999 0.8587 0.9105 0.9430 0.9541 0.8894 0.9430 0.9767 0.9882 0.8999 0.9541 0.9882 1.0000

ETSI
Table B.2.3.1.2-3: MIMO correlation matrices for medium correlation

1x2
N/A
case
2x1
N/A
case
 1 0.9 0.3 0.27 
 
 0.9 1 0.27 0.3 
2x2 Rmedium = 
case 0.3 0.27 1 0.9 
 
 0.27 0.3 0.9 1 
 
 1.0000 0.9882 0.9541 0.8999 0.3000 0.2965 0.2862 0.2700

 
 0.9882 1.0000 0.9882 0.9541 0.2965 0.3000 0.2965 0.2862 

0.9541 0.9882 1.0000 0.9882 0.2862 0.2965 0.3000 0.2965 
 
2x4  0.8999 0.9541 0.9882 1.0000 0.2700 0.2862 0.2965 0.3000 
case Rmedium =  

0.3000 0.2965 0.2862 0.2700 1.0000 0.9882 0.9541 0.8999 
 0.2965 0.3000 0.2965 0.2862 0.9882 1.0000 0.9882 0.9541 
 
 0.2862 0.2965 0.3000 0.2965 0.9541 0.9882 1.0000 0.9882 
 0.2700 0.2862 0.2965 0.3000 0.8999 0.9541 0.9882 1.0000 

 1.0000 0.9000 0.8748 0.7873 0.5856 0.5271 0.3000 0.2700

 
 0.9000 1.0000 0.7873 0.8748 0.5271 0.5856 0.2700 0.3000

0.8748 0.7873 1.0000 0.9000 0.8748 0.7873 0.5856 0.5271
 
 0.7873 0.8748 0.9000 1.0000 0.7873 0.8748 0.5271 0.5856 
4x2 Rmedium =  
case 
0.5856 0.5271 0.8748 0.7873 1.0000 0.9000 0.8748 0.7873 
 0.5271 0.5856 0.7873 0.8748 0.9000 1.0000 0.7873 0.8748 
 
 0.3000 0.2700 0.5856 0.5271 0.8748 0.7873 1.0000 0.9000

 0.2700 0.3000 0.5271 0.5856 0.7873 0.8748 0.9000 1.0000
1.0000 0.9882 0.9541 0.8999 0.8747 0.8645 0.8347 0.7872 0.5855 0.5787 0.5588 0.5270 0.3000 0.2965 0.2862 0.2700
 
 0.9882 1.0000 0.9882 0.9541 0.8645 0.8747 0.8645 0.8347 0.5787 0.5855 0.5787 0.5588 0.2965 0.3000 0.2965 0.2862
 0.9541 0.9882 1.0000 0.9882 0.8347 0.8645 0.8747 0.8645 0.5588 0.5787 0.5855 0.5787 0.2862 0.2965 0.3000 0.2965
 
 0.8999 0.9541 0.9882 1.0000 0.7872 0.8347 0.8645 0.8747 0.5270 0.5588 0.5787 0.5855 0.2700 0.2862 0.2965 0.3000
 

0.8747 0.8645 0.8347 0.7872 1.0000 0.9882 0.9541 0.8999 0.8747 0.8645 0.8347 0.7872 0.5855 0.5787 0.5588 0.5270
 0.8645 0.8747 0.8645 0.8347 0.9882 1.0000 0.9882 0.9541 0.8645 0.8747 0.8645 0.8347 0.5787 0.5855 0.5787 0.5588
 
 0.8347 0.8645 0.8747 0.8645 0.9541 0.9882 1.0000 0.9882 0.8347 0.8645 0.8747 0.8645 0.5588 0.5787 0.5855 0.5787
 0.7872 0.8347 0.8645 0.8747 0.8999 0.9541 0.9882 1.0000 0.7872 0.8347 0.8645 0.8747 0.5270 0.5588 0.5787 0.5855
4x4 Rmedium=  
 0.5855 0.5787 0.5588 0.5270 0.8747 0.8645 0.8347 0.7872 1.0000 0.9882 0.9541 0.8999 0.8747 0.8645 0.8347 0.7872
case 
0.5787 0.5855 0.5787 0.5588 0.8645 0.8747 0.8645 0.8347 0.9882 1.0000 0.9882 0.9541 0.8645 0.8747 0.8645 0.8347
 
 0.5588 0.5787 0.5855 0.5787 0.8347 0.8645 0.8747 0.8645 0.9541 0.9882 1.0000 0.9882 0.8347 0.8645 0.8747 0.8645
 
 0.5270 0.5588 0.5787 0.5855 0.7872 0.8347 0.8645 0.8747 0.8999 0.9541 0.9882 1.0000 0.7872 0.8347 0.8645 0.8747
 0.3000 0.2965 0.2862 0.2700 0.5855 0.5787 0.5588 0.5270 0.8747 0.8645 0.8347 0.7872 1.0000 0.9882 0.9541 0.8999
 
 0.2965 0.3000 0.2965 0.2862 0.5787 0.5855 0.5787 0.5588 0.8645 0.8747 0.8645 0.8347 0.9882 1.0000 0.9882 0.9541
 0.2862 0.2965 0.3000 0.2965 0.5588 0.5787 0.5855 0.5787 0.8347 0.8645 0.8747 0.8645 0.9541 0.9882 1.0000 0.9882
 
 0.2700
 0.2862 0.2965 0.3000 0.5270 0.5588 0.5787 0.5855 0.7872 0.8347 0.8645 0.8747 0.8999 0.9541 0.9882 1.0000 
ETSI
Table B.2.3.1.2-4: MIMO correlation matrices for medium correlation A
 1.0000 0.9000 0.6561 0.3874 0.3000 0.2700 0.1968 0.1162 

 
 0.9000 1.0000 0.9000 0.6561 0.2700 0.3000 0.2700 0.1968 
 0.6561 0.9000 1.0000 0.9000 0.1968 0.2700 0.3000 0.2700 
 
 0.3874 0.6561 0.9000 1.0000 0.1162 0.1968 0.2700 0.3000 
2x4 Rmedium A =
case 
0.3000 0.2700 0.1968 0.1162 1.0000 0.9000 0.6561 0.3874 
 0.2700 0.3000 0.2700 0.1968 0.9000 1.0000 0.9000 0.6561
 
 0.1968 0.2700 0.3000 0.2700 0.6561 0.9000 1.0000 0.9000 

 0.1162 0.1968 0.2700 0.3000 0.3874 0.6561 0.9000 1.0000 
 1.0000 0.9000 0.6561 0.3874 0.8748 0.7873 0.5739 0.3389 0.5856 0.5270 0.3842 0.2269 0.3000 0.2700 0.1968 0.1162 
 
 0.9000 1.0000 0.9000 0.6561 0.7873 0.8748 0.7873 0.5739 0.5270 0.5856 0.5270 0.3842 0.2700 0.3000 0.2700 0.1968 
 
0.6561 0.9000 1.0000 0.9000 0.5739 0.7873 0.8748 0.7873 0.3842 0.5270 0.5856 0.5270 0.1968 0.2700 0.3000 0.2700
 
 0.3874 0.6561 0.9000 1.0000 0.3389 0.5739 0.7873 0.8748 0.2269 0.3842 0.5270 0.5856 0.1162 0.1968 0.2700 0.3000 
 

0.8748 0.7873 0.5739 0.3389 1.0000 0.9000 0.6561 0.3874 0.8748 0.7873 0.5739 0.3389 0.5856 0.5270 0.3842 0.2269 
 0.7873 0.8748 0.7873 0.5739 0.9000 1.0000 0.9000 0.6561 0.7873 0.8748 0.7873 0.5739 0.5270 0.5856 0.5270 0.3842 
 
 0.5739 0.7873 0.8748 0.7873 0.6561 0.9000 1.0000 0.9000 0.5739 0.7873 0.8748 0.7873 0.3842 0.5270 0.5856 0.5270 
 0.3389 0.5739 0.7873 0.8748 0.3874 0.6561 0.9000 1.0000 0.3389 0.5739 0.7873 0.8748 0.2269 0.3842 0.5270 0.5856 
4x4 Rmedium A =  
case  0.5856 0.5270 0.3842 0.2269 0.8748 0.7873 0.5739 0.3389 1.0000 0.9000 0.6561 0.3874 0.8748 0.7873 0.5739 0.3389 
 

0.5270 0.5856 0.5270 0.3842 0.7873 0.8748 0.7873 0.5739 0.9000 1.0000 0.9000 0.6561 0.7873 0.8748 0.7873 0.5739 
 0.3842 0.5270 0.5856 0.5270 0.5739 0.7873 0.8748 0.7873 0.6561 0.9000 1.0000 0.9000 0.5739 0.7873 0.8748 0.7873 
 
 0.2269 0.3842 0.5270 0.5856 0.3389 0.5739 0.7873 0.8748 0.3874 0.6561 0.9000 1.0000 0.3389 0.5739 0.7873 0.8748 
 0.3000 0.2700 0.1968 0.1162 0.5856 0.5270 0.3842 0.2269 0.8748 0.7873 0.5739 0.3389 1.0000 0.9000 0.6561 0.3874 
 
 0.2700 0.3000 0.2700 0.1968 0.5270 0.5856 0.5270 0.3842 0.7873 0.8748 0.7873 0.5739 0.9000 1.0000 0.9000 0.6561 
 0.1968 0.2700 0.3000 0.2700 0.3842 0.5270 0.5856 0.5270 0.5739 0.7873 0.8748 0.7873 0.6561 0.9000 1.0000 0.9000 
 
 
 0.1162 0.1968 0.2700 0.3000 0.2269 0.3842 0.5270 0.5856 0.3389 0.5739 0.7873 0.8748 0.3874 0.6561 0.9000 1.0000 
Table B.2.3.1.2-5: MIMO correlation matrices for low correlation

1x2 case Rlow = I 2
1x4 case Rlow = I 4
2x1 case Rlow = I 2
2x2 case Rlow = I 4
2x4 case Rlow = I 8
4x1 case Rlow = I 4
4x2 case Rlow = I 8
4x4 case Rlow = I 16
In Table B.2.3.1.2-5, Id is the d×d identity matrix.
B.2.3.2 MIMO Correlation Matrices using Cross Polarized Antennas (X-pol)

The MIMO channel correlation matrices defined in clause B.2.3.2 apply for the antenna configuration using cross
polarized (XP/X-pol) antennas at both gNB and UE. The cross-polarized antenna elements with +/-45 degrees
ETSI
polarization slant angles are deployed at gNB and cross-polarized antenna elements with +90/0 degrees polarization
slant angles are deployed at UE.
For the 2D cross-polarized antenna array at eNodeB, the N antennas are indexed by ( N1 , N 2 , P) , and total number of
antennas is N = P ⋅ N1 ⋅ N 2 , where
- N 1 is the number of antenna elements in first dimension with same polarization,
- N 2 is the number of antenna elements in second dimension with same polarization, and
- P is the number of polarization groups.

For the 2D cross-polarized antennas at gNB, the N antennas are labelled such that antennas shall be in increasing order
of the second dimension firstly, then the first dimension, and finally the polarization group. For a specific antenna
element at p-th polarization, n1-th row, and n2-th column within the 2D antenna array, the following index number is
used for antenna labelling:
Index( p, n1 , n2 ) = p ⋅ N1 ⋅ N 2 + n1 ⋅ N 2 + n2 + 1; p = 0,1; n1 = 0, L, N − 1;
1 n2 = 0, L, N 2 − 1.
where N is the number of transmit antennas, p is the polarization group index, n1 is the row index, and n2 is the column
index of the antenna element.
For the linear (single dimension, 1D) cross-polarized antenna, the N antennas are labelled following the above equations
with N2=1.
B.2.3.2.1 Definition of MIMO Correlation Matrices using cross polarized antennas

For the channel spatial correlation matrix, the following is used:
Rspat = P ( RgNB ⊗ Γ ⊗ RUE ) PT
where
- RUE is the spatial correlation matrix at the UE with same polarization,
- RgNB is the spatial correlation matrix at the gNB with same polarization,
- Γ is a polarization correlation matrix, and
- (•)T denotes transpose.

The matrix Γ is defined as:
 1 0 −γ 0


0 1 0 γ 
Γ=
− γ 0 1 0
 
 0 γ 0 1
A permutation matrix P elements are defined as:
1 for a = ( j − 1)Nr + i and b = 2( j − 1)Nr + i, L

i = 1, , Nr , j = 1, Nt / 2 L

P (a, b ) = 1 L
for a = ( j − 1)Nr + i and b = 2( j − Nt / 2)Nr − Nr + i, i = 1, , Nr , j = Nt / 2 + 1, , Nt . L
0
 otherwise
where Nt and Nr is the number of transmitter and receiver respectively. This is used to map the spatial correlation
coefficients in accordance with the antenna element labelling system described in clause B.2.3.2.
For the 2D cross-polarized antenna array at gNB, the spatial correlation matrix at the gNB is further expressed as
following for 2D cross-polarized antenna array at gNB:
ETSI
RgNB = RgNB _ Dim,1 ⊗ RgNB _ Dim,2
where
- RgNB _ Dim,1 is the correlation matrix of antenna elements in first dimension with same polarization, and
- RgNB _ Dim,2 is the correlation matrix of antenna elements in second dimension with same polarization.
For the 2D cross polarized antenna array at gNB side, the spatial correlation matrices in one direction of antenna array
are as follows:
- For 1 antenna element with the same polarization in one direction,
RgNB _ Dim ,i = 1 .
- For 2 antenna elements with the same polarization in one direction,
1 αi 
RgNB _ Dim,i =  .
αi
∗
1 

1
 1 αi 4
αi 
 
1 1
RgNB _ Dim ,i =  α i 4* 1 αi 4 .
 
1
 1 
 αi αi
* 4*
 

1 4
 1 αi 9
αi 9
αi 
 
 19 * 1 4

α 1 αi 9
αi 9
RgNB _ Dim ,i =  i4 .
1 1
 
α 9* αi 9*
1 αi 9
 i 
 4 1

 αi αi αi
* 9* 9*
1 
where the index i = 1,2 stands for first dimension and second dimension respectively.
For the 1D cross-polarized antenna array at gNB, the matrix of RgNB is determined by follow the equations for 2D cross-
polarized antenna array and letting RgNB _ Dim,2 = 1, i.e.
RgNB = RgNB _ Dim,1
The spatial correlation matrices at UE side are as follows:
- For 1 antenna element with the same polarization,
RUE = 1 .
- F For 2 antenna elements with the same polarization,
1 β
RUE =  .

β
∗
1 
B.2.3.2.2 MIMO Correlation Matrices using cross polarized antennas

The values for parameters α, β and γ for the cross polarized antenna models are given in Table B.2.3.2.2-1.
ETSI
Table B.2.3.2.2-1: The α and β parameters for cross-polarized MIMO correlation matrices
Correlation Model α1 α2 β γ
Medium Correlation A 0.3 N/A 0.6 0.2
High Correlation 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.3
NOTE 1: Value of α1 applies when more than one pair of cross-polarized antenna
elements in first dimension at gNB side.
NOTE 2: Value of α2 applies when more than one pair of cross-polarized antenna
elements in second dimension at gNB side.
NOTE 3: Value of β applies when more than one pair of cross-polarized antenna
elements at UE side.
For the 1D cross polarized antenna array at gNB side, the correlation matrices for high spatial correlation and medium
correlation A are defined in Table B.2.3.2.2-2 and Table B.2.3.2.2-3 as below.
The values in Table B.2.3.2.2-2 have been adjusted to insure the correlation matrix is positive semi-definite after round-
off to 4 digit precision. This is done using the equation:
Rhigh = [ Rspat + aI n ] /(1 + a) or RmediumA = [ Rspat + aI n ] /(1 + a)
Where the value "a" is a scaling factor such that the smallest value is used to obtain a positive semi-definite result. For
the 8x2 high spatial correlation case, a=0.00010.
Table B.2.3.2.2-2: MIMO correlation matrices for high spatial correlation
 1.0000 0.0000 0.9000 0.0000 - 0.3000 0.0000 - 0.2700 0.0000 



0.0000 1.0000 0.0000 0.9000 0.0000 0.3000 0.0000 0.2700
 0.9000 0.0000 1.0000 0.0000 - 0.2700 0.0000 - 0.3000 0.0000 
 
 0.0000 0.9000 0.0000 1.0000 0.0000 0.2700 0.0000 0.3000
4x2 case
Rhigh =
- 0.3000 0.0000 - 0.2700 0.0000 1.0000 0.0000 0.9000 0.0000 
 
 0.0000 0.3000 0.0000 0.2700 0.0000 1.0000 0.0000 0.9000
- 0.2700 0.0000 - 0.3000 0.0000 0.9000 0.0000 1.0000 0.0000 
 
 0.0000 0.2700 0.0000 0.3000 0.0000 0.9000 0.0000 1.0000 
 1.0000 0.0000 0.9883 0.0000 0.9542 0.0000 0.8999 0.0000 -0.3000 0.0000 -0.2965 0.0000 -0.2862 0.0000 -0.2700 0.0000 


0.0000 1.0000 0.0000 0.9883 0.0000 0.9542 0.0000 0.8999 0.0000 0.3000 0.0000 0.2965 0.0000 0.2862 0.0000 0.2700 
 0.9883 0.0000 1.0000 0.0000 0.9883 0.0000 0.9542 0.0000 -0.2965 0.0000 -0.3000 0.0000 -0.2965 0.0000 -0.2862 0.0000 
 
 0.0000 0.9883 0.0000 1.0000 0.0000 0.9883 0.0000 0.9542 0.0000 0.2965 0.0000 0.3000 0.0000 0.2965 0.0000 0.2862 
 0.9542 0.0000 0.9883 0.0000 1.0000 0.0000 0.9883 0.0000 -0.2862 0.0000 -0.2965 0.0000 -0.3000 0.0000 -0.2965 0.0000 
 
 0.0000 0.9542 0.0000 0.9883 0.0000 1.0000 0.0000 0.9883 0.0000 0.2862 0.0000 0.2965 0.0000 0.3000 0.0000 0.2965 
 0.8999 0.0000 0.9542 0.0000 0.9883 0.0000 1.0000 0.0000 -0.2700 0.0000 -0.2862 0.0000 -0.2965 0.0000 -0.3000 0.0000 
 
 0.0000 0.8999 0.0000 0.9542 0.0000 0.9883 0.0000 1.0000 0.0000 0.2700 0.0000 0.2862 0.0000 0.2965 0.0000 0.3000 
Rhigh =
8x2 case -0.3000 0.0000 -0.2965 0.0000 -0.2862 0.0000 -0.2700 0.0000 1.0000 0.0000 0.9883 0.0000 0.9542 0.0000 0.8999 0.0000 
 
 0.0000 0.3000 0.0000 0.2965 0.0000 0.2862 0.0000 0.2700 0.0000 1.0000 0.0000 0.9883 0.0000 0.9542 0.0000 0.8999 
 

-0.2965 0.0000 -0.3000 0.0000 -0.2965 0.0000 -0.2862 0.0000 0.9883 0.0000 1.0000 0.0000 0.9883 0.0000 0.9542 0.0000 
 0.0000 0.2965 0.0000 0.3000 0.0000 0.2965 0.0000 0.2862 0.0000 0.9883 0.0000 1.0000 0.0000 0.9883 0.0000 0.9542 
 
 -0.2862 0.0000 -0.2965 0.0000 -0.3000 0.0000 -0.2965 0.0000 0.9542 0.0000 0.9883 0.0000 1.0000 0.0000 0.9883 0.0000 
 0.0000 0.2862 0.0000 0.2965 0.0000 0.3000 0.0000 0.2965 0.0000 0.9542 0.0000 0.9883 0.0000 1.0000 0.0000 0.9883 
 
 -0.2700 0.0000 -0.2862 0.0000 -0.2965 0.0000 -0.3000 0.0000 0.8999 0.0000 0.9542 0.0000 0.9883 0.0000 1.0000 0.0000 
 0.0000 0.2700 0.0000 0.2862 0.0000 0.2965 0.0000 0.3000 0.0000 0.8999 0.0000 0.9542 0.0000 0.9883 0.0000 1.0000 

ETSI
B.2.3.2.3 Beam steering approach

For the 2D cross-polarized antenna array at gNB, given the channel spatial correlation matrix in clauses B.2.3.2.1 and
B.2.3.2.2, the corresponding random channel matrix H can be calculated. The signal model for the k-th slot is denoted
as:
y = HDθ k ,1 ,θ k , 2 Wx + n
And the steering matrix is further expressed as following:
1 0
Dθ k ,1 ,θ k , 2 =  (
 ⊗ Dθ k ,1 ( N1 ) ⊗ Dθ k , 2 ( N 2 ) )
0 1
Where:
- H is the Nr×Nt channel matrix per subcarrier.
- Dθk ,1 ,θ k , 2 is the steering matrix,
- Dθ k ,1 ( N1 ) is the steering matrix in first dimension with same polarization,
- Dθ k , 2 ( N 2 ) is the steering matrix in second dimension with same polarization,
- N1 is the number of antenna elements in first dimension with same polarization,
- N 2 is the number of antenna elements in second dimension with same polarization,
- For antenna array with only one direction, number of antenna element in second direction N 2 equals 1.
For 1 antenna element with the same polarization in one direction,
Dθk ,i (1) = 1 .
For 2 antenna elements with the same polarization in one direction,
1 0 
Dθk ,i (2) =  j 3θ k ,i 
.
0 e 
1 0 0 
 j1.5θ k , i .
Dθk ,i (3) = 
0 e 0 
j 3θ
0 0 e k ,i 
1 0 0 0 
 jθ k ,i 

0 e 0 0 .
Dθ k ,i (4) = j 2θ k ,i
0 0 e 0 
 j 3θ 
0 0 0 e k ,i 
where the index i = 1,2 stands for first dimension and second dimension respectively.
ETSI
- θ k,i controls the phase variation in first dimension and second dimension respectively, and the phase for k-th subframe
is denoted by θk,i =θ0,i + Δθ ⋅ k , where θ 0,i is the random start value with the uniform distribution, i.e. θ 0,i ∈ [0,2π ] , Δθ is
the step of phase variation, which is defined in Table B.2.3B.4-1, and k is the linear increment of 2-μ for every slot
throughout the simulation, the index i = 1,2 stands for first dimension and second dimension respectively.
- W is the precoding matrix for Nt transmission antennas,

- y is the received signal, x is the transmitted signal, and n is AWGN.
μ
- μ corresponds to subcarrier spacing configuration, Δf = 2 ⋅15 [kHz]
For the 1D cross-polarized antenna array at gNB, the corresponding random channel matrix H can be calculated by
letting N2=1, i.e.
1 0
Dθk ,1 =   ⊗ Dθk ,1 ( N1 )
0 1
Table B.2.3.4-1: The step of phase variation

Variation Step Value (rad/ms)
Δθ 1.2566×10-3
B.2.4 Two-tap propagation conditions for CQI tests

For Channel Quality Indication (CQI) tests, the following additional multi-path profile is used:
h(t ,τ ) = δ (τ ) + a exp(−i 2πf D t )δ (τ − τ d )
in continuous time (t ,τ ) representation, with τ d the delay, a constant value of a and f D the Doppler frequency. The
same h(t,τ) is used to describe the fading channel between every pair of Tx and Rx.
B.3 High Speed Train Scenario

FFS
B.4 Beamforming Model
B.4.1 Generic beamforming model

The transmission on antenna port(s) ‫݌ = ݌‬଴ , ‫݌‬଴ + 1, . . . , ‫݌‬଴ + ܰ௣ − 1 is defined by using a precoder matrix W (i ) of
size ܰ஺ே் × ܰ௣ , where ܰ஺ே் is the number of physical transmit antenna elements configured per test , ܰ௣ is the number
of ports for a reference signal or physical channel configured per test, and ‫݌‬଴ is the first port for that reference signal or
physical channel as defined in section 7.3 and 7.4 in TS 38.211 [9]. This precoder takes as an input a block of signals
்
for antenna port(s) ‫݌‬ = ‫݌‬଴ ‫݌‬଴
, + 1, . . . , ‫݌‬଴ + ܰ௣ − 1 , ‫ ݕ‬ሺ௣ሻ ሺ݅ሻ = ൣ‫ ݕ‬ሺ௣బሻ ሺ݅ሻ ‫ ݕ‬ሺ௣బାଵሻ ሺ݅ሻ … ‫ ݕ‬൫௣బାே೛ ିଵ൯ ሺ݅ሻ൧ ,
i = 0,1,..., M symb
ap
− 1 , with M symb
ap
being the number of modulation symbols per antenna port including the reference
ሺ଴ሻ ሺ௤ሻ
ሺଵሻ ሺே ்
signal symbols, and generates a block of signals ‫ݕ‬௕௙ ሺ݅ሻ = ቂ‫ݕ‬௕௙ ሺ݅ሻ ‫ݕ‬௕௙ ሺ݅ሻ … ‫ݕ‬௕௙ ಲಿ೅ ିଵሻ ሺ݅ሻቃ the elements of which
are to be mapped onto the frequency-time index pair (k, l ) as per the test configuration but transmitted on different
physical antenna elements:
ETSI
ሺ௤ሻ
‫ݕ‬௕௙ ሺ݅ሻ = ܹሺ݅ሻ‫ ݕ‬ሺ௣ሻ ݅
( )
The precoder matrix W (i ) is specific to the test case configuration.

The transimison on PT-RS antenna port is associated (using same precoder) with the lowest indexed DM-RS antenna
port among the DM-RS antenna ports assigned for the PDSCH.
The physical antenna elements are identified by indices j = 0,1,..., N ANT − 1 , where N ANT is the number of physical
antenna elements configured per test.
Modulation symbols ak ,l for CSI-RS resources which configured for tracking with one port are directly mapped to first
physical antenna element.
Modulation symbols ak ,l for CSI-RS resources which configured for beam refinement with one port are directly
mapped to first physical antenna element.
( p)
Modulation symbols a k ,l for NZP CSI-RS which configured for CSI acquisition with
p ∈ {p0 , p0 + 1,..., p0 + N CSI − 1} are mapped to the physical antenna index j = p − p0 where N CSI is the
number of NZP CSI-RS ports configured per test.
ETSI
Annex C (normative):
Downlink physical channels
C.0 Downlink signal levels

Downlink power settings to be configured for connection setup has been defined in this clause covering both FR1 and
FR2.
C.0.1 FR1 Downlink Signal Levels (Conducted)

The downlink power settings in Table C.0.1-1 is used for FR1 conducted unless otherwise specified in a test case.
If the UE has more than one Rx antenna, the downlink signal is applied to each one. All UE Rx antennas shall be
connected.
Table C.0.1-1: Default Downlink power levels for NR FR1

Unit Channel bandwidth
SCS
5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 80 90 100
(kHz)
MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz
Number
25 50 75 100 128 160 215 270 N/A N/A N/A N/A
of RBs
15 Channel
BW dBm -60 -57 -55 -54 -53 -52 -51 -50 N/A N/A N/A N/A
power
Number
10 24 36 50 64 75 100 128 162 216 243 270
of RBs
30 Channel
BW dBm -61 -57 -55 -54 -53 -52 -51 -50 -49 -48 -47 -47
power
Number
N/A 10 18 24 30 36 50 64 75 100 120 135
of RBs
60 Channel
BW dBm N/A -58 -56 -54 -53 -52 -51 -50 -49 -48 -47 -47
power
dBm/
SSS
15 -85 -85 -85 -85 -85 -85 -85 -85 -85 -85 -85 -85
EPRE
kHz
NOTE 1: The channel bandwidth powers are informative, based on -85dBm/15kHz SS/PBCH SSS EPRE, then
scaled according to the number of RBs and rounded to the nearest integer dBm value. Full RE
allocation with no boost or deboost is assumed.
NOTE 2: The power level is specified at each UE Rx antenna.
NOTE 3: DL level is applied for any of the Subcarrier Spacing configuration ( ) with the same power spectrum
density of -85 dBm/15 kHz.
The default signal level uncertainty is [+/-3] dB at each test port, for any level specified. If the uncertainty value is
critical for the test purpose, a tighter uncertainty is specified for the related test case in [Annex F]
C.0.2 FR2 Downlink Signal Levels (Radiated)

The downlink power settings in Table C.0.2-1 is used unless otherwise specified in a test case.
ETSI
Table C.0.2-1: Default Downlink power levels for NR FR2
SCS Channel Bandwidth

Unit
(kHz) 50 MHz 100 MHz 200 MHz 400 MHz
Number of RBs 66 132 264 N/A
60
Channel BW power dBm -70 -67 -64 N/A
Number of RBs 32 66 132 264
120
Channel BW power dBm -70 -67 -64 -61
SS/PBCH SSS EPRE dBm/60 kHz [-99] [-99] [-99] [-99]
NOTE 1: The channel bandwidth powers are informative, based on [-99] dBm/60 kHz SS/PBCH SSS EPRE, then
scaled according to the number of RBs and rounded to the nearest integer dBm value. Full RE allocation with
no boost or deboost is assumed.
NOTE 2: The power level is specified at the centre of quiet zone.
NOTE 3: DL level is applied for any of the Subcarrier Spacing configuration ( μ ) with the same power spectrum
density of [-99]dBm/60kHz.
The default downlink signal level uncertainty is +/- TBD dB, for any level specified. If the uncertainty value is critical
for the test purpose, a tighter uncertainty is specified for the related test case in Annex F.
C.1 Setup
The following clause describes the downlink Physical Channels that are transmitted during connection setup.
C.1.1 FR1 Setup

Table C.1.1-1 describes the downlink Physical Channels that are required for FR1 connection set up.
Table C.1.1-1: Downlink Physical Channels required for FR1 connection setup
Physical Channel
PBCH
SSS
PSS
PDCCH
PDSCH
PBCH DMRS
PDCCH DMRS
PDSCH DMRS
CSI-RS
The following common PDSCH and PDCCH configuration parameters shall be used to bring up the connection setup
for FR1 NR cell.
ETSI
Table C.1.1-2: Common reference channel parameters for FR1

CORESET frequency domain allocation Full BW,number of RB’s to be in multiple of 6
CORESET time domain allocation 2 OFDM symbols at the begin of each slot
PDSCH mapping type Type A
PDSCH start symbol index (S) 2
Number of consecutive PDSCH symbols (L) 12
PDSCH PRB bundling PRBs 2
Dynamic PRB bundling false
Overhead value for TBS determination 0
First DMRS position for Type A PDSCH mapping 2
DMRS type Type 1
FDM between DMRS and PDSCH Enable
TRS configuration 2 slots, periodicity 20 ms, offset 10
Num of HARQ processes 8 (TDD)
Table C.1.1-3: Additional reference channels parameters for FDD

K1 value 2 for all slots
Table C.1.1-4: TDD UL-DL pattern for SCS 15 KHz

UL-DL pattern
Parameter Unit
FR1.15-1
nrofUplinkSlot 1
nrofUplinkSymbols 2
K1 value [4] if mod(I,5) = 0
(PDSCH-to-HARQ-timing-indicator) [3] if mod(i,5) = 1
[2] if mod(i,5) = 2
[6] if mod(i,5) = 3
Note 1: D denotes a slot with all DL symbols; S denotes a slot with a mix of DL, UL and guard
symbols; U denotes a slot with all UL symbols. The field is for information.
Note 2: D, G, U denote DL, guard and UL symbols, respectively. The field is for information.
Note 3: i is the slot index per frame; i = {0,…,9}
ETSI
Table C.1.1-5: TDD UL-DL pattern for SCS 30 KHz
Parameter Unit UL-DL Pattern

TDD Slot Configuration pattern (Note 1) 7DS2U
UL-DL configuration (tdd- referenceSubcarrierSpacing 30 kHz
UL-DL- dl-UL-
5
ConfigurationCommon) TransmissionPeriodicity
nrofDownlinkSlots 7
nrofUplinkSlot 2
nrofUplinkSymbols 4
UL-DL configuration2 referenceSubcarrierSpacing N/A
(tdd-UL-DL- dl-UL-
N/A
ConfigurationCommon2) TransmissionPeriodicity
nrofDownlinkSlots N/A
nrofUplinkSlot N/A
6 if mod(i,10) = 2
5 if mod(i,10) = 3
5 if mod(i,10) = 4
4 if mod(i,10) = 5
3 if mod(i,10) = 6
2 if mod(i,10) = 7
Note 1: D denotes a slot with all DL symbols; S denotes a slot with a mix of DL, UL
and guard symbols; U denotes a slot with all UL symbols. The field is for information.
Note 2: D, G, U denote DL, guard and UL symbols, respectively. The field is for
information.
C.1.2 FR2 Setup

Table C.1.2-1 describes the downlink Physical Channels that are required for FR2 connection set up.
Table C.1.2-1: Downlink Physical Channels required for FR2 connection set-up
Physical Channel
PBCH
SSS
PSS
PDCCH
PDSCH
PBCH DMRS
PDCCH DMRS
PDSCH DMRS
CSI-RS
PTRS
The following common PDSCH and PDCCH configuration parameters shall be used to bring up the connection setup
for FR2 NR cell.
ETSI
Table C.1.2-2: Common reference channel parameters for FR2

CORESET frequency domain allocation Full BW, number of RB’s to be in multiple of 6
CORESET time domain allocation 1 OFDM symbols at the begin of each slot
PDSCH mapping type Type A
PDSCH start symbol index (S) 1
Number of consecutive PDSCH symbols (L) 13
PDSCH PRB bundling PRBs 2
Dynamic PRB bundling false
MCS table for TBS determination 64QAM
Overhead value for TBS determination 0
First DMRS position for Type A PDSCH mapping 2
DMRS type Type 1
FDM between DMRS and PDSCH Enable
TRS configuration 2 slots, periodicity 20 ms, offset 10
PTRS configuration Single port, every other RB, every symbol
(K=2, L=1)
Num of HARQ processes 8
Table C.1.2-3: Additional test parameters for TDD for SCS 60 KHz
Parameter Unit UL-DL pattern

TDD Slot Configuration pattern (Note 1) DDSU
nrofUplinkSlot 1
nrofUplinkSymbols 0
K1 value K1 = 3 if mod(i,4) = 0
(PDSCH-to-HARQ-timing-indicator) K1 = 2 if mod(i,4) = 1
K1 = 5 if mod(i,4) = 2
Note 1: D denotes a slot with all DL symbols; S denotes a slot with a mix of DL, UL and guard symbols; U
Table C.1.2-4: Additional test parameters for TDD for SCS 120 KHz
Parameter Unit UL-DL pattern
(tdd-UL-DL- dl-UL-TransmissionPeriodicity ms 0.625
nrofUplinkSlot 1
nrofUplinkSymbols 2
K1 value K1 = [4] if mod(i,5) = 0
(PDSCH-to-HARQ-timing-indicator) K1 = [3] if mod(i,5) = 1
K1 = [2] if mod(i,5) = 2
K1 = [6] if mod(i,5) = 3
Note 1: D denotes a slot with all DL symbols; S denotes a slot with a mix of DL, UL and guard symbols; U denotes a
slot with all UL symbols. The field is for information.
ETSI
C.2 Connection
C.2.1 FR1 Measurement of Performance Characteristics

Table C.3.1-1 is applicable for measurements in which uniform RS-to-EPRE boosting for all downlink
physical channels, unless otherwise stated.Table C.2.1-1: Downlink Physical Channels transmitted
during a connection (FDD and TDD) for FR1
SSS transmit power W Test specific
EPRE ratio of PSS to SSS dB 0
EPRE ratio of PBCH to SSS dB 0
EPRE ratio of PBCH to PBCH DMRS dB 0
EPRE ratio of PDCCH to SSS dB 0
EPRE ratio of PDCCH to PDCCH DMRS dB 0
EPRE ratio of PDSCH to SSS dB 0
EPRE ratio of PDSCH to PDSCH DMRS dB Test specific (Note 1)
EPRE ratio of CSI-RS to SSS dB 0
EPRE ratio of OCNG to SSS dB 0
NOTE 1: Value is derived from Table 4.1-1 in TS 38.214 [X] based on “Number of DM-RS CDM groups without data” and
“DMRS Type” parameters specified for each test.
C.2.2 FR2 Measurement of Performance Characteristics

Unless otherwise stated, Table C.2.2-1 is applicable for measurements on the Performance Characteristics.
Table C.2.2-1: Downlink Physical Channels transmitted during a connection (TDD) for FR2

SSS transmit power W Test specific
EPRE ratio of PSS to SSS dB 0
EPRE ratio of PBCH DMRS to SSS dB 0
EPRE ratio of PBCH to PBCH DMRS dB 0
EPRE ratio of PDCCH DMRS to SSS dB 0
EPRE ratio of PDCCH to PDCCH DMRS dB 0
EPRE ratio of PDSCH DMRS to SSS (Note 1) dB 3
EPRE ratio of PDSCH to PDSCH DMRS (Note 1) dB -3
EPRE ratio of CSI-RS to SSS dB 0
EPRE ratio of PTRS to PDSCH dB Test specific
EPRE ratio of OCNG DMRS to SSS dB 0
EPRE ratio of OCNG to OCNG DMRS (Note 1) dB 0
NOTE 1: No boosting is applied to any of the channels except PDSCH DMRS. For PDSCH DMRS, 3 dB power boosting
is applied assuming DMRS Type 1 configuration when DMRS and PDSCH are TDM'ed and only half of the
DMRS REs are occupied.
NOTE 2: Number of DMRS CDM groups without data for PDSCH DMRS configuration for OCNG is set to 1.
ETSI
Annex D (normative):
E-UTRA link setup config for NSA testing
D.0 General
Below sub-clauses define the E-UTRA link setup config for NSA Demodulation and CSI tests cases unless otherwise
specified within the main test case.
D.1 E-UTRA test parameters

Below are the common test parameters to be configured for E-UTRA link.
Table D.1-1: Common Test Parameters (FDD)

Parameter Unit Value Comments
For FDD, 8 HARQ processes in the DL,
Number of HARQ
Processes 8 as specified in TS 36.213 [10] clause 7.
processes
All 8 HARQ processes are used.
1. Retransmissions use the same
Transport Block Size (TBS) as the initial
transmission.
2. HARQ processes are scheduled
Scheduling of
consecutively, independent of the fact,
retransmissions
whether retransmissions (for negatively
acknowledged HARQ processes) or new
transmissions (for positively
acknowledged HARQ processes) occur.
Maximum number of It is always 4 for FDD, as specified in TS
4
HARQ transmission 36.213 [10] clause 8
Redundancy version
coding sequence {0,1,2,3} for QPSK
The PCFICH carries information about
Number of OFDM 3 for 5 MHz bandwidths, the number of OFDM symbols used for
OFDM symbols
symbols for PDCCH 2 for 10 MHz, 20MHz transmission of PDCCHs in a subframe,
as specified in TS 36.211 [8] clause 6.7
CP consist of the following physical
resource blocks (RBs) parameters: 12
Cyclic Prefix Normal consecutive subcarriers at a 15 kHz
spacing and 7 OFDM symbols, as
specified in TS 36.211 [8] clause 6.2.3
The Cell ID is uniquely defined by a
number in the range of 0 to 503,
Cell ID 0 (Note 1) representing the physical-layer cell
identity, as specified in TS 36.211 [8]
clause 6.11.
DCI format for
Format 2A
PDSCH
DCI format for
Format 0
PUSCH
ETSI
Table D.1-2: Common Test Parameters (TDD)

Parameter Unit Value Comments
Uplink downlink 1
configuration (Note 1)
Special subframe 4
configuration (Note 2)
For TDD, 7 HARQ processes in the
Number of HARQ DL, as specified in TS 36.213 [10]
Processes 7
processes clause 7.
All 7 HARQ processes are used.
1. Retransmissions use the same
Transport Block Size (TBS) as the
initial transmission.
2. HARQ processes are scheduled
consecutively, independent of the
fact, whether retransmissions (for
negatively acknowledged HARQ
processes) or new transmissions
(for positively acknowledged HARQ
Scheduling of processes) occur.
retransmissions 3. In case when the initial
transmission and the
retransmissions are scheduled in
subframes with a different NPRB (in
terms of TS 36.213 [10] subclause
7.1.7) 29 ≤ I MCS ≤ 31 according to
TS 36.213 [10] subclause 7.1.7.2
and the appropriate modulation is
used.
Maximum number of It is always 4 for TDD, as specified
4
HARQ transmission in TS 36.213 [10] clause 8
Redundancy version
coding sequence {0,1,2,3} for QPSK
The PCFICH carries information
about the number of OFDM
Number of OFDM OFDM 3 for 5 MHz bandwidths, symbols used for transmission of
symbols for PDCCH symbols 2 for 10 MHz PDCCHs in a subframe, as
specified in TS 36.211 [8] clause
6.7
CP consist of the following physical
resource blocks (RBs) parameters:
12 consecutive subcarriers at a 15
Cyclic Prefix Normal
kHz spacing and 7 OFDM symbols,
as specified in TS 36.211 [8] clause
6.2.3
The Cell ID is uniquely defined by a
number in the range of 0 to 503,
Cell ID 0 (Note 3) representing the physical-layer cell
identity, as specified in TS 36.211
[8] clause 6.11.
DCI format for
Format 2A
PDSCH
DCI format for
Format 0
PUSCH
NOTE 1: as specified in Table 4.2-2 in TS 36.211 [8].
NOTE 2: as specified in Table 4.2-1 in TS 36.211 [8].
NOTE 3: For CA tests, Cell ID = 0 applies only to P-Cell. For (n)th S-Cell, Cell ID = n is used.
ETSI
D.2 E-UTRA configuration

This clause defines the E-UTRA link settings for the test cases defined in clauses 5 and 6. The LTE link is supposed to
be a functional link. The configuration defined in this clause ensures establishment of LTE link.
Table D.2-1: E-UTRA configuration for EN-DC tests

Parameter Value Comments
Test Frequency Mid As defined in TS 36.508 [TBD] for inter band test cases and as
during and after defined in TS 38.508-1 [6] clause 4.3.1 for intra band test
connection setup cases, with NR SCS as per the test case for the LTE band
under test
Bandwidth during 5 MHz (Note 1) Supported by all LTE bands.
and after connection
setup
PDSCH
transmission mode TM3 2x2
and antenna config
OCNG pattern These physical resource blocks are assigned to an arbitrary
OP.1 for FDD number of virtual UE' s with one PDSCH per virtual UE; the
OP.1 for TDD data transmitted over the OCNG PDSCHs shall be
uncorrelated pseudo random data, which is QPSK modulated.
DL RMC Since there is no LTE RMC defined for TDD 2Tx 5 MHz, reuse
R.10-2 FDD for FDD
R.10 TDD for TDD
the 10MHz one and change channel BW to 5 MHz or 20 MHz
as applicable.
DL RB allocation Full RB allocation assuming 5 MHz ChBW. 100 RB for 20 MHz
25
ChBW as applicable
UL Signal levels PUSCH Power Attained by enabling open loop power control and setting up
during connection UL signal levels according to Annexes H.0, H.2 and H.3 of TS
setup
TA adjustments TimeAlignmentTimerDedicated TimeAlignmentTimerDedicated IE to be set to infinity to ensure
IE to be set to infinity UE doesn't look for TA adjustments (See Table D.2-4)
CQI reports and Disabled (See Table D.2-2 Disable periodic and aperiodic CQI reports to ensure none of
SRS after and D.2-3) these transmissions occur on the LTE uplink.
connection setup
NOTE: If none of the UE supported EN-DC band combos support 5MHz E-UTRA carrier, configure 20 MHz channel
BW.
Table D.2-2 -CQI-ReportConfig-DEFAULT: Additional E-UTRA Anchor Configuration
Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7] clause 4.6.3, Table 4.6.3-2 CQI-ReportConfig-DEFAULT

CQI-ReportConfig-DEFAULT ::= SEQUENCE {
cqi-ReportModeAperiodic NOT PRESENT
cqi-ReportPeriodic NOT PRESENT
}
Table D.2-3: PhysicalConfigDedicated-DEFAULT: Additional E-UTRA Anchor Configuration
Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7] clause 4.8.2, Table 4.8.2.1.6-1 PhysicalConfigDedicated-DEFAULT

PhysicalConfigDedicated-DEFAULT ::= SEQUENCE {
soundingRS-UL-ConfigDedicated Not present RBC
}
Table D.2-4: MAC-MainConfig-RBC: Additional E-UTRA Anchor Configuration
Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7] clause 4.8.2.1.5, Table 4.8.2.1.5-1 MAC-MainConfig-RBC

timeAlignmentTimerDedicated Infinity
ETSI
D.3 E-UTRA link common physical channel setup

Table D.3-1 describes the downlink Physical Channels that are required for E-UTRA connection set up.
Table D.3-1: Downlink Physical Channels required for E-UTRA connection set-up
Physical Channel EPRE Ratio Note
PBCH PBCH_RA = 0 dB
PBCH_RB = 0 dB
PSS PSS_RA = 0 dB
SSS SSS_RA = 0 dB
PCFICH PCFICH_RB = 0 dB
PDCCH PDCCH_RA = 0 dB
PDCCH_RB = 0 dB
PDSCH PDSCH_RA = -3 dB
PDSCH_RB = -3 dB
PHICH PHICH_RA = 0 dB
PHICH_RB = 0 dB
NOTE 1: PB = 1 .
NOTE 2: PHICH group power, i.e. the total power of all active PHICH
sequences within a PHICH group.
D.4 E-UTRA power level
D.4.1 E-UTRA power level (conducted)

Table D.4.1-1: DL power level for E-UTRA (conducted)

DL signal level RS EPRE -85.0 dBm/15 kHz The power level is specified at each UE Rx antenna
D.4.2 E-UTRA power level (radiated)

Table D.4.2-1: Downlink power levels for E-UTRA (radiated)
DL signal level RS EPRE -100 dBm/15 kHz The power level is specified at each UE Rx antenna
ETSI
Annex E (normative): Environmental conditions

FFS
ETSI
Annex F (normative):
Measurement uncertainties and test tolerances
The requirements of this clause apply to all tests in the present document.
F.1 Measurement uncertainties and test tolerances for

FR1
F.1.1 Acceptable uncertainty of test system (normative)

The maximum acceptable uncertainty of the Test System is specified below for each test, where appropriate. The Test
System shall enable the stimulus signals in the test case to be adjusted to within the specified range, and the equipment
under test to be measured with an uncertainty not exceeding the specified values. All ranges and uncertainties are
absolute values, and are valid for a confidence level of 95 %, unless otherwise stated.
A confidence level of 95 % is the measurement uncertainty tolerance interval for a specific measurement that contains
95 % of the performance of a population of test equipment.
For RF tests it should be noted that the uncertainties in clause F.1 apply to the Test System operating into a nominal 50
ohm load and do not include system effects due to mismatch between the DUT and the Test System.
The downlink signal uncertainties apply at each receiver antenna connector.
F.1.1.1 Measurement of test environments

The measurement accuracy of the UE test environments defined in TS 38.508-1 [5] subclause 4.1, Test environments
shall be
- Pressure ±5 kPa.
- Temperature ±2 degrees.
- Relative Humidity ±5 %.
- DC Voltage ±1,0 %.
- AC Voltage ±1,5 %.
- Vibration 10 %.
- Vibration frequency 0,1 Hz.
The above values shall apply unless the test environment is otherwise controlled and the specification for the control of
the test environment specifies the uncertainty for the parameter.
F.1.1.2 Measurement of Demod Performance requirements

This clause defines the maximum test system uncertainty for Demod Performance requirements. The maximum test
system uncertainty allowed for the measurement uncertainty contributors are defined in Table F.1.1.2-1.
Table F.1.1.2-1: Maximum measurement uncertainty values for the test system for FR1 (up to 6 GHz)
and Channel BW ≤ 40 MHz
MU contributor Unit Value Comment
AWGN and signal flatness dB ±2.0 Same as in LTE
Signal to noise ratio uncertainty dB ±0.3 Same as in LTE
Signal to noise ratio variation dB ±0.5 Same as in LTE
ETSI

Fading profile power uncertainty
dB ±0.5 Same as in LTE
for 1Tx
dB ±0.7 Same as in LTE
for 2Tx
The maximum test system uncertainty for test cases defined in section 5 is defined in Table F.1.1.2-2.
ETSI
Table F.1.1.2-2: Maximum test system uncertainty for FR1 demodulation performance test cases
ETSI
Subclause Maximum Test System Derivation of Test System Uncertainty

Uncertainty
5.2.2.1.1_1 2Rx FDD FR1 PDSCH ± 0.9 dB for > 10Hz doppler Overall system uncertainty for fading
mapping Type A performance - 2x2 ± 1 dB for 10Hz doppler conditions comprises four quantities:
MIMO with baseline receiver for both 1. Signal-to-noise ratio uncertainty
SA and NSA 2. Fading profile power uncertainty
3. Effect of AWGN flatness and signal
flatness
4. SNR uncertainty due to finite test time
Items 1, 2, 3 and 4 are assumed to be

uncorrelated so can be root sum squared:
AWGN flatness and signal flatness has x
0.25 effect on the required SNR, so use
sensitivity factor of x 0.25 for the uncertainty
contribution.
Test System uncertainty = SQRT (Signal-to-
noise ratio uncertainty 2 + Fading profile
power uncertainty 2 + (0.25 x AWGN flatness
and signal flatness) 2) + SNR uncertainty due
to finite test time2
Signal-to-noise ratio uncertainty ±0.3 dB
Fading profile power uncertainty ±0.7 dB for
MIMO 2x2
AWGN flatness and signal flatness ±2.0 dB
SNR uncertainty due to finite test time ±0.3
dB
5.2.2.1.1_2 2Rx FDD FR1 PDSCH Same as 5.2.2.1.1_1 Same as 5.2.2.1.1_1
Mapping Type A performance - 2x2
MIMO with enhanced receiver type X
for both SA and NSA
mapping Type A and CSI-RS
overlapped with PDSCH performance -
2x2 MIMO with baseline receiver for
both SA and NSA
mapping Type B performance - 2x2
MIMO with baseline receiver for both
SA and NSA
Mapping Type A and LTE-NR
coexistence performance - 4x2 MIMO
with baseline receiver for both SA and
NSA
5.2.2.2.1_1 2Rx TDD FR1 PDSCH Same as 5.2.2.1.1_1 Same as 5.2.2.1.1_1
mapping Type A performance - 2x2
SA and NSA
Mapping Type A performance - 2x2
for both SA and NSA
mapping Type A and CSI-RS
overlapped with PDSCH performance -
2x2 MIMO with baseline receiver for
both SA and NSA
mapping Type B performance - 2x2
SA and NSA
ETSI
5.3.2.1.1 2Rx FDD FR1 PDCCH 1 Tx ± 0.8 dB for >10 Hz doppler Overall system uncertainty for fading
antenna performance for both SA and ± 0.9 dB for 10 Hz doppler conditions comprises four quantities:
NSA 1. Signal-to-noise ratio uncertainty
2. Fading profile power uncertainty
flatness

contribution.
and signal flatness) 2+ SNR uncertainty due
to finite test time2)
MIMO 2x2
dB
5.3.2.1.2 2Rx FDD FR1 PDCCH 2 Tx Same as 5.2.2.1.1_1 Same as 5.2.2.1.1_1
antenna performance for both SA and
NSA
5.3.2.2.1 2Rx TDD FR1 PDCCH 1 Tx Same as 5.3.2.1.1 Same as 5.3.2.1.1
NSA
5.3.2.2.2 2Rx TDD FR1 PDCCH 2 Tx Same as 5.3.2.1.1_1 Same as 5.3.2.1.1_1
NSA
5.3.3.1.1 4Rx FDD FR1 PDCCH 1 Tx Same as 5.3.2.1.1 Same as 5.3.2.1.1
NSA
5.3.3.1.2 4Rx FDD FR1 PDCCH 2 Tx Same as 5.2.2.1.1_1 Same as 5.2.2.1.1_1
NSA
5.3.3.2.1 4Rx TDD FR1 PDCCH 1 Tx Same as 5.3.2.1.1 Same as 5.3.2.1.1
NSA
5.3.3.2.2 4Rx TDD FR1 PDCCH 2 Tx Same as 5.2.2.1.1_1 Same as 5.2.2.1.1_1
NSA
ETSI
5.2.3.1.1_1 4Rx FDD FR1 PDSCH ± 0.9 dB for > 10Hz doppler Overall system uncertainty for fading
mapping Type A performance - 2x4 ± 1.0 dB for 10Hz doppler conditions comprises four quantities:
MIMO with baseline receiver for both 1. Signal-to-noise ratio uncertainty
SA and NSA 2. Fading profile power uncertainty
flatness

contribution.
and signal flatness) 2 + SNR uncertainty due
to finite test time2)
MIMO
dB
SA and NSA
for both SA and NSA
Mapping Type A and LTE-NR
coexistence performance - 4x4 MIMO
with baseline receiver for both SA and
NSA
F.1.1.3 Measurement of Channel State Information reporting

This clause defines the maximum test system uncertainty for channel state information reporting requirements. The
maximum test system uncertainty allowed for the measurement uncertainty contributors are defined in Table F.1.1.3-1.
Table F.1.1.3-1: Maximum measurement uncertainty values for the test system for FR1 (up to 6 GHz)
and Channel BW ≤ 40 MHz
AWGN and signal flatness dB Same as in table F.1.1.2-1
Signal to noise ratio uncertainty dB Same as in table F.1.1.2-1
Signal to noise ratio variation dB Same as in table F.1.1.2-1
dB Same as in table F.1.1.2-1
for 1Tx
dB Same as in table F.1.1.2-1
for 2Tx
The maximum test system uncertainty for test cases defined in section 6 is defined in Table F.1.1.3-2.
ETSI
Table F.1.1.3-2: Maximum test system uncertainty for FR1 channel state information reporting test
cases
Subclause Maximum Test System Derivation of Test System Uncertainty
Uncertainty
6.2.2.1.2.12Rx FDD FR1 periodic +/- 0.8 dB Overall system uncertainty for fading
wideband CQI reporting under fading conditions comprises two quantities:
conditions for both SA and NSA
1. Signal-to-noise ratio uncertainty ±0.3 dB
2. Fading profile power uncertainty for 2Tx
±0.7 dB
Items 1 and 2 are assumed to be

power uncertainty 2)
not expected to have any significant effect
6.2.2.1.2.22Rx FDD FR1 periodic Same as 6.2.2.1.2.1 Same as 6.2.2.1.2.1
subband CQI reporting under fading
6.2.2.2.2.22Rx TDD FR1 periodic Same as 6.2.2.1.2.1 Same as 6.2.2.1.2.1
subband CQI reporting under fading
F.1.2 Interpretation of measurement results (normative)

The measurement results returned by the Test System are compared – without any modification – against the Test
Requirements as defined by the shared risk principle.
The Shared Risk principle is defined in ETR 273-1-2 clause 6.5.
The actual measurement uncertainty of the Test System for the measurement of each parameter shall be included in the
test report.
The recorded value for the Test System uncertainty shall be, for each measurement, equal to or lower than the
appropriate figure in clause F.1 of the present document.
If the Test System for a test is known to have a measurement uncertainty greater than that specified in clause F.1, it is
still permitted to use this apparatus provided that an adjustment is made value as follows:
Any additional uncertainty in the Test System over and above that specified in clause F.1 shall be used to tighten the
Test Requirement, making the test harder to pass. For some tests, for example receiver tests, this may require
modification of stimulus signals. This procedure will ensure that a Test System not compliant with clause F.1does not
increase the chance of passing a device under test where that device would otherwise have failed the test if a Test
System compliant with clause F.1 had been used.
F.1.3 Test Tolerance and Derivation of Test Requirements

(informative)
The Test Requirements in the present document have been calculated by relaxing the Minimum Requirements of the
core specification using the Test Tolerances defined in this clause. When the Test Tolerance is zero, the Test
Requirement will be the same as the Minimum Requirement. When the Test Tolerance is non-zero, the Test
Requirements will differ from the Minimum Requirements, and the formula used for the relaxation is given in this
clause.
ETSI
The Test Tolerances are derived from Test System uncertainties, regulatory requirements and criticality to system
performance. As a result, the Test Tolerances may sometimes be set to zero.
The test tolerances should not be modified for any reason e.g. to take account of commonly known test system errors
(such as mismatch, cable loss, etc.).
The downlink Test Tolerances apply at each receiver antenna connector.
F.1.3.1 Measurement of test environments

The UE test environments are set to the values defined in TS 36.508 subclause 4.1, without any relaxation. The applied
Test Tolerance is therefore zero.
F.1.3.2 Measurement of Demod Performance requirements

The derivation of the test requirements for the test cases in section 5 is defined in Table F.1.3.2-1.
ETSI
Table F.1.3.2-1: Derivation of Test Requirements (FR1 demodulation performance tests)
ETSI
Test Minimum Test Test Requirement in TS 38.521-4

Requirement Tolerance
in TS 38.101-4 (TT)
5.2.2.1.1_1 2Rx FDD FR1 PDSCH mapping SNRs as 0.9 dB for > Formula: SNR + TT
Type A performance - 2x2 MIMO with specified 10 Hz T-put limit unchanged
baseline receiver for both SA and NSA doppler
1.0 dB for
10Hz doppler
5.2.2.1.1_2 2Rx FDD FR1 PDSCH Mapping SNRs as 0.9 dB for > Formula: SNR + TT
enhanced receiver type X for both SA and doppler
NSA 1.0 dB for
10Hz doppler
Type A and CSI-RS overlapped with specified 10 Hz T-put limit unchanged
PDSCH performance - 2x2 MIMO with doppler
baseline receiver for both SA and NSA 1.0 dB for
10Hz doppler
Type B performance - 2x2 MIMO with specified 10 Hz T-put limit unchanged
1.0 dB for
10Hz doppler
Type A and LTE-NR coexistence specified 10 Hz T-put limit unchanged
performance - 4x2 MIMO with baseline doppler
receiver for both SA and NSA 1.0 dB for
10Hz doppler
5.2.2.2.1_1 2Rx TDD FR1 PDSCH mapping SNRs as 0.9 dB for > Formula: SNR + TT
1.0 dB for
10Hz doppler
5.2.2.2.1_2 2Rx TDD FR1 PDSCH Mapping SNRs as 0.9 dB for > Formula: SNR + TT
enhanced receiver type X for both SA and doppler
NSA 1.0 dB for
10Hz doppler
Type A and CSI-RS overlapped with specified 10 Hz T-put limit unchanged
PDSCH performance - 2x2 MIMO with doppler
baseline receiver for both SA and NSA 1.0 dB for
10Hz doppler
Type B performance - 2x2 MIMO with specified 10 Hz T-put limit unchanged
1.0 dB for
10Hz doppler
5.3.2.1.2 2Rx FDD FR1 PDCCH 2 Tx SNRs as 0.9 dB for > Formula: SNR + TT
antenna performance for both SA and NSA specified 10 Hz T-put limit unchanged
doppler
1.0 dB for
10Hz doppler
5.3.2.1.1 2Rx FDD FR1 PDCCH 1 Tx SNRs as 0.9 dB for > Formula: SNR + TT
antenna performance for both SA and NSA specified 10 Hz T-put limit unchanged
doppler
1.0 dB for
10Hz doppler
5.3.2.2.1 2Rx TDD FR1 PDCCH 1 Tx SNRs as 0.9 dB Formula: SNR + TT
antenna performance for both SA and NSA specified T-put limit unchanged

ETSI
5.3.3.1.1 4Rx FDD FR1 PDCCH 1 Tx SNRs as 0.9 dB Formula: SNR + TT

5.3.3.1.2 4Rx FDD FR1 PDCCH 2 Tx SNRs as 1.0 dB Formula: SNR + TT



Type A performance - 2x4 MIMO baseline specified 10Hz doppler T-put limit unchanged
10Hz doppler
Type A performance - 4x4 MIMO baseline specified 10Hz doppler T-put limit unchanged
10Hz doppler
Type A performance - 4x4 MIMO with specified 10Hz doppler T-put limit unchanged
enhanced receiver type X for both SA and 1.0 dB for
NSA 10Hz doppler
Type A and LTE-NR coexistence specified 10 Hz T-put limit unchanged
performance - 4x4 MIMO with baseline doppler
10Hz doppler
F.1.3.3 Measurement of Channel State Information reporting

The derivation of the test requirements for the test cases in section 6 is defined in Table F.1.3.3-1.
Table F.1.3.3-1: Derivation of Test Requirements (FR1 channel state information reporting tests)
Test Minimum Test Tolerance Test Requirement in TS 38.521-4
Requirement in (TT)
TS 38.101-4
6.2.2.1.2.12Rx FDD FR1 periodic SNRs as SNR TBD dB SNR TBD
wideband CQI reporting under fading specified α TBD α limit TBD
conditions for both SA and NSA α [20%] γ TBD γ 1limit TBD
γ [1.05] BLER TBD BLER limit TBD
BLER [0.02]
6.2.2.1.2.22Rx FDD FR1 periodic SNRs as SNR TBD dB SNR TBD
subband CQI reporting under fading specified α TBD α limit TBD
conditions for both SA and NSA α TBD β TBD β limit TBD
β TBD γ TBD γ 1limit TBD
γ TBD BLER TBD BLER limit TBD
BLER TBD
6.2.2.2.2.22Rx TDD FR1 periodic SNRs as SNR TBD dB SNR TBD
subband CQI reporting under fading specified α TBD α limit TBD
conditions for both SA and NSA α [2%] β TBD β limit TBD
β [55%] γ TBD γ 1limit TBD
γ [1.05] BLER TBD BLER limit TBD
BLER TBD
ETSI
Annex G (normative):
Statistical Testing
G.1 Statistical testing of Performance Requirements with

throughput
G.1.1 General
The test of receiver performance characteristics is twofold.
1. A signal or a combination of signals is offered to the RX port(s) of the receiver.
2. The ability of the receiver to demodulate /decode this signal is verified by measuring the throughput.
In (2) is the statistical aspect of the test and is treated here.
The minimum requirement for all receiver performance tests is either 70 % or 30 % of the maximum throughput.
All receiver performance tests are performed in fading conditions. In addition to the statistical considerations, this
requires the definition of a minimum test time.
G.1.2 Mapping throughput to error ratio

a) The measured information bit throughput R is defined as the sum (in kilobits) of the information bit payloads
successfully received during the test interval, divided by the duration of the test interval (in seconds).
b) In measurement practice the UE indicates successfully received information bit payload by signalling an ACK to
the SS.
If payload is received, but damaged and cannot be decoded, the UE signals a NACK.
c) Only the ACK and NACK signals, not the data bits received, are accessible to the SS.
The number of bits is known in the SS from knowledge of what payload was sent.
d) For the reference measurement channel, applied for testing, the number of bits is different in different subframes,
however in a radio frame it is fixed during one test.
e) The time in the measurement interval is composed of successfully received subframes (ACK), unsuccessfully
received subframes (NACK) and no reception at all (DTX-subframes).
f) DTX-subframes may occur regularly according the applicable reference measurement channel (regDTX).
In real live networks this is the time when other UEs are served. In TDD these are the UL and special subframes.
regDTX vary from test to test but are fixed within the test.
g) Additional DTX-subframes occur statistically when the UE is not responding ACK or NACK where it should.
(statDTX)
This may happen when the UE was not expecting data or decided that the data were not intended for it.
The pass / fail decision is done by observing the:
- number of NACKs
- number of ACKs and
- number of statDTXs (regDTX is implicitly known to the SS)
The ratio (NACK + statDTX)/(NACK+ statDTX + ACK)is the Error Ratio (ER). Taking into account the time
consumed by the ACK, NACK, and DTX-TTIs (regular and statistical), ER can be mapped unambiguously to
throughput for any single reference measurement channel test.
ETSI
G.1.3 Design of the test

The test is defined by the following design principles (see clause G.2, Theory):
1. The standard concept is applied. (not the early decision concept)
2. A second limit is introduced: The second limit is different, whether 30 % or 70 % throughput is tested.
3. To decide the test pass:
Supplier risk is applied based on the Bad DUT quality
To decide the test fail:
Customer Risk is applied based on the specified DUT quality
The test is defined by the following parameters:
1a) Limit Error Ratio = 0.3 (in case 70 % Throughput is tested) or
1b) Limit Throughput = 0.3 (in case 30 % Throughput is tested)
2a) Bad DUT factor M=1.378 (selectivity)
2b) Bad DUT factor m=0.692 (selectivity)
justification see: TS 34.121 Clause F.6.3.3
3) Confidence level CL = 95 % (for specified DUT and Bad DUT-quality)
G.1.4 Pass Fail limit

Testing Throughput = 30 %, then the test limit is
Number of successes (ACK) / number of samples ≥ 59 / 233
Testing Throughput = 70 % then the test limit is
Number of fails (NACK and statDTX) / number of samples ≤ 66 / 184
There are 3 distinct cases:
a) The duration for the number of samples (233 or 184) is greater than the minimum test time:
Then the number of samples (233 or 184) is predefined and the decision is done according to the number of events
(59 successes or 66 fails)
b) Since subframe 0 and 5 contain less bits than the remaining subframes, it is allowed to predefine a number of
samples contained in an integer number of frames. In this case test-limit-ratio applies.
c) The minimum test time is greater than the duration for the number of samples:
The minimum test time is predefined and the decision is done comparing the measured ratio at that instant against
the test-limit-ratio.
NOTE: The test time for most of the tests is governed by the Minimum Test Time.
G.1.5 Minimum Test time

Editor's Note: Simulation method to derive minimum test time for FR2 needs to be evaluated.
If a pass fail decision in clause G.1.4 can be achieved earlier than the minimum test time, then the test shall not be
decided, but continued until the minimum test time is elapsed.
The tables below contain the minimum number of slots for FDD and TDD.
ETSI
By simulations the minimum number of active subframes (carrying DL payload) was derived (MNAS), then adding
inactive subframes to the active ones. For TDD additional subframes contain no DL payload) then rounding up to full
thousand and then adding a bias of 1000 (BMNSF).
Simulation method to derive minimum test time:
With a level, corresponding a throughput at the test limit (here 30 % or 70 % of the max. throughput) the preliminary
throughput versus time converges towards the final throughput. The allowance of ± 0.2 dB around the above mentioned
level is predefined by RAN5 to find the minimum test time. The allowance of ±0.2 dB maps through the function "final
throughput versus level" into a throughput corridor. The minimum test time is achieved when the preliminary
throughput escapes the corridor the last time. The two functions "final throughput versus level" and "preliminary
throughput versus time" are simulation results, which are done individual for each demodulation scenario.
final throughput preliminary

versus level throughput versus time
Last escape
from the
corridor final
throughput
for test limit

e.g. 70%
Level in dB time
Allowance: Level for 70% Result:
±0.2dB throughput Mimimum
test time
Figure G.1.5-1: Simulation method to derive minimum test time
ETSI
Table G.1.5-1: Minimum Test time for 2Rx FDD FR1 PDSCH Type A performance
Test Demodulation scenario Minimum Minimum Minimum Minimum
No (info only) Test Time number of number of Number of
(seconds) subframes active Active
(Based on (MNS = subframes Subframes
simulations) active and (MNAS) (MNAS) after
inactive (Information rounding up
subframes) only) to nearest
thousand
MNAS=
(mandatory)
1-1 R.PDSCH.1-1.1 FDD 10 10000 10526 11000
10MHz ChBW/15kHz SCS, QPSK,
0.30,
2x2, ULA Low
TDLB100ns-400Hz
1-2 R.PDSCH.1-1.2 FDD 20 20000 21052 22000
0.30,
2x2, ULA Low
TDLC300ns-100Hz
1-3 R.PDSCH.1-4.1 FDD 75 75000 78947 79000
10MHz ChBW/15kHz SCS, 256QAM,
0.82,
2x2, ULA Low
TDLA30ns-10Hz
1-4 R.PDSCH.1-2.1 FDD 20 20000 21052 22000
0.48,
2x2, ULA Low
TDLC300ns-100Hz
2-1 R.PDSCH.1-3.1 FDD 75 75000 78947 79000
0.51,
2x2, ULA Low
TDLA30ns-10Hz
2-2 R.PDSCH.2-1.1 FDD 75 75000 78947 79000
0.51,
2x2, ULA Low
TDLA30ns-10Hz
3-1 R.PDSCH.1-2.2 FDD 75 75000 78947 79000
0.48,
2x2, ULA Medium
TDLA30ns-10Hz
ETSI
Table G.1.5-2: Minimum Test time for 2Rx TDD FR1 PDSCH Type A performance
Test Demodulation scenario Minimum Test Minimum Minimum Minimum
No (info only) Time number of number of active Number of
(seconds) subframes subframes Active
(Based on (MNS = active (MNAS) Subframes
simulation) and inactive (Information (MNAS) after
subframes) only) rounding up to
nearest
thousand
MNAS=
ࡹࡺ࡭ࡿ
૚૙૙૙ ∗ ඄ ඈ
૚૙૙૙
(mandatory)
1-1 R.PDSCH.2-1.1 TDD 10 10000 14285 15000
40MHz ChBW/30kHz SCS,
QPSK, 0.30,
FR1.30-1, 2x2, ULA Low
TDLB100ns-400Hz
1-2 R.PDSCH.2-1.2 TDD 20 20000 28570 29000
QPSK, 0.30,
TDLC300ns-100Hz
1-3 R.PDSCH.2-4.1 TDD 75 75000 107143 108000
256QAM, 0.82,
TDLA30ns-10Hz
1-4 R.PDSCH.2-2.1 TDD 20 20000 28570 29000
16QAM, 0.48,
TDLC300ns-100Hz
1-5 [R.PDSCH.2-5.1 TDD] 75 75000 125000 125000
QPSK, 0.30,
TDLA30ns-10Hz
1-6 [R.PDSCH.2-6.1 TDD] 75 75000 125000 125000
QPSK, 0.30,
TDLA30ns-10Hz
2-1 R.PDSCH.2-3.1 TDD 75 75000 107143 108000
64QAM, 0.51,
TDLA30ns-10Hz
2-2 R.PDSCH.2-9.1 TDD 75 75000 107143 108000
64QAM, 0.51,
FR1.30-1A, 2x2, ULA Low
TDLA30ns-10Hz
3-1 R.PDSCH.2-2.2 TDD 75 75000 107143 108000
16QAM, 0.48,
FR1.30-1, 2x2, ULA Medium
TDLA30ns-10Hz
Editor’s note: The min test time specified in the table above to be used unless more simulation data suggests
changing the test time.
ETSI
Table G.1.5-3: Minimum Test time for 2Rx 2Tx FDD FR1 PDCCH Type A performance
simulation) active and (MNAS) (MNAS) after
thousand
MNAS=
(mandatory)
1 R.PDCCH.1-2.2 FDD 20 20000 21052 22000
2x2, ULA Low
TDLA300ns-100Hz
2 R.PDCCH.1-2.5 FDD 20 20000 21052 22000
2x2, ULA Low
TDLC300ns-100Hz
3 R.PDCCH.1-1.3 FDD 75 75000 78947 79000
10MHz ChBW/15kHz SCS
2x2, ULA Low
TDLA30ns-10Hz
thousand
MNAS=
(mandatory)
1 R.PDCCH.1-2.1 FDD 75 75000 78947 79000
2x2, ULA Low
TDLA30ns-10Hz
2 R.PDCCH.1-2.3 FDD 20 20000 21052 22000
2x2, ULA Low
TDLC300ns-100Hz
3 R.PDCCH.1-2.4 FDD 75 75000 78947 79000
2x2, ULA Low
TDLA30ns-10Hz
4 R.PDCCH.1-1.1 FDD 75 75000 78947 79000
2x2, ULA Low
TDLC30ns-10Hz
5 [R.PDCCH.1-2.6 FDD] 75 75000 78947 79000
2x2, ULA Low
TDLA30ns-10Hz
ETSI
Table G.1.5-5: Minimum Test time for 2Rx TDD FR1 PDSCH Type A and CSI-RS overlapped
performance
thousand
MNAS=
(mandatory)
1-1 R.PDSCH.2-7.1 TDD 20 20000 28571 29000
0.48,
FR1.30-1
2x2, ULA Low
TDLC300ns-100Hz
Table G.1.5-6: Minimum Test time for 2Rx 1Tx TDD FR1 PDCCH Type A performance
thousand
MNAS=
(mandatory)
1 R.PDCCH. 2-1.1 TDD 100 100000 142857 143000
1x2, ULA Low
TDLA30ns-10Hz
2 R.PDCCH. 2-1.2 TDD 100 100000 142857 143000
1x2, ULA Low
TDLC300ns-100Hz
3 R.PDCCH. 2-2.1 TDD 100 100000 142857 143000
1x2, ULA Low
TDLC300ns-100Hz
ETSI
thousand
MNAS=
(mandatory)
1 R.PDCCH. 2-1.3 TDD 100 100000 142857 143000
2x2, ULA Low
TDLC300ns-100Hz
thousand
MNAS=
(mandatory)
1 R.PDCCH. 1-2.1 FDD 100 100000 105263 106000
1x4, ULA Low
TDLA30ns-10Hz
2 R.PDCCH. 1-2.3 FDD 100 100000 105263 106000
1x4, ULA Low
TDLC300ns-100Hz
3 R.PDCCH. 1-2.4 FDD 100 100000 105263 106000
1x4, ULA Low
TDLA30ns-10Hz
4 R.PDCCH. 1-1.1 FDD 100 100000 105263 106000
1x4, ULA Low
TDLA30ns-10Hz
ETSI
thousand
MNAS=
(mandatory)
1 R.PDCCH. 1-2.2 FDD 100 100000 105263 106000
2x4, ULA Low
TDLC300ns-100Hz
2 R.PDCCH. 1-2.5 FDD 100 100000 105263 106000
2x4, ULA Low
TDLC300ns-100Hz
3 R.PDCCH. 1-1.3 FDD 100 100000 105263 106000
2x4, ULA Low
TDLA30ns-10Hz
thousand
MNAS=
(mandatory)
1 R.PDCCH. 2-1.1 TDD 100 100000 142857 143000
1x4, ULA Low
TDLA30ns-10Hz
2 R.PDCCH. 2-1.2 TDD 100 100000 142857 143000
1x4, ULA Low
TDLC300ns-100Hz
3 R.PDCCH. 2-2.1 TDD 100 100000 142857 143000
1x4, ULA Medium A
TDLA30ns-10Hz
ETSI
thousand
MNAS=
(mandatory)
1 [TBD] 100 100000 142857 143000
2x4, ULA Low
TDLC300ns-100Hz
ETSI
Table G.1.5-12: Minimum Test time for 4Rx FDD FR1 PDSCH Type A performance
simulations active and (MNAS) (MNAS) after
thousand
MNAS=
(mandatory)
1-1 R.PDSCH.1-1.1 FDD 10 10000 10526 11000
0.30,
2x4, ULA Low
TDLB100ns-400Hz
1-2 R.PDSCH.1-1.2 FDD 20 20000 21052 22000
0.30,
2x4, ULA Low
TDLC300ns-100Hz
1-3 R.PDSCH.1-4.1 FDD 75 75000 78947 79000
0.82,
2x4, ULA Low
TDLA30ns-10Hz
1-4 R.PDSCH.1-2.1 FDD 20 20000 21052 22000
0.48,
2x2, ULA Low
TDLC300ns-100Hz
2-1 R.PDSCH.1-3.1 FDD 75 75000 78947 79000
0.51,
2x4, ULA Low
TDLA30ns-10Hz
2-2 R.PDSCH.2-1.1 FDD 75 75000 78947 79000
0.51,
2x4, ULA Low
TDLA30ns-10Hz
3-1 R.PDSCH.1-2.3 FDD 75 75000 78947 79000
0.48,
4x4, ULA Low
TDLA30ns-10Hz
4-1 R.PDSCH.1-2.4 FDD 75 75000 78947 79000
0.48,
4x4, ULA Low
TDLA30ns-10Hz
5-1 R.PDSCH.1-2.3 FDD 75 75000 78947 79000
0.48,
4x4, ULA Medium A
TDLA30ns-10Hz
ETSI
Table G.1.5-13: Minimum Test time for 2Rx FDD FR1 PDSCH Type A performance for LTE-NR
coexistence scenario
thousand
MNAS=
(mandatory)
1-1 R.PDSCH.1-7.1 FDD 75 75000 93750 94000
0.30,
4x2, ULA Low
TDLA30ns-10Hz
1-2 R.PDSCH.1-7.2 FDD 75 75000 93750 94000
0.30,
4x2, ULA Low
TDLC30ns-10Hz
Table G.1.5-14: Minimum Test time for 4Rx FDD FR1 PDSCH Type A performance for LTE-NR
coexistence scenario
thousand
MNAS=
(mandatory)
1-1 R.PDSCH.1-7.1 FDD 75 75000 93750 94000
0.30,
4x4, ULA Low
TDLA30ns-10Hz
1-2 R.PDSCH.1-7.2 FDD 75 75000 93750 94000
0.30,
4x4, ULA Low
TDLC30ns-10Hz
ETSI
Table G.1.5-15: Minimum Test time for 2Rx FDD FR1 PDSCH mapping Type A and CSI-RS overlapped
with PDSCH performance
Test Demodulation scenario Minimum Test Minimum Minimum Minimum
No (info only) Time number of number of active Number of
(seconds) subframes subframes Active
(Based on (MNS = active (MNAS) Subframes
simulation) and inactive (Information (MNAS) after
subframes) only) rounding up to
nearest
thousand
MNAS=
ࡹࡺ࡭ࡿ
૚૙૙૙ ∗ ඄ ඈ
૚૙૙૙
(mandatory)
1-1 R.PDSCH.1-5.1 FDD 20 20000 28570 29000
16QAM, 0.48,
TDLC300ns-100Hz
Table G.1.5-16: Minimum Test time for 2Rx TDD FR1 PDSCH mapping Type A and CSI-RS overlapped
with PDSCH performance
FFS
G.2 Theory to derive the numbers for statistical testing

(informative)
Editor's note: This clause of the Annex G is for information only and it described the background theory and
information for statistical testing.
G.2.1 Error Ratio (ER)

The Error Ratio (ER) is defined as the ratio of number of errors (ne) to all results, number of samples (ns).
(1-ER is the success ratio).
G.2.2 Test Design

A statistical test is characterized by:
Test-time, Selectivity and Confidence level.
G.2.3 Confidence level

The outcome of a statistical test is a decision. This decision may be correct or in-correct. The Confidence Level CL
describes the probability that the decision is a correct one. The complement is the wrong decision probability (risk) D =
1-CL.
G.2.4 Introduction: Supplier Risk versus Customer Risk

There are two targets of decision:
(a) A measurement on the pass-limit shows, that the DUT has the specified quality or is better with probability CL
(CL e.g.95 %). This shall lead to a "pass decision".
ETSI
The pass-limit is on the good side of the specified DUT-quality. A more stringent CL (CL e.g.99 %) shifts the
pass-limit farer into the good direction. Given the quality of the DUTs is distributed, a greater CL passes less and
better DUTs.
A measurement on the bad side of the pass-limit is simply "not pass" (undecided or artificial fail).
(aa) Complementary:
A measurement on the fail-limit shows, that the DUT is worse than the specified quality with probability CL.
The fail-limit is on the bad side of the specified DUT-quality. A more stringent CL shifts the fail-limit farer
into the bad direction. Given the quality of the DUTs is distributed, a greater CL fails less and worse DUTs.
A measurement on the good side of the fail-limit is simply "not fail".
(b) A DUT, known to have the specified quality, shall be measured and decided pass with probability CL. This leads
to the test limit.
For CL e.g. 95 %, the test limit is on the bad side of the specified DUT-quality. CL e.g.99 % shifts the pass-limit
farer into the bad direction. Given the DUT-quality is distributed, a greater CL passes more and worse DUTs.

(bb) A DUT, known to be an (ε 0) beyond the specified quality, shall be measured and decided fail with
probability CL.
For CL e.g.95 %, the test limit is on the good side of the specified DUT-quality.
NOTE 1: The different sense for CL in (a), (aa) versus (b), (bb).
NOTE 2: For constant CL in all 4 bullets (a) is equivalent to (bb) and (aa) is equivalent to (b).
G.2.5 Supplier Risk versus Customer Risk

The table below summarizes the different targets of decision.
Table G.2.5-1: Equivalent statements
Equivalent statements, using different cause-to-effect-directions,

and assuming CL = constant >1/2
cause-to-effect- Known measurement result  Known DUT's quality 
directions estimation of the DUT's quality estimation of the measurement's
outcome
Supplier Risk A measurement on the pass-limit A DUT, known to have an (ε 0) 
shows, that the DUT has the beyond the specified DUT-quality,
specified quality or is better (a) shall be measured and decided
fail (bb)
Customer Risk A measurement on the fail-limit A DUT, known to have the
shall shows, that the DUT is specified quality, shall be
worse than the specified quality measured and decided pass (b)
(aa)
The shaded area shown the direct interpretation of Supplier Risk and Customer Risk.
The same statements can be based on other DUT-quality-definitions.
G.2.6 Introduction: Standard test versus early decision concept

In standard statistical tests, a certain number of results (ns) is predefined in advance to the test. After ns results the
number of bad results (ne) is counted and the error ratio (ER) is calculated by ne/ns.
Applying statistical theory, a decision limit can be designed, against which the calculated ER is compared to derive the
decision. Such a limit is one decision point and is characterized by:
- D: the wrong decision probability (a predefined parameter)
ETSI
- ns: the number of results (a fixed predefined parameter)
- ne: the number of bad results (the limit based on just ns)
In the formula for the limit, D and ns can be understood as variable parameter and variable. However the standard test
execution requires fixed ns and D. The property of such a test is: It discriminates between two states only, depending on
the test design:
- pass (with CL) / undecided (undecided in the sense: finally undecided)
- fail (with CL) / undecided (undecided in the sense: finally undecided)
- pass(with CL) / fail (with CL) (however against two limits).
In contrast to the standard statistical tests, the early decision concept predefines a set of (ne,ns) co-ordinates,
representing the limit-curve for decision. After each result a preliminary ER is calculated and compared against the
limit-curve. After each result one may make the decision or not (undecided for later decision). The parameters and
variables in the limit-curve for the early decision concept have a similar but not equal meaning:
- D: the wrong decision probability (a predefined parameter)
- ns: the number of results (a variable parameter)
- ne: the number of bad results (the limit. It varies together with ns)
To avoid a "final undecided" in the standard test, a second limit shall be introduced and the single decision co-ordinate
(ne,ns) needs a high ne, leading to a fixed (high) test time. In the early decision concept, having the same selectivity and
the same confidence level an "undecided" need not to be avoided, as it can be decided later. A perfect DUT will hit the
decision coordinate (ne,ns) with ne=0. This test time is short.
G.2.7 Standard test versus early decision concept

For Supplier Risk:
The wrong decision probability D in the standard test is the probability, to decide a DUT in-correct in the single
decision point. In the early decision concept there is a probability of in-correct decisions d at each point of the limit-
curve. The sum of all those wrong decision probabilities accumulate to D. Hence d<D.
For Customer Risk:
The correct decision probability CL in the standard test is the probability, to decide a DUT correct in the single decision
point. In the early decision concept there is a probability of correct decisions cl at each point of the limit-curve. The sum
of all those correct decision probabilities accumulate to CL. Hence cl<CL or d>D.
G.2.8 Selectivity

There is no statistical test which can discriminate between a limit DUT and a DUT which is an (ε 0) apart from the
limit in finite time and high confidence level CL. Either the test discriminates against one limit with the results pass
(with CL)/undecided or fail (with CL)/undecided, or the test ends in a result pass (with CL)/fail (with CL) but this
requires a second limit.
For CL>1/2, a (measurement-result = specified-DUT-quality), generates undecided in test "supplier risk against pass
limit" (a, from above) and also in the test "customer risk against the fail limit " (aa)
For CL>1/2, a DUT, known to be on the limit, will be decided pass for the test "customer risk against pass limit" (b)
and also "supplier risk against fail limit" (bb).
This overlap or undecided area is not a fault or a contradiction, however it can be avoided by introducing a Bad or a
Good DUT quality according to:
- Bad DUT quality: specified DUT-quality * M (M>1)
- Good DUT quality: specified DUT-quality * m (m<1)
ETSI
Using e.g. M>1 and CL=95 % the test for different DUT qualities yield different pass probabilities:
100%
95%
Pass- A
Proba-
bility
50%
B
5%
0%
0 specified quality M* specified quality DUT quality in ER
Figure G.2.8-1: Pass probability versus DUT quality
G.2.9 Design of the test

The receiver characteristic test are defined by the following design principles:
1. The early decision concept is applied.
2. A second limit is introduced: Bad DUT factor M>1
3. To decide the test pass:
Supplier risk is applied based on the Bad DUT quality
To decide the test fail
Customer Risk is applied based on the specified DUT quality
The receiver characteristic test are defined by the following parameters:
1. Limit ER = 0.05
2. Bad DUT factor M=1.5 (selectivity)
3. Confidence level CL = 95 % (for specified DUT and Bad DUT-quality)
This has the following consequences:
1. A measurement on the fail limit is connected with 2 equivalent statements:
A measurement on the fail-limit shows, that the A DUT, known have the specified quality,
DUT is worse than the specified DUT-quality shall be measured and decided pass
2. A measurement on the pass limit is connected with the complementary statements:
A measurement on the pass limit shows, that the A DUT, known to have the Bad DUT quality,
DUT is better than the Bad DUT-quality. shall be measured and decided fail
ETSI
The left column is used to decide the measurement.
The right column is used to verify the design of the test by simulation.
The simulation is based on the two fulcrums A and B only in Figure G.2.8-1
3. Test time
The minimum and maximum test time is fixed.
The average test time is a function of the DUT's quality.
The individual test time is not predictable.
4. The number of decision co-ordinates (ne,ns) in the early decision concept is responsible for the selectivity of the
test and the maximum test time. Having fixed the number of decision co-ordinates there is still freedom to select
the individual decision co-ordinates in many combinations, all leading to the same confidence level.
G.2.10 Simulation to derive the pass fail limits

There is freedom to design the decision co-ordinates (ne,ns).
The binomial distribution and its inverse is used to design the pass and fail limits. Note that this method is not unique
and that other methods exist.
ne
( )
fail ne , df :=
(ne + qnbinomd
( f , ne , ER))
ne
(
passne , clp, M := )
( ne + qnbinomcl
( p, ne , ER⋅M) )
Where
- fail(..) is the error ratio for the fail limit
- pass(..) is the error ratio for the pass limit
- ER is the specified error ratio 0.05
- ne is the number of bad results. This is the variable in both equations
- M is the Bad DUT factor M=1.5
- df is the wrong decision probability of a single (ne,ns) co-ordinate for the fail limit.
It is found by simulation to be df = 0.004
- clp is the confidence level of a single (ne,ns) co-ordinate for the pass limit.
It is found by simulation to be clp = 0.9975
- qnbinom(..): The inverse cumulative function of the negative binomial distribution
The simulation works as follows:
- A large population of limit DUTs with true ER = 0.05 is decided against the pass and fail limits.
- clp and df are tuned such that CL (95 %) of the population passes and D (5 %) of the population fails.
- A population of Bad DUTs with true ER = M*0.05 is decided against the same pass and fail limits.
- clp and df are tuned such that CL (95 %) of the population fails and D (5 %) of the population passes.
ETSI
- This procedure and the relationship to the measurement is justified in clause G.2.9. The number of DUTs
decrease during the simulation, as the decided DUTs leave the population. That number decreases with an
approximately exponential characteristics. After 169 bad results all DUTs of the population are decided.
NOTE: The exponential decrease of the population is an optimal design goal for the decision co-ordinates (ne,ns),
which can be achieved with other formulas or methods as well.
ETSI
Annex H (informative):
Test Procedure for FR2 Demod Testing
This annex specifies the common test procedure for FR2 demodulation performance testing.
FR2 demodulation testing can be split into following 3 stages:
- Stage1: Selecting the best UE beam during initial call setup.
- Stage2: Before the actual test measurement starts, ensure the channel is conducive for UE to start decoding a
given MCS as required by the RAN4 requirement.
- Stage 3: Actual test with RAN4 defined test parameters starts.
Following test function is defined to accomplish stage1 and stage2:
1 DUT position in the test zone.
- If known, align the DUT to the best {X,Y,Z} location in the test zone:
- Where {X,Y,Z} are the co-ordinate points for aligning DUT Antenna Panel, such that the panel is:
- Center Aligned of the Test zone (Quiet Zone); and/or
- Center Aligned to the boresight of the TRxP
- Else:
- Align the geometric center of the DUT to the center of the quiet zone.
2. Determine the best DUT position for stage3:
- Maximize various metricsRank, RSRP Per branch (RSRPB).
- Maximize any other metrics (FFS) based on configured measurements.
- Best {Azimuth, Elevation} position in a sweep list of N {Azimuth1..n, Elevation1..n}:
- Where {Azimuth1..n, Elevation1..n} are distinct Azimuth & Elevation points
- DUT positioner is swept through these distinct points using a measurement grid FFS.
3. Additional Procedure (Optional):
- Identify the actual Pathloss for run time compensation in the testcase:
- Define the use of the pathloss in the test
- Use of [Expected Pathloss - Actual Pathloss] in the test
- Optionally identify the best TRxP, if applicable:
- Store data in a calibration file for further use.
- Define the procedure for controlling the positioner:
- SCPI based definitions
ETSI
Figure Y-1: Test Function Usage in Demod/RRM (and optionally Signalling)
Stage1 & Stage2 in NSA Mode:
The below flow chart details the steps for Stage 1 and Stage 2 in NSA Mode for demodulation testing and possibly
applicable to RRM scenarios.
ETSI
Figure Y-2: Flow Chart depicting Test Steps for Stage 1 & 2 in NSA Mode for Demod/RRM
Steps
1) Power-up the UE in NSA Mode, and let the LTE ATTACH go through.
2) TE now configures the DUT to report RSRPB for the configured NR PSCell.
3) TE also configures UE to report RI.
4) Check if RI is as expected and DUT reports RSRPB within an expected pre-defined tolerance limit +/- "x" dB.
5) If the reported RSRPB is not within this pre-defined tolerance limit or RI is not as expected, sweep the Azimuth
and Elevation points {Azimuth, Elevation}, with the help of UE Positioner.
6) Stop the sweep once the DUT reports RSRPB within pre-defined tolerance limits and RI is as expected.
7) Stage 1 and Stage 2 have passed in NSA Mode, and Test can proceed to Stage 3, which is the actual Demod
Test.
8) If list of sweep positions completed without the criteria for RSRPB or RI report being met, optionally use
additional TRxP to do step 2 to 7.
9) Any other metric to check is FFS.
10) Optionally the best DUT position along with the Azimuth and Elevation, and the RSRPB or any other metrics is
stored in an output file, and the calibration file is also updated.
Stage 1 in SA Mode:
The below flow chart details the steps for Stage 1 in SA Mode for Demod Tests, and possibly applicable to RRM.
ETSI
Figure Y-3: Flow Chart depicting Test Steps for Stage1 in SA Mode for Demod/RRM
Steps
1) If the DUT Antenna Panel exact position is known, then place it in the center of Test Zone/Quiet Zone in a
perfect alignment forming a boresight with the active TRxP.
2) Else, align the geometric center of the DUT to the center of the quiet zone.
3) If this position is not known, iteratively sweep the Azimuth and Elevation points {Azimuth, Elevation}, with the
help of UE Positioner.
4) For each Azimuth and Elevation point, TE waits for the DUT to RACH, indicating the DUT has found the best
beam to RACH on to followed by ATTACH procedure, indicating Stage 1 has passed.
5) The wait for RACH and eventual ATTACH is tried until a certain timer expires.
6) If the timer expires and ATTACH is unsuccessful,
a) Go to next Azimuth and Elevation and repeat the steps 3-4.
b) Else optionally evaluate using additional TRxP.
c) If ATTACH still not completed, declare the test inconclusive.
7) If the Test Passes, optionally the Test Equipment Calibration File is updated with the Azimuth and Elevation
values where the DUT successfully ATTACHED, and the path loss is also updated, if known.
Stage 2 in SA Mode
The below flow chart details the steps for Stage 2 in SA Mode for demodulation tests, and possibly applicable to RRM.
ETSI
Figure Y-4: Flow Chart depicting Test Steps for Stage 2 in SA Mode for Demod/RRM
Steps
1) Keeping the DUT in the same position in which it passed the Stage 1,
2) TE configures the DUT to report RI and RSRPB.
3) Check if RI reported is as expected and the DUT reports RSRPB within a pre-defined tolerance limit of +/- "x"
dB.
4) If the reported RSRPB is not within this pre-defined tolerance limit or RI is not as expected, sweep the Azimuth
and Elevation points {Azimuth, Elevation}, with the help of UE Positioner.
5) Stop the sweep once the DUT reports RSRPB within pre-defined tolerance limits and RI is as expected.
6) Stage 2 has now passed and test can proceed to Stage 3, which is the actual Demod Test.
7) If list of sweep positions completed without RSRPB or RI report as expected, optionally use additional TRxP to
do step 2 to 5.
8) Any other metric to check is FFS.
9) Optionally the best DUT position along with the Azimuth and Elevation, and the RSRPB or any other metric is
stored in an output file, and the calibration file is also updated.
ETSI
Annex I (informative):
Change history
ETSI
Change history
Date Meeting Tdoc CR Rev Cat Subject/Comment New
version
2018-01 R5-180064 Skeleton for NR Demod spec 0.0.1
2018-04-13 R5-182036 Added the test procedure for FR2 Demod testing in Annex 0.1.0
2018-10-12 R5-185903 Added the demod spec test case section titles to be in line with 0.1.1
RAN4 approved skeleton for 38.101-4
2018-11-20 RAN5 #81 R5-188006 new TC for PDSCH FR1 demod 0.2.0
2018-11-20 RAN5 #81 R5-188008 new TC for PDSCH FR2 demod 0.2.0
2018-11-20 RAN5 #81 R5-187573 section 3 of 38.521-4 spec 0.2.0
2018-11-20 RAN5 #81 R5-187845 section 4 of 38.521-4 spec 0.2.0
2018-11-20 RAN5 #81 R5-188009 pCR for new TC addition for FR1 FDD PDSCH Demod 0.2.0
2018-11-20 RAN5 #81 R5-188010 pCR for new TC addition for FR1 FDD PDCCH Demod 0.2.0
2019-01-25 RAN5 5G- R5-190054 update to 2Rx TDD FR1 PDSCH mapping Type A performance 0.3.0
NR AH#4 test case
2019-01-25 RAN5 5G- R5-190926 pCR for new TC addition for FR1 4Rx FDD PDSCH 0.3.0
NR AH#4 Demodulation performance (2x4)
NR AH#4 Demodulation performance (4x4)
NR AH#4 Demodulation performance with enhanced receiver type X (4x4)
2019-01-25 RAN5 5G- R5-190291 Updated to Annex A Measurement Channels for Performance 0.3.0
NR AH#4 tests
2019-01-25 RAN5 5G- R5-190292 Updated to Annex B Propagation conditions for Performance 0.3.0
NR AH#4 tests
2019-01-25 RAN5 5G- R5-190458 update to 2Rx TDD FR2 PDSCH mapping Type A performance 0.3.0
NR AH#4 test case
2019-01-25 RAN5 5G- R5-190461 2Rx TDD FR2 PDCCH performance test case 0.3.0
NR AH#4
2019-01-25 RAN5 5G- R5-190929 LTE link setup details for demod test cases 0.3.0
NR AH#4
2019-01-25 RAN5 5G- R5-190930 Annex for statistical tput calculation for demod test cases 0.3.0
NR AH#4
2019-01-25 RAN5 5G- R5-190931 pCR for TC addition of FR1 TDD 4Rx PDSCH 0.3.0
NR AH#4
2019-01-25 RAN5 5G- R5-190932 pCR for modification of FDD 2Rx FR1 PDSCH Demod 0.3.0
NR AH#4
2019-01-25 RAN5 5G- R5-190933 Annex for DL and UL Signal Setup 0.3.0
NR AH#4
2019-01-25 RAN5 5G- R5-190934 pCR for modification of FDD FR1 PDCCH Demod 0.3.0
NR AH#4
2019-01-25 RAN5 5G- R5-190935 PDSCH and PDCCH Config before measurement 0.3.0
NR AH#4
2019-01-25 RAN5 5G- R5-190986 38.521-4 Common Section updates to clarify leverage across 0.3.0
NR AH#4 architecture options
2019-01-25 RAN5 5G- R5-190552 Addition of 2Rx TDD FR1 Single PMI tests for both SA and NSA 0.3.0
NR AH#4
2019-01-25 RAN5 5G- R5-190553 Addition of 2Rx TDD FR1 RI reporting for both SA and NSA 0.3.0
NR AH#4
2019-03-01 RAN5 #82 R5-191183 Adding relevant references to 38.521-4 0.4.0
2019-03-01 RAN5 #82 R5-192461 Adding of test case 6.2.2.1.2.1.2, Rx FDD FR1 periodic 0.4.0
wideband CQI reporting under fading conditions for both SA and
NSA
2019-03-01 RAN5 #82 R5-192672 Introduction of New test case 5.3.2.2.1 2Rx TDD FR1 PDCCH 1 0.4.0
Tx antenna performance for both SA and NSA
2019-03-01 RAN5 #82 R5-192462 Introduction of New test case 5.3.3.1.1 4Rx FDD FR1 PDCCH 1 0.4.0
2019-03-01 RAN5 #82 R5-192464 Introduction of New test case 5.3.3.1.2 4Rx FDD FR1 PDCCH 2 0.4.0
2019-03-01 RAN5 #82 R5-192474 Introduction of TS 38.521-4 test case 6.3.2.1.1 0.4.0
2019-03-01 RAN5 #82 R5-192475 Introduction of TS 38.521-4 test case 6.3.2.1.2 0.4.0
2019-03-01 RAN5 #82 R5-192467 Introduction of test case 5.2.2.1.2_1, 2Rx FDD FR1 PDSCH 0.4.0
mapping Type A and CSI-RS overlapped with PDSCH
performance - 2x2 MIMO with baseline receiver for both SA and
NSA
2019-03-01 RAN5 #82 R5-192840 Demod spec section 4 update 0.4.0
ETSI
2019-03-01 RAN5 #82 R5-192673 Update to TDD FR1 2Rx PDSCH Type A test case 0.4.0
2019-03-01 RAN5 #82 R5-192103 addition of 2Rx TDD FR1 periodic CQI reporting test case 0.4.0
2019-03-01 RAN5 #82 R5-192468 pCR for addition of 2Rx TDD FR1 TypeA and CSI-RS 0.4.0
overlapped TC
2019-03-01 RAN5 #82 R5-192866 pCR for modification of PDSCH and PDCCH Config before 0.4.0
measurement
2019-03-01 RAN5 #82 R5-192470 pCR for modification of FDD FR1 PDCCH Demod 0.4.0
2019-03-01 RAN5 #82 R5-192471 pCR for modification of FDD 2Rx FR1 PDSCH Demod 0.4.0
2019-03-01 RAN5 #82 R5-192472 Update to 2Rx TDD FR1 RI reporting for both SA and NSA 0.4.0
2019-03-01 RAN5 #82 R5-192460 Minimum test time update for FR1 Demod test case 0.4.0
2019-03-01 RAN5 #82 R5-192473 Addition of Annex F for Demod spec 0.4.0
2019-03 RAN#83 RP-190222 - - - Presented to the RAN#83 plenary for 1-step approval 1.0.0
2019-03 RAN#83 - - - - raised to v15.0.0 with editorial changes only 15.0.0
2019-06 RAN5#83 R5-193544 0030 - F Updates to test case 6.2.2.1.2.1, 2Rx FDD FR1 periodic 15.1.0
wideband CQI reporting under fading conditions for both SA and
NSA
2019-06 RAN5#83 R5-193943 0035 - F Adding test case 6.2.2.2.2.2, 2Rx TDD FR1 periodic subband 15.1.0
CQI reporting under fading conditions for both SA and NSA
2019-06 RAN5#83 R5-194159 0048 - F Alignment of Annex C with core specification 15.1.0
2019-06 RAN5#83 R5-194466 0056 - F Introduction of FR1 CQI test case 6.2.2.2.2.1 15.1.0
2019-06 RAN5#83 R5-194622 0057 - F Corrections TDD UL-DL configurations 15.1.0
2019-06 RAN5#83 R5-194680 0066 - F Demod section 5 general update 15.1.0
2019-06 RAN5#83 R5-194689 0073 - F Addition of text for FR1 PBCH demodulation test case 15.1.0
2019-06 RAN5#83 R5-194690 0074 - F Update to 2Rx TDD FR2 PDSCH Type A test case 15.1.0
2019-06 RAN5#83 R5-194691 0075 - F Update to FR2 PDCCH config param 15.1.0
2019-06 RAN5#83 R5-194692 0076 - F Addition of text for FR2 PBCH demodulation test case 15.1.0
2019-06 RAN5#83 R5-194693 0077 - F Update to section 8 CSI reporting 15.1.0
2019-06 RAN5#83 R5-194979 0063 1 F Further updates to 2Rx TDD FR1 PDSCH mapping Type A test 15.1.0
case
2019-06 RAN5#83 R5-194980 0032 1 F Introduction of TC 6.4.3.2_1 4Rx TDD FR1 RI reporting for both 15.1.0
SA and NSA
2019-06 RAN5#83 R5-194981 0034 1 F Adding test case 6.2.2.1.2.2, 2Rx FDD FR1 periodic subband 15.1.0
CQI reporting under fading conditions for both SA and NSA
2019-06 RAN5#83 R5-194982 0053 1 F Update to 4Rx FDD FR1 PDSCH mapping Type A performance 15.1.0
4x4 MIMO with baseline Rx
4x4 MIMO with enhanced Rx
2019-06 RAN5#83 R5-194984 0037 1 F Editorial changes to TS 38.521-4 test case 6.3.2.1.2 15.1.0
2019-06 RAN5#83 R5-194985 0038 1 F Introduction to TS 38.521-4 test case 6.3.3.1.1 15.1.0
2019-06 RAN5#83 R5-194989 0059 1 F Modification of 2Rx FDD FR1 PDSCH mapping Type A 15.1.0
performance - enhanced Rx
2019-06 RAN5#83 R5-194990 0060 1 F Modification of 2Rx TDD FR1 PDSCH mapping Type A and CSI- 15.1.0
RS overlapped with PDSCH performance - baseline Rx
2019-06 RAN5#83 R5-194991 0061 1 F Modification of 2Rx FDD FR1 PDCCH 1 Tx 15.1.0
2019-06 RAN5#83 R5-194992 0062 1 F Modification of 2Rx FDD FR1 PDCCH 2 Tx 15.1.0
2019-06 RAN5#83 R5-194993 0042 1 F Update to test case 5.3.2.2.1 2Rx TDD FR1 PDCCH 1 Tx 15.1.0
antenna performance for both SA and NSA
2019-06 RAN5#83 R5-194995 0044 1 F Update to test case 5.3.3.1.1 4Rx FDD FR1 PDCCH 1 Tx 15.1.0
2019-06 RAN5#83 R5-194996 0045 1 F Update to test case 5.3.3.1.2 4Rx FDD FR1 PDCCH 2 Tx 15.1.0
2019-06 RAN5#83 R5-194999 0055 1 F Update to FR1 demod test case 5.2.2.1.2_1 15.1.0
2019-06 RAN5#83 R5-195000 0078 1 F Update to RI Reporting Accuracy test 15.1.0
2019-06 RAN5#83 R5-195001 0049 1 F Updated to Annexes for performance tests 15.1.0
2019-06 RAN5#83 R5-195002 0068 1 F Demod section 2-4 update 15.1.0
2019-06 RAN5#83 R5-195003 0058 1 F Modification of 2Rx FDD FR1 PDSCH mapping Type A 15.1.0
performance - baseline Rx
2019-06 RAN5#83 R5-195088 0029 1 F Editorial Aligning CSI common test parameters with core 15.1.0
specification
2019-06 RAN5#83 R5-195089 0031 1 F Updating of E-UTRA test frequency for DEMOD test cases 15.1.0
2019-06 RAN5#83 R5-195098 0079 - F Performance implementation of FR2 UL demod OTA tests using 15.1.0
single pol Rx TE
ETSI
2x4 MIMO with baseline Rx
2019-06 RAN5#83 R5-195171 0033 1 F Introducing MU and TT clauses in annex F for Channel State 15.1.0
Information reporting test cases
2019-06 RAN5#83 R5-195172 0069 1 F Annex update for PDSCH PDCCH minimum test time 15.1.0
2019-06 RAN5#83 R5-195413 0067 1 F Update to section 9 and 10 of Demod spec 15.1.0
2019-06 RAN5#83 R5-195438 0050 2 F Introducing 5.2.2.1.4_1 2Rx FDD FR1 PDSCH Mapping Type A 15.1.0
and LTE-NR coexistence performance
2019-06 RAN5#83 R5-195439 0051 2 F Introducing 5.2.3.1.4_1 4Rx FDD FR1 PDSCH Mapping Type A 15.1.0
and LTE-NR coexistence performance
2019-06 RAN5#83 R5-195440 0064 1 F Addition of new test case for 2Rx FDD FR1 periodic CQI 15.1.0
reporting under AWGN
2019-06 RAN5#83 R5-195441 0065 1 F Update to 2Rx TDD FR1 periodic CQI reporting under AWGN 15.1.0
2019-06 RAN5#83 R5-195442 0070 1 F Addition of SDR test case for single carrier in SA mode 15.1.0
2019-06 RAN5#83 R5-195443 0072 1 F Addition of FR1 SDR test case for CA in NSA mode 15.1.0
ETSI
History
Document history
V15.0.0 May 2019 Publication
V15.1.0 July 2019 Publication
ETSI

Ts 13852104v150100p

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ts 13852104v150100p

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ETSI TS 138 521-4 V15.1.

650 Route des Lucioles

Tel.: +33 4 92 94 42 00 Fax: +33 4 93 65 47 16

Siret N° 348 623 562 00017 - NAF 742 C

The present document can be downloaded from:

Intellectual Property Rights

Modal verbs terminology

7.3.2.1 FDD..................................................................................................................................................... 187

10.2B.1.3 EN-DC including FR1 and FR2 NR carriers....................................................................................... 209

Annex A (normative): Measurement channels ................................................................................211

A.5.1 OCNG Patterns for FDD ................................................................................................................................ 253

Annex B (normative): Propagation conditions ...............................................................................255

Annex C (normative): Downlink physical channels ........................................................................272

Annex D (normative): E-UTRA link setup config for NSA testing................................................278

Annex E (normative): Environmental conditions ...........................................................................282

F.1.1.3 Measurement of Channel State Information reporting.............................................................................. 288

Annex G (normative): Statistical Testing .........................................................................................294

Annex H (informative): Test Procedure for FR2 Demod Testing ....................................................312

x the first digit:

1 presented to TSG for information;

2 presented to TSG for approval;

3 or greater indicates TSG approved document under change control.

- For a specific reference, subsequent revisions do not apply.

[1] 3GPP TR 21.905: "Vocabulary for 3GPP Specifications".

[9] 3GPP TS 38.211: "NR; Physical channels and modulation".

[10] 3GPP TS 38.212: "NR; Multiplexing and channel coding".

[11] 3GPP TS 38.213: "NR; Physical layer procedures for control".

[12] 3GPP TS 38.214: "NR; Physical layer procedures for data".

3 Definition of terms, symbols and abbreviations

DL BWP: DL bandwidth part as defined in TS 38.213 [11].

EN-DC: E-UTRA-NR Dual Connectivity as defined in TS 37.340 [13, Section 4.1.2].

FR1: Frequency range 1 as defined in TS 38.101-3 [4, Section 5.1].

FR2: Frequency range 2 as defined in TS 38.101-3 [4, Section 5.1].

SSB: SS/PBCH block as defined in TS 38.211 [9, Section 7.8.3].

μ Subcarrier spacing configuration as defined in TS 38.211 [9, Section 4.2]

CSI-IM CSI Interference Measurement

4.1 Relationship between minimum requirements and test

The shared risk principle is defined in Recommendation ITU-R M.1545 [X].

4.2 Applicability of minimum requirements

4.3 Specification suffix information

Table 4.3-1: Definition of suffixes

4.4 Conducted requirements

- Mode 1: Conditions with external noise source

- Wanted signal with power level Es is transmitted.

- Mode 2: Noise free conditions

- Wanted signal with power level Es is transmitted.

- No external noise transmitted.

4.4.1 Reference point

4.4.2 SNR definition

4.5 Radiated requirements

- Mode 1: conditions with external noise source

- Wanted signal with power level Es is transmitted.

- Mode 2: Noise free conditions

- Wanted signal with power level Es is transmitted.

- No external noise transmitted.

4.5.1 Reference point

Reference point for test

4.5.2 SNR definition

SNR = SNRBB + ∆BB

where ∆BB is specified in clause 4.5.3.

The reference point SNR is defined as:

4.5.3.2 Noc for NR operating bands in FR2

NocMB = NocSB + ΣMBP